Honeywell VCR DCP200 User Manual
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
DCP200 Graphical Profiler Controller  
with optional Recorder  
51-52-25-150  
Issue 1  
April 2009  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
This manual supplements the Concise Product manual(s) supplied with each instrument at  
the time of shipment. Information in this installation, wiring and operation manual is subject to  
change without notice.  
Copyright © Honeywell Inc, April 2009, all rights reserved. No part of this publication may be  
reproduced, transmitted, transcribed or stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any  
language in any form by any means without the written permission of Honeywell Inc.  
Copies of this manual are available in electronic format on the Honeywell web site  
www.honeywell.com/ps. Printed versions are available from Honeywell or its representatives.  
Note:  
It is strongly recommended that applications incorporate a high or low limit protective  
device, which will shut down the equipment at a preset process condition in order to  
prevent possible damage to property or products.  
WARNING:  
THE INTERNATIONAL HAZARD SYMBOL IS INSCRIBED ADJACENT TO THE REAR  
CONNECTION TERMINALS. IT IS IMPORTANT TO READ THIS MANUAL BEFORE  
INSTALLING OR COMMISSIONING THE UNIT.  
WARNING:  
THIS SYMBOL MEANS THE EQUIPMENT IS PROTECTED THROUGHOUT BY DOUBLE  
INSULATION.  
Products covered by this manual are suitable for Indoor use, Installation Category II,  
Pollution category 2 environments.  
This user guide covers all versions of the Honeywell DCP200 Profile controller & Recorder.  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Page iii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Warranty and Returns Statement  
These products are sold by Honeywell Inc under the warranties set forth in the following  
paragraphs. Such warranties are extended only with respect to a purchase of these products,  
as new merchandise, directly from Honeywell or from a Honeywell distributor, representative  
or reseller and are extended only to the first buyer thereof who purchases them other than for  
the purpose of resale.  
Warranty  
These products are warranted to be free from functional defects in material and workmanship  
at the time the products leave the factory and to conform at that time to the specifications set  
forth in the relevant Honeywell manuals sheet or sheets, for such products for a period of 18  
months.  
THERE ARE NO EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, WHICH EXTEND BEYOND THE  
WARRANTIES HEREIN AND ABOVE SET FORTH. NO WARRANTY IS MADE OF  
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE WITH RESPECT TO THE  
PRODUCTS.  
Limitations  
Honeywell shall not be liable for any incidental damages, consequential damages, special  
damages, or any other damages, costs or expenses excepting only the cost or expense of  
repair or replacement as described above. Products must be installed and maintained in  
accordance with Honeywell’s instructions. There is no warranty against damage to the  
product resulting from corrosion. Users are responsible for the suitability of the products to  
their application.  
For a valid warranty claim, the product must be returned carriage paid to the supplier within  
the warranty period. The product must be properly packaged to avoid damage from  
Electrostatic Discharge or other forms of harm during transit.  
Contacts  
World Wide Web  
The following lists Honeywell's World Wide Web sites that will be of interest to our  
customers. Honeywell Organization WWW Address (URL)  
Corporate http://www.honeywell.com  
Honeywell Field Solutions http://www.honeywell.com/ps  
Technical tips http://content.honeywell.com/ipc/faq  
Telephone  
Contact us by telephone at the numbers listed below.  
Organization Phone Number  
United States and Canada Honeywell 1-800-423-9883  
Tech. Support 1-800-525-7439 Service  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Page iv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
How to use this manual  
This manual is structured to give easy access to the information required for all aspects of  
the installation and use and of the Graphical Controller. The main sections are shown here,  
followed by a full table of contents.  
Section 1:  
Section 2:  
Section 3:  
Section 4:  
Introduction - A brief description of the product and it’s features.  
Installation - Unpacking, installing and panel mounting instructions.  
Field Upgrade Options - Installation of the plug-in option modules.  
Wiring Instructions - Guidance on good wiring practice, noise avoidance,  
wiring diagrams and input/output connections.  
Section 5:  
Section 6:  
Section 7:  
Powering Up - Powering up procedure and descriptions of displays & switches.  
Messages & Error Indications - Display Messages and fault indications.  
Configuration & Use - Describes operating and configuration modes available.  
These include Operation Mode; the Main and Configuration menus; the Easy Setup Wizard;  
Supervisor Mode; Automatic tuning; Product and Service Information. Also available on  
some models are menus to setup the USB, Data Recorder and Profiler features.  
Section 8:  
The USB Interface Option – Describes uploading or downloading of  
instrument settings, profiles or recorder logs to a USB memory stick.  
Section 9: The Data Recorder Option – Describes the Data recorder feature. This allows  
process data to be stored in to memory for later download and analysis.  
Section 10: Profiler – Describes the Profiler feature. A profile controls the value of the  
setpoint over time; increasing, decreasing or holding its value as required.  
Section 11: Manually Tuning - Advice on manually adjusting the controller to the process  
characteristics.  
Sections 12: Serial Communications - Details the physical layer and message formats  
used for the RS485 and Ethernet communications options.  
Sections 13: Modbus Parameters - Details the parameter addresses and data formats used  
for the Modbus RTU and TCP communications protocols.  
Section 14: Calibration - Step-by-step instructions to calibrate the instrument. This section  
is intended for use by suitably qualified personnel.  
Appendix 1: Glossary - Explanations of the terms used and product features.  
Appendix 2: PC Software – Using the software suite.  
Appendix 3: Specifications - Technical specifications for all products in the range.  
Appendix 4: Product Coding - Product model/ordering codes.  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Page 5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Page Number:  
Contents  
Warranty and Returns Statement.................................................................................................... iv  
1
2
Introduction .......................................................................................................................... 14  
Installation ............................................................................................................................ 15  
Unpacking ...........................................................................................................................................15  
Installation...........................................................................................................................................15  
Panel-Mounting ...................................................................................................................................15  
Cleaning..............................................................................................................................................16  
Field Upgrade Options......................................................................................................... 17  
Options Modules and Functions...........................................................................................................17  
Preparing to Install or Remove Options Modules..................................................................................18  
Removing/Replacing Option Modules ..................................................................................................19  
Replacing the Instrument in its Housing ...............................................................................................20  
Auto Detection of Option Modules........................................................................................................20  
Replacement of Power Supply or Input Boards ....................................................................................20  
Data Recorder Board...........................................................................................................................21  
Electrical Installation ........................................................................................................... 22  
Installation Considerations...................................................................................................................22  
AC Power Wiring - Neutral (for 100 to 240V AC versions) ....................................................................22  
Wire Isolation.......................................................................................................................................22  
Use of Shielded Cable.........................................................................................................................23  
Noise Suppression at Source...............................................................................................................23  
Sensor Placement (Thermocouple or RTD)..........................................................................................24  
Thermocouple Wire Identification Chart ...............................................................................................24  
Connections and Wiring.......................................................................................................................25  
Power Connections ........................................................................................................................26  
Universal Input Connections...........................................................................................................27  
Option Slot 1 Connections..............................................................................................................29  
Option Slot 2 Connections..............................................................................................................30  
Option Slot 3 Connections..............................................................................................................32  
Option Slot A Connections..............................................................................................................35  
Option Slot B Connections..............................................................................................................36  
Powering Up ......................................................................................................................... 37  
Powering Up Procedure.......................................................................................................................37  
Front Panel Overview ..........................................................................................................................37  
Display ................................................................................................................................................37  
LED Functions.....................................................................................................................................38  
Keypad................................................................................................................................................38  
Messages and Error Indications ......................................................................................... 39  
Start-up Errors.....................................................................................................................................39  
3
4
5
6
Page 6  
Table Of Contents  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Input Problems ....................................................................................................................................39  
USB Data Transfer Problems...............................................................................................................40  
Getting Help ........................................................................................................................................40  
Configuration and Use .........................................................................................................41  
Operation Mode...................................................................................................................................41  
Base, Trend & Profile Operating Screens....................................................................................... 41  
Adjusting the Local Setpoint(s) ...................................................................................................... 43  
Adjusting the Setpoint Ramp Rate ................................................................................................. 44  
Selecting Automatic or Manual Mode............................................................................................. 44  
Control Enable or Disable.............................................................................................................. 44  
Main Menu...........................................................................................................................................45  
Entry into the Main Menu............................................................................................................... 45  
Unlock Codes................................................................................................................................ 45  
Setup Wizard.......................................................................................................................................46  
Manual entry to the Setup Wizard.................................................................................................. 46  
Supervisor Mode .................................................................................................................................47  
Entry into Supervisor Mode............................................................................................................ 47  
Configuration Menu .............................................................................................................................48  
Entry into the Configuration Menu.................................................................................................. 48  
Input Configuration Sub-Menu .............................................................................................................49  
Control Configuration Sub-Menu..........................................................................................................50  
Output Configuration Sub-Menu...........................................................................................................52  
Alarm Configuration Sub-Menu............................................................................................................53  
Communications Configuration Sub-Menu ...........................................................................................53  
Recorder Configuration Sub-Menu.......................................................................................................54  
Clock Configuration Sub-Menu ............................................................................................................55  
Display Configuration Sub-Menu..........................................................................................................55  
Lock Code View...................................................................................................................................56  
Lost Lock Codes............................................................................................................................ 56  
Resetting To Defaults ..........................................................................................................................57  
Automatic Tuning Menu.......................................................................................................................57  
Profiler Setup Menu.............................................................................................................................58  
Profiler Control Menu...........................................................................................................................61  
USB Menu...........................................................................................................................................62  
Recorder Menu....................................................................................................................................63  
Product Information Mode....................................................................................................................63  
Service Information Mode....................................................................................................................64  
The USB Interface.................................................................................................................65  
Using the USB Port..............................................................................................................................65  
USB Memory Stick Folders & Files ................................................................................................ 65  
The Data Recorder Option ...................................................................................................66  
7
8
9
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Table Of Contents  
Page 7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Introduction .........................................................................................................................................66  
Changes To Operation Mode...............................................................................................................66  
The Profiler Option............................................................................................................... 67  
Profile Components.............................................................................................................................67  
Profile Starting & Standard Segments..................................................................................................68  
Loops Segments..................................................................................................................................69  
Profile Running / Holding vs. Hold Segments.......................................................................................69  
The Auto-Hold Feature ........................................................................................................................70  
Profile Cycles & Repeat Sequences.....................................................................................................71  
Power/Signal Lost Recovery Actions....................................................................................................71  
Profile End Actions ..............................................................................................................................72  
Profile Abort Actions ............................................................................................................................73  
Manually Tuning Controllers............................................................................................... 74  
Single Control Tuning (PID with Primary Output only) ..........................................................................74  
Dual Control Tuning (PID with Primary and Secondary Outputs) ..........................................................75  
PI Tuning (Valve, Damper & Speed Controllers) ..................................................................................75  
Fine Tuning. ........................................................................................................................................77  
Serial Communications........................................................................................................ 78  
Supported Protocols............................................................................................................................78  
RS485 Configuration ...........................................................................................................................78  
Ethernet Configuration.........................................................................................................................78  
Supported Modbus Functions ..............................................................................................................80  
Function Descriptions ..........................................................................................................................80  
Exception Responses.....................................................................................................................82  
Modbus Parameters............................................................................................................. 83  
Example Register Address Calculations .........................................................................................83  
Universal Process Input Parameters....................................................................................................84  
Option Slot A Parameters ....................................................................................................................86  
Option Slot B Parameters ....................................................................................................................87  
Option Slot 1 Parameters.....................................................................................................................88  
Option Slot 2 Parameters.....................................................................................................................90  
Option Slot 3 Parameters.....................................................................................................................93  
Option Slot 4 Parameters.....................................................................................................................96  
Setpoint Parameters..........................................................................................................................101  
Control Parameters............................................................................................................................102  
Alarm parameters..............................................................................................................................104  
Recorder & Clock Parameters............................................................................................................106  
Display Parameters ...........................................................................................................................109  
Profiler Control & Status Parameters .................................................................................................112  
Profile Setup Via Modbus ..................................................................................................................114  
Instrument Data.................................................................................................................................129  
10  
11  
12  
13  
Page 8  
Table Of Contents  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
14  
15  
Calibration...........................................................................................................................130  
Calibration Reminder.........................................................................................................................130  
Equipment Required For Checking or Calibrating The Universal Input................................................130  
Calibration Check ..............................................................................................................................130  
Recalibration Procedure ....................................................................................................................131  
Appendix 1 – Glossary of Terms Used..............................................................................132  
Active Setpoint...................................................................................................................................132  
Actual Setpoint ..................................................................................................................................132  
Alarm Configuration...........................................................................................................................132  
Alarm Operation ................................................................................................................................134  
Alarm Inhibit ......................................................................................................................................135  
Alarm Types......................................................................................................................................135  
Alternative Setpoint............................................................................................................................135  
Auto Pre-Tune...................................................................................................................................135  
Automatic Reset ................................................................................................................................135  
Auxiliary Input....................................................................................................................................136  
Auxiliary Input Lower Limit .................................................................................................................136  
Auxiliary Input Offset..........................................................................................................................136  
Auxiliary Input Type...........................................................................................................................136  
Auxiliary Input Upper Limit .................................................................................................................136  
Band Alarm Value..............................................................................................................................136  
Bar Graphs........................................................................................................................................137  
Bias (Manual Reset) ..........................................................................................................................137  
Bumpless Transfer.............................................................................................................................137  
Cascade Control................................................................................................................................137  
Clock Configuration ...........................................................................................................................138  
Communications Write Enable...........................................................................................................138  
Configuration Menu ...........................................................................................................................138  
Contactor...........................................................................................................................................138  
Control Configuration.........................................................................................................................138  
Control Deviation...............................................................................................................................139  
Control Action....................................................................................................................................139  
Control Enable/Disable......................................................................................................................139  
Control Type......................................................................................................................................139  
Controller...........................................................................................................................................139  
Controller Mode.................................................................................................................................139  
Correcting Variable............................................................................................................................139  
CPU ..................................................................................................................................................140  
Current Proportioning Control ............................................................................................................140  
Custom Display Mode........................................................................................................................140  
Cycle Time ........................................................................................................................................140  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Table Of Contents  
Page 9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Data Recorder...................................................................................................................................140  
Deadband..........................................................................................................................................140  
Derivative Action................................................................................................................................140  
Deviation Alarm Value .......................................................................................................................141  
Digital Input .......................................................................................................................................141  
Direct Acting Control..........................................................................................................................141  
Display Configuration.........................................................................................................................141  
Display Languages ............................................................................................................................141  
Display Resolution.............................................................................................................................142  
Effective Setpoint...............................................................................................................................142  
Engineering Units ..............................................................................................................................142  
Ethernet.............................................................................................................................................142  
Indicator ............................................................................................................................................142  
Input Configuration ............................................................................................................................142  
Input Filter Time Constant..................................................................................................................142  
Input Range.......................................................................................................................................143  
Input Span.........................................................................................................................................143  
Integral Time Constant.......................................................................................................................143  
Latching Relay...................................................................................................................................143  
LED...................................................................................................................................................143  
Linear Input .......................................................................................................................................143  
Linear Output.....................................................................................................................................144  
Limit Controller ..................................................................................................................................144  
Local Setpoints..................................................................................................................................144  
Lock Codes .......................................................................................................................................144  
Logical Combination of Alarms...........................................................................................................144  
Loop Alarm........................................................................................................................................145  
LSD...................................................................................................................................................145  
mADC ...............................................................................................................................................145  
Main Menu ........................................................................................................................................146  
Manual Loop Alarm Time...................................................................................................................146  
Manual Mode.....................................................................................................................................146  
Master & Slave Controllers ................................................................................................................146  
Minimum Duration Of Change............................................................................................................147  
Modbus RTU .....................................................................................................................................147  
Modbus TCP .....................................................................................................................................147  
Modulating Valve...............................................................................................................................148  
Multi-Point Scaling.............................................................................................................................148  
mVDC ...............................................................................................................................................148  
On-Off Control...................................................................................................................................148  
On-Off Differential (On-Off Hysteresis)...............................................................................................148  
Page 10  
Table Of Contents  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Operation Mode.................................................................................................................................149  
Output Configuration..........................................................................................................................149  
Overlap/Deadband.............................................................................................................................149  
PD Control.........................................................................................................................................151  
PI Control ..........................................................................................................................................151  
PID Control........................................................................................................................................151  
PLC...................................................................................................................................................151  
Pre-Tune ...........................................................................................................................................151  
Power Output Limits ..........................................................................................................................152  
Primary Proportional Band.................................................................................................................153  
Process High Alarm n Value ..............................................................................................................153  
Process Input ....................................................................................................................................153  
Process Low Alarm n Value...............................................................................................................153  
Process Variable (PV)........................................................................................................................153  
Process Variable Offset .....................................................................................................................154  
Profile Control Menu..........................................................................................................................154  
Profile Events ....................................................................................................................................154  
Profile Header....................................................................................................................................154  
Profile Segments ...............................................................................................................................154  
Profile Setup Menu............................................................................................................................154  
Profiler...............................................................................................................................................155  
Profiler Mode.....................................................................................................................................155  
Proportional Control...........................................................................................................................155  
Rate ..................................................................................................................................................155  
Rate Of Change Alarm.......................................................................................................................155  
Recorder Configuration......................................................................................................................155  
Recorder Option ................................................................................................................................156  
Recorder Menu..................................................................................................................................156  
Relay.................................................................................................................................................156  
Remote Setpoint (RSP) .....................................................................................................................156  
Retransmit Output..............................................................................................................................156  
Retransmit Output n Scale Maximum.................................................................................................156  
Retransmit Output n Scale Minimum..................................................................................................157  
Reset To Defaults..............................................................................................................................157  
Reverse Acting Control......................................................................................................................157  
RS485...............................................................................................................................................157  
RTD...................................................................................................................................................158  
Scale Range Upper Limit...................................................................................................................158  
Scale Range Lower Limit...................................................................................................................158  
Secondary Proportional Band ............................................................................................................158  
Self-Tune...........................................................................................................................................159  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Table Of Contents  
Page 11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Sensor Break Pre-Set Power.............................................................................................................159  
Serial Communications Configuration ................................................................................................160  
Serial Communications Option...........................................................................................................160  
Setpoint.............................................................................................................................................160  
Setpoint Upper Limit ..........................................................................................................................160  
Setpoint Lower Limit ..........................................................................................................................160  
Setpoint Ramp Editing.......................................................................................................................160  
Setpoint Ramp Rate ..........................................................................................................................161  
Setpoint Selection..............................................................................................................................161  
Setup Wizard.....................................................................................................................................161  
Solid State Relay (SSR).....................................................................................................................161  
Solenoid Valve ..................................................................................................................................162  
Supervisor Mode ...............................................................................................................................162  
Thermocouple ...................................................................................................................................162  
Three Point Stepping Control.............................................................................................................162  
Time Proportioning Control................................................................................................................163  
Trend Display ....................................................................................................................................163  
Tuning...............................................................................................................................................163  
Tuning Menu .....................................................................................................................................163  
Triac..................................................................................................................................................164  
USB Menu.........................................................................................................................................164  
Valve Motor Drive Control (VMD).......................................................................................................164  
VDC ..................................................................................................................................................164  
VMD..................................................................................................................................................164  
PC SOFTWARE................................................................................................................... 165  
Using The Software...........................................................................................................................165  
Instrument Configuration....................................................................................................................166  
Profile Creation And Editing...............................................................................................................167  
Changing the Start-up Splash Screen................................................................................................169  
Changing the Alternate Display Language .........................................................................................169  
Instrument Simulation........................................................................................................................169  
Configuring The Connection ..............................................................................................................169  
Network Configuration For Modbus TCP Options...............................................................................171  
Appendix 2 - Specifications............................................................................................... 173  
Universal Process Input.....................................................................................................................173  
General Input Specifications.........................................................................................................173  
Thermocouple Input......................................................................................................................173  
Resistance Temperature Detector (RTD) Input .............................................................................174  
DC Linear Input............................................................................................................................175  
Auxiliary Inputs..................................................................................................................................175  
Digital Inputs......................................................................................................................................176  
16  
17  
Page 12  
Table Of Contents  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Output Specifications.........................................................................................................................177  
Communications................................................................................................................................179  
Display ..............................................................................................................................................180  
Control Loop......................................................................................................................................180  
Data Recorder Option........................................................................................................................180  
Profiler Option....................................................................................................................................181  
Alarms...............................................................................................................................................181  
Conditions For Use............................................................................................................................182  
Standards..........................................................................................................................................182  
Dimensions........................................................................................................................................182  
Appendix 3 - Product Coding.............................................................................................183  
18  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Table Of Contents  
Page 13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
1 Introduction  
This product is a 1/4 DIN size (96 x 96mm front) microprocessor based graphical process  
controller, featuring a 160 x 80 pixel, monochrome LCD with a dual colour (red/green)  
backlight. It can control process variables from a variety of sources such as temperature,  
pressure, flow and level.  
The operating voltage is either 100-240V at 50/60 Hz or 24V-48V AC/DC depending on the  
model purchased. Optional features include a USB interface, RS485 or Ethernet  
communications, profile controlling and data recording. Non-volatile memory protects against  
data or configuration loss during power outages. If the unit is left un-powered, a lithium  
battery powers the data recorder’s real-time clock for a minimum of one year.  
The USB Interface option allows uploading or downloading instrument configuration settings  
to/from a USB memory stick, for easy configuration of multiple instruments or transfer to/from  
the PC configuration software. If the Data Recorder of Profiler options are fitted, recordings  
and profile information can also be transferred via the memory stick.  
The Data Recorder option allows the user to make recordings of the process over time.  
Recordings can be transferred to a memory stick using the USB Port or downloaded using  
one of the communications options.  
The Profiler option allows the user to predefine up 255 segments, shared amongst up to 64  
Setpoint Profiles. These control the setpoint level over time, increasing, decreasing or  
holding its value as required. When combined with the real-time clock of the Data Recorder  
option, the profiling capabilities are expanded to allow automatic program start at a defined  
time and day.  
Inputs are user configurable for thermocouple and RTD probes, as well as linear process  
signal types such as mVDC, VDC or mADC. Multipoint scaling can compensate for non-  
linear signals. Output options include relays, SSR drivers, triacs or linear mV/voltage  
modules. These can be used for process control, alarms or retransmission of the process  
variable or setpoint to external devices. Transmitter Power Supply options can provide an  
unregulated 24V DC (22mA) auxiliary output voltage, or a 0 to 10VDC stabilised excitation  
for external signal transmitters.  
Alarm indication is standard on all instruments; up to five alarms can be defined. Alarms may  
be set as process high or low, deviation (active above or below controller setpoint), band  
(active both above and below setpoint), rate of input change, control loop or signal break  
types. Alarm status can be indicated by lighting an LED, changing the display backlight  
colour or viewing the alarm status screen. These alarms can be linked to any suitable output.  
The controller can be programmed for on-off, time proportioning, or current proportioning  
control implementations, depending on the output modules fitted, and feature manual or  
automatic tuning of the PID parameters. A secondary control output is available when  
additional output modules are fitted. Optional analogue Remote Setpoint inputs can be  
included. Configuration of the major settings is made easy by a Setup Wizard that runs  
automatically at first ever power-up or whenever option modules have been changed. Access  
to the full range of parameters is via a simple menu driven front panel interface, or the PC  
based configuration software.  
Page 14  
Introduction  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
2 Installation  
Unpacking  
1. Remove the product from its packing. Retain the packing for future use, in case it is  
necessary to transport the instrument to a different site or to return it to the supplier for  
repair/testing.  
2. The instrument is supplied with a panel gasket and push-fit fixing strap. Concise manual(s)  
are supplied with the instrument, in one or more languages. Examine the delivered items  
for damage or defects. If any are found, contact your supplier immediately.  
Installation  
CAUTION:  
Installation should only be performed by technically competent personnel. It is the  
responsibility of the installing engineer to ensure that the configuration is safe.  
Local Regulations regarding electrical installation & safety must be observed (e.g.  
US National Electrical Code (NEC) or Canadian Electrical Code).  
Figure 1. Main dimensions  
Panel-Mounting  
The mounting panel must be rigid and may be up to 6.0mm (0.25 inches) thick. The cut-out  
size is:  
92mm x 92mm (+0.5mm / -0.0mm).  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Installation  
Page 15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                                               
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Instruments may be mounted side-by-side in a multiple installation, but instrument to panel  
moisture and dust sealing will be compromised. Allow a 20mm gap above, below and behind  
the instrument for ventilation. The cut-out width (for n instruments) is:  
(96n - 4) mm or (3.78n - 0.16) inches  
If panel sealing must be maintained, mount each instrument into an individual cut-out with  
6mm or more clearance between the edges of the holes.  
Note:  
The mounting clamp tongues may engage the ratchets either on the sides or the  
top/bottom faces of the Instrument housing. When installing several Instruments side-by-  
side in one cut-out, use the ratchets on the top/bottom faces.  
CAUTION:  
Ensure the inside of the panel remains within the instrument operating temperature  
and that there is adequate airflow to prevent overheating.  
Gasket  
Mounting Panel  
Clamp  
Slide mounting clamp over  
the instrument housing  
towards rear face of  
mounting panel until the  
tongues engage in ratchets  
and instrument is clamped in  
position.  
Ratchets  
Instrument  
Housing  
Hold instrument firmly in  
position (apply pressure to  
bezel only)  
Figure 2. Panel-Mounting the instrument  
CAUTION:  
Do not remove the panel gasket, as this may result in inadequate clamping and  
sealing of the instrument to the panel.  
Once the instrument is installed in its mounting panel, it may be subsequently removed from  
it’s housing, if necessary, as described in the Fitting and Removing Option Modules section.  
Cleaning  
Clean the front panel by washing with warm soapy water and dry immediately If the USB  
option is fitted, close the USB port cover before cleaning.  
Page 16  
Installation  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
3 Field Upgrade Options  
Options Modules and Functions  
The available plug-in modules, options and accessories are shown in below:  
Table 1. Options & Accessories  
BOARD  
IDENTIFICATION  
NUMBER  
PART  
DESCRIPTION  
NUMBER  
OPTION SLOT 1  
51453391-517  
51453391-502  
51453391-503  
51453391-504  
716/01  
716/02  
716/03  
639/01  
Single Relay Output for option slot 1  
Single SSR Driver Output for option slot 1  
Triac Output for option slot 1  
Linear mA / Voltage Output module for option slot 1  
OPTION SLOT 2 or 3  
51453391-518  
51453391-510  
51453391-507  
51453391-519  
51453391-508  
51453391-509  
51453391-111  
717/01  
644/01  
717/02  
644/02  
647/01  
640/01  
642/01  
Single Relay Output for option slot 2 or 3  
Dual Relay Output for option slot 2 or 3  
Single SSR Driver Output for option slot 2 or 3  
Dual SSR Driver Output for option slot 2 or 3  
Triac module Output for slot 2 or 3  
Linear mA / Voltage Output for option slot 2 or 3  
24VDC Transmitter Power Supply for option slot 2 or 3  
OPTION SLOT A  
51453391-513  
51453391-515  
51453391-512  
51453391-521  
641/02  
653/01  
680/01  
707/01  
Digital Input for option slot A  
Basic Auxiliary Input for option slot A  
RS485 Serial Communications for option slot A  
Ethernet Communications for option slot A  
OPTION SLOT B  
51453391-516  
OPTION SLOT 4  
51453391-520  
ACCESSORIES  
51453391-522  
641/01  
703/01  
Full Auxiliary Input (inc digital input B) for option slot B  
4-Relay Output for option slot 4  
Blue Control PC Configuration Software & Lead  
Note:  
Modules can be either pre-installed at the time of manufacture, or retrofitted in the field.  
CAUTION:  
Plastic pegs prevent fitting of older non-reinforced single relay modules (Board  
Identification Numbers 637/01 and 638/01). Fitting the older relay modules reduces  
the isolation rating to Basic 240V Isolation and is therefore not recommended.  
Remove this peg when fitting Dual Relay Modules.  
Note:  
All dual relay modules have reinforced isolation.  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Electrical Installation  
Page 17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                             
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Board Positions  
Board Mounting Struts  
Option 4 Module  
Option A Module  
Option 3 Module  
Universal Input Board  
Power Supply Board  
Option B Module  
Option 1 Module  
(hidden below B)  
Option 2 Module  
Option C Module  
Figure 3. Rear view (uncased) & board positions  
Preparing to Install or Remove Options Modules  
CAUTION:  
Before removing the instrument from it’s housing, ensure that all power has been  
removed from the rear terminals. Modules / boards should only be replaced by a  
trained technician.  
1. Remove the instrument from its housing by gripping the edges of the front panel (there is a  
finger grip on each edge) and pull the instrument forwards. This will release the instrument  
from the rear connectors in the housing and will give access to the boards.  
2. Take note of the orientation of the instrument for subsequent replacement into the  
housing. The positions of the boards in the instrument are shown above.  
Page 18  
Electrical Installation  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Main Board Connectors  
POWER SUPPLY  
BOARD  
Transformer Colour  
Code  
Option 3 Slot  
Connector PL4B  
Option Slot A  
Connectors PL5, & PL6  
100-240V (Yellow)  
24-48V(Blue)  
Option 1 Slot  
Connectors PL7 & PL8  
Display Board  
Connections  
PC Configurator  
Socket SK1  
Option 2 Slot  
Connector PL4A  
UNIVERSAL INPUT  
BOARD  
Option Slot B  
Connectors PL2A, PL2B &  
PL2C  
Figure 4. Main board connectors  
Removing/Replacing Option Modules  
1. To remove or replace modules in Option Slots 1, 2, 3, A or B, it is necessary to detach the  
Power Supply and Input boards from the front panel by lifting first the upper and then  
lower mounting struts.  
2. Remove or fit the modules to the connectors on the Power Supply and Input boards. The  
location of the connectors is shown below. Plastic pegs prevent fitting of older non-  
reinforced single relay modules – Remove the peg to fit dual relay modules  
3. Assemble the Power Supply and Input boards together. Tongues on each option module  
locate into a slots cut into the main boards, opposite each of the connectors. Hold the  
Power and Input boards together and relocate them back on their mounting struts.  
4. Remove or replace the Slot C and 4 modules as required.  
5. Push the boards forward to ensure correct connection to the front Display/CPU board.  
CAUTION:  
Check for correct orientation of the modules and that all pins are located correctly.  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Electrical Installation  
Page 19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Replacing the Instrument in its Housing  
CAUTION:  
Before replacing the instrument in it’s housing, ensure that all power has been  
removed from the rear terminals.  
With the required option modules correctly located into their respective positions the  
instrument can be replaced into it’s housing as follows:  
1. Hold the Power Supply and Input boards together.  
2. Align the boards with the guides in the housing.  
3. Slowly and firmly, push the instrument in position.  
CAUTION:  
Ensure that the instrument is correctly orientated. A mechanical stop will operate if  
an attempt is made to insert the instrument in the wrong orientation, this stop MUST  
NOT be over-ridden.  
Auto Detection of Option Modules  
The instrument automatically detects which option modules have been fitted into each slot.  
The menus and screens change to reflect the options compatible with the hardware fitted.  
The modules fitted can be viewed in the products information menu, as detailed in the  
Product Information Mode section of this manual.  
Replacement of Power Supply or Input Boards  
It is recommended that users only change these boards if it is unavoidable..  
1. Remove the instrument from it’s housing as detailed above.  
2. Remove all option modules.  
3. Replace the Power Supply or Input board as required. Carefully observe the transformer  
colour and the case labelling to check the supply voltage when replacing the power  
supply board.  
4. Reassemble the unit in it’s case.  
5. If the input board has to be replaced, a full recalibration must be carried out before the  
instrument is used. Refer to the calibration section of this manual for instructions.  
CAUTION:  
Replacement of boards must be carried out by a trained technician.  
If the Power Supply board does not match the labelling, users may apply incorrect  
voltage resulting in irreparable damage.  
Page 20  
Electrical Installation  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                   
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Data Recorder Board  
If installed, the Data Recorder memory and Real Time Clock (RTC) components are located  
on a plug-in daughter board attached to the front Display/CPU board.  
CAUTION:  
Servicing of the Data Recorder/RTC circuit and replacement of the lithium battery  
should only be carried out by a trained technician.  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Electrical Installation  
Page 21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
4 Electrical Installation  
CAUTION:  
Installation should be only performed by technically competent personnel. It is the  
responsibility of the installing engineer to ensure that the configuration is safe.  
Local Regulations regarding electrical installation & safety must be observed (e.g.  
US National Electrical Code (NEC) or Canadian Electrical Code).  
Installation Considerations  
Ignition transformers, arc welders, motor drives, mechanical contact relays and solenoids are  
examples of devices that generate electrical noise in typical industrial environments. The  
following guidelines MUST be followed to minimise their effects.  
1. If the instrument is being installed in existing equipment, the wiring in the area should be  
checked to ensure that good wiring practices have been followed.  
2. Noise-generating devices such as those listed should be mounted in a separate  
enclosure. If this is not possible, separate them from the instrument, by the largest  
distance possible.  
3. If possible, eliminate mechanical contact relays and replace with solid-state relays. If a  
mechanical relay being powered by an output of this instrument cannot be replaced, a  
solid-state relay can be used to isolate the instrument.  
4. A separate isolation transformer to feed only the instrumentation should be considered.  
The transformer can isolate the instrument from noise found on the AC power input.  
AC Power Wiring - Neutral (for 100 to 240V AC versions)  
It is good practice to ensure that the AC neutral is at or near ground (earth) potential. A  
proper neutral will help ensure maximum performance from the instrument.  
Wire Isolation  
Four voltage levels of input and output wiring may be used with the unit:  
1. Analogue input or output (for example thermocouple, RTD, VDC, mVDC or mADC)  
2. Relays & Triac outputs  
3. SSR Driver outputs  
4. AC power  
CAUTION:  
The only wires that should run together are those of the same category.  
If any wires need to run parallel with any other lines, maintain a minimum space of 150mm  
between them.  
If wires MUST cross each other, ensure they do so at 90 degrees to minimise interference.  
Page 22  
Electrical Installation  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                                             
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Use of Shielded Cable  
All analogue signals must use shielded cable. This will help eliminate electrical noise  
induction on the wires. Connection lead length must be kept as short as possible keeping the  
wires protected by the shielding. The shield should be grounded at one end only. The  
preferred grounding location is at the sensor, transmitter or transducer.  
Noise Suppression at Source  
Usually when good wiring practices are followed, no further noise protection is necessary.  
Sometimes in severe electrical environments, the amount of noise is so great that it has to be  
suppressed at source. Many manufacturers of relays, contactors etc supply 'surge  
suppressors' which mount on the noise source. For those devices that do not have surge  
suppressors supplied, Resistance-Capacitance (RC) networks and/or Metal Oxide Varistors  
(MOV) may be added.  
Inductive coils:- MOVs are recommended for transient suppression in inductive coils,  
connected in parallel and as close as possible to the coil. Additional protection may be  
provided by adding an RC network across the MOV.  
Figure 5. Transient suppression with inductive coils  
Contacts:- Arcing may occur across contacts when they open and close. This results in  
electrical noise as well as damage to the contacts. Connecting a properly sized RC network  
can eliminate this arc.  
For circuits up to 3 amps, a combination of a 47 ohm resistor and 0.1 microfarad capacitor  
(1000 volts) is recommended. For circuits from 3 to 5 amps, connect two of these in parallel.  
Figure 6. Contact noise suppression  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Electrical Installation  
Page 23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                           
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Sensor Placement (Thermocouple or RTD)  
If the temperature probe is to be subjected to corrosive or abrasive conditions, it must be  
protected by an appropriate thermowell. The probe must be positioned to reflect true process  
temperature:  
1. In a liquid media - the most agitated area  
2. In air - the best circulated area  
CAUTION:  
The placement of probes into pipe work some distance from the heating vessel  
leads to transport delay, which results in poor control.  
For a two wire RTD, a wire link should be used in place of the third wire (see the wiring  
section for details). Two wire RTDs should only be used with lead lengths less than 3 metres.  
Use of three wire RTDs is strongly recommended to reduce errors do to lead resistance.  
Thermocouple Wire Identification Chart  
The different thermocouple types are identified by their wires colour, and where possible, the  
outer insulation as well. There are several standards in use throughout the world.  
The table below shows the wire and sheath colours used for most  
common thermocouple types. The format used in this table is:  
+ Wire  
- Wire  
Sheath  
Table 2. Thermocouple Extension Wire Colours  
Type  
International  
IEC584-3  
USA ANSI  
MC 96.1  
British  
BS1843  
French  
NFC 42-324  
German  
DIN 43710  
Black  
Black  
White  
White  
Black  
Red  
Yellow  
Yellow  
Black  
Black  
Red  
Blue  
Blue  
+*  
-
Black  
J
Blue  
White  
Blue  
Brown  
Brown  
White  
Blue  
Blue  
Red  
Yellow  
Blue  
Blue  
Red  
+
Blue  
Brown  
Brown  
T
-
Green  
Green  
White  
Yellow  
Yellow  
Red  
Brown  
Blue  
Yellow  
Yellow  
Purple  
Red  
+
-*  
Red  
Green  
K
Green  
Pink  
Pink  
White  
Orange  
Orange  
Red  
Orange  
Blue  
+
-
Orange  
N
Grey  
Grey  
White  
Grey  
Grey  
Red  
Red  
Grey  
Grey  
+
-
B
Orange  
Orange  
White  
Black  
Green  
Red  
White  
Blue  
Yellow  
Green  
Green  
Red  
+
-
Green  
White  
White  
R & S  
White  
White  
Red  
+
-
C (W5)  
Note:  
* = Wire is magnetic  
Page 24  
Electrical Installation  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                         
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Connections and Wiring  
This symbol means the equipment is protected throughout by double insulation.  
CAUTION:  
All external circuits connected must provide double insulation. Failure to comply  
with the installation instructions may impact the protection provided by the unit.  
WARNING:  
TO AVOID ELECTRICAL SHOCK, AC POWER WIRING MUST NOT BE CONNECTED TO THE  
SOURCE DISTRIBUTION PANEL UNTIL ALL WIRING PROCEDURES ARE COMPLETED.  
CHECK THE INFORMATION LABEL ON THE CASE TO DETERMINE THE CORRECT  
VOLTAGE BEFORE CONNECTING TO A LIVE SUPPLY.  
Note:  
The wiring diagram below shows all possible combinations to the main connections  
(numbered 1 to 24) in the centre of the case rear. The actual connections required depend  
upon the features available on the model and the modules and options fitted.  
Figure 7. Main Rear terminals  
Note:  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Electrical Installation  
Page 25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
The wiring diagram below shows the additional connections (numbered 25 to 42) at the  
sides of the case rear. These are required for Options Slots 4 and C if fitted.  
Figure 8. Additional Option terminals  
Note:  
Use single strand (1.2mm / AWG18 max size) copper wire throughout, except for the  
thermocouple input, where the correct thermocouple or compensating cable and  
connectors must be used.  
Power Connections  
Power Connections - Mains Powered Instruments  
Mains powered instruments operate from a 100 to 240V (±10%) 50/60Hz supply. Power  
consumption is 24VA. Connect the line voltage (live and neutral) as illustrated via a two-pole  
IEC60947-1 & IEC60947-3 compliant isolation switch / circuit breaker and a UL listed fuse  
type: 250V AC 1Amp anti-surge. If the instrument has relay outputs with contacts carrying  
mains voltage, it is recommended that the relay contacts supply should be switched and  
fused in a similar manner, but should be separate from the instruments mains supply.  
L
13  
14  
  
N
Figure 9. Mains Power Connections  
WARNING:  
CHECK THE INFORMATION LABEL ON THE CASE TO DETERMINE THE CORRECT  
VOLTAGE BEFORE CONNECTING TO A LIVE SUPPLY.  
CAUTION:  
This equipment is designed for installation in an enclosure that provides adequate  
protection against electric shock. The isolation switch should be located in close  
proximity to the unit, in easy reach of the operator and appropriately marked.  
Page 26  
Electrical Installation  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Power Connections - 24/48V AC/DC Powered Instruments  
24/48V AD/DC powered instruments will operate from a 20 to 48V AC or 22 to 55V DC  
supply. AC power consumption is 15VA max, DC power consumption is 12 watts max.  
Connection should be via a two-pole IEC60947-1 & IEC60947-3 compliant isolation switch /  
circuit breaker and a UL listed fuse type: 65v dc 1Aamp anti-surge.  
_
13  
14  
  
+
Figure 10. 24/48V AC/DC Power Connections  
WARNING:  
CHECK THE INFORMATION LABEL ON THE CASE TO DETERMINE THE CORRECT  
VOLTAGE BEFORE CONNECTING TO A LIVE SUPPLY.  
CAUTION:  
This equipment is designed for installation in an enclosure that provides adequate  
protection against electric shock. The isolation switch should be located in close  
proximity to the unit, in easy reach of the operator and appropriately marked.  
Universal Input Connections  
Universal Input Connections - Thermocouple (T/C)  
Use only the correct thermocouple wire or compensating cable from the probe to the  
instrument terminals avoiding joints in the cable if possible. Where joints are made, special  
thermocouple connectors must be used. Failure to use the correct wire type and connectors  
will lead to inaccurate readings. Ensure correct polarity of the wires by cross-referencing the  
colours with a thermocouple reference table.  
_
3
2
+
Figure 11. Thermocouple Input Connections  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Electrical Installation  
Page 27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Universal Input Connections – PT100 / NI120 (RTD) input  
For three wire RTDs, connect the resistive leg and the common legs of the RTD as  
illustrated. For a two wire RTD a wire link should be used in place of the third wire (shown by  
dotted line). Two wire RTDs should only be used when the leads are less than 3 metres long.  
Avoid cable joints.  
3
2
RTD  
1
Figure 12. RTD Input Connections  
Four wire RTDs can be used, provided that the fourth wire is left unconnected. This wire  
should be cut short or tied back so that it cannot contact any of the terminals on the rear of  
the instrument.  
Universal Input Connections - Linear Volt, mV or mA input  
Linear DC voltage, millivolt or milliamp input connections are made as illustrated. Carefully  
observe the polarity of the connections.  
_
+
3
2
1
+
_
Figure 13. DC Volt, mV & mA Input Connections  
Page 28  
Electrical Installation  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Option Slot 1 Connections  
Option Slot 1 – Single Relay Output Module  
If option slot 1 is fitted with a single relay output module, make connections as illustrated.  
The relay contacts are SPDT and rated at 2 amps resistive, 240 VAC.  
19  
20  
N/C  
COM  
21  
N/O  
Figure 14. Option Slot 1 – Single Relay Module  
Option Slot 1 – Single SSR Driver Output Module  
If option slot 1 is fitted with a single SSR driver output module, make connections as  
illustrated. The solid-state relay driver is a 0-10V DC signal, load impedance must be no less  
than 500 ohms. SSR driver outputs are not isolated from the signal input or other SSR driver  
outputs.  
19  
20  
_
21  
+
Figure 15. Option Slot 1 – Single SSR Driver Module  
Option Slot 1 - Triac Output Module  
If option slot 1 is fitted with a Triac output module, make connections as shown. This output  
is rated at 0.01 to 1 amp @ 280V AC 50/60Hz. A snubber should be fitted across inductive  
loads to ensure reliable switch off the Triac.  
20  
  
21  
Figure 16. Option Slot 1 - Triac Module  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Electrical Installation  
Page 29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Option Slot 1 - Linear Voltage or mADC Output module  
If option slot 1 is fitted with a DC linear output module, make connections as illustrated.  
_
19  
20  
21  
+
Figure 17. Option Slot 1 - Linear Voltage & mADC Module  
Option Slot 2 Connections  
Option Slot 2 – Single Relay Output Module  
If option slot 2 is fitted with a single relay output module, make connections as illustrated.  
The relay contacts are SPDT, and rated at 2 amps resistive, 240 VAC.  
22  
23  
N/C  
COM  
24  
N/O  
Figure 18. Option Slot 2 – Single Relay Module  
Option Slot 2 - Dual Relay Output Module  
If option slot 2 is fitted with a dual relay output module, make connections as illustrated. This  
module has two independent SPST relays, which share a common connection terminal. The  
contacts are rated at 2 amp resistive 240 VAC.  
22  
23  
N/O OUTPUT 2B  
COMMON  
24  
N/O OUTPUT 2A  
Figure 19. Option Slot 2 - Dual Relay Module  
Page 30  
Electrical Installation  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Option Slot 2 – Single SSR Driver Output Module  
If option slot 2 is fitted with a single SSR driver output module, make connections as  
illustrated. The solid-state relay driver is a 0-10V DC signal, load impedance must be no less  
than 500 ohms. SSR driver outputs are not isolated from the signal input or other SSR driver  
outputs.  
_
22  
23  
24  
+
Figure 20. Option Slot 2 – Single SSR Driver Module  
Option Slot 2 – Dual SSR Driver Output Module  
If option slot 2 is fitted with a dual SSR driver output module, make connections as  
illustrated. The solid-state relay drivers are a 0-10V DC signal, load impedance must be no  
less than 500 ohms. SSR driver outputs are not isolated from the signal input or other SSR  
driver outputs.  
22  
- OUTPUT 2A  
23  
- OUTPUT 2B  
24  
+ COMMON  
Figure 21. Option Slot 2 – Dual SSR Driver Module  
Option Slot 2 - Triac Output Module  
If option slot 2 is fitted with a Triac output module, make connections as shown. This output  
is rated at 0.01 to 1 amp @ 280V AC 50/60Hz. A snubber should be fitted across inductive  
loads to ensure reliable switch off the Triac.  
23  
  
24  
Figure 22. Option Slot 2 - Triac Module  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Electrical Installation  
Page 31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Option Slot 2 - Linear Voltage or mADC Output module  
If option slot 2 is fitted with a DC linear output module, make connections as illustrated.  
_
22  
23  
24  
+
Figure 23. Option Slot 2 - Linear Voltage & mADC module  
Option Slot 2 - Transmitter Power Supply Module  
If option slot 2 is fitted with a transmitter power supply module, make connections as  
illustrated. The output is an unregulated 24V DC, 22mA supply.  
_
22  
23  
24  
+
Figure 24. Option Slot 2 - Transmitter Power Supply Module  
Option Slot 3 Connections  
Option Slot 3 – Single Relay Output Module  
If option slot 3 is fitted with a single relay output module, make connections as illustrated.  
The relay contacts are SPDT, and rated at 2 amps resistive, 240 VAC.  
10  
11  
N/C  
COM  
12  
N/O  
Figure 25. Option Slot 3 – Single Relay Module  
Page 32  
Electrical Installation  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Option Slot 3 - Dual Relay Output Module  
If option slot 3 is fitted with a dual relay output module, make connections as illustrated. This  
module has two independent SPST relays, which share a common connection terminal. The  
contacts are rated at 2 amp resistive 240 VAC.  
10  
11  
N/O OUTPUT 3B  
COMMON  
12  
N/O OUTPUT 3A  
Figure 26. Option Slot 3 - Dual Relay Module  
Option Slot 3 – Single SSR Driver Output Module  
If option slot 3 is fitted with a single SSR driver output module, make connections as  
illustrated. The solid-state relay driver is a 0-10V DC signal, load impedance must be no less  
than 500 ohms. SSR driver outputs are not isolated from the signal input or other SSR driver  
outputs.  
_
10  
11  
12  
+
Figure 27. Option Slot 3 – Single SSR Driver Module  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Electrical Installation  
Page 33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Option Slot 3 – Dual SSR Driver Output Module  
If option slot 3 is fitted with a dual SSR driver output module, make connections as  
illustrated. The solid-state relay drivers are a 0-10V DC signal, load impedance must be no  
less than 500 ohms. SSR driver outputs are not isolated from the signal input or other SSR  
driver outputs.  
10  
- OUTPUT 3A  
11  
- OUTPUT 3B  
12  
+ COMMON  
Figure 28. Option Slot 3 – Dual SSR Driver Module  
Option Slot 3 - Triac Output Module  
If option slot 3 is fitted with a Triac output module, make connections as shown. This output  
is rated at 0.01 to 1 amp @ 280V AC 50/60Hz. A snubber should be fitted across inductive  
loads to ensure reliable switch off the Triac.  
10  
  
11  
Figure 29. Option Slot 3 - Triac Module  
Option Slot 3 - Linear Voltage or mADC Output module  
If option slot 3 is fitted with a DC linear output module, make connections as illustrated.  
_
10  
11  
12  
+
Figure 30. Option Slot 3 - Linear Voltage & mADC module  
Page 34  
Electrical Installation  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Option Slot 3 - Transmitter Power Supply Module  
If option slot 3 is fitted with a transmitter power supply module, make connections as  
illustrated. The output is an unregulated 24V DC, 22mA supply.  
_
10  
11  
12  
+
Figure 31. Option Slot 3 - Transmitter Power Supply Module  
Option Slot A Connections  
Option Slot A Connections – Basic Auxiliary Input Module  
If option slot A is fitted with a basic auxiliary input module, connect as shown. Consider using  
the full auxiliary input (Option Slot B) instead, as this has additional features and leaves  
option slot A free for other modules.  
16  
+
_
17  
Figure 32. Option Slot A – Basic Auxiliary Input Module  
Option Slot A Connections - Digital Input A Module  
If a digital input module is fitted in option slot A, this may be connected to either voltage free  
contacts (e.g. switch or relay), or a TTL compatible voltage. Connections are shown below.  
16  
+
_
17  
Figure 33. Option Slot A – Digital Input A Module  
Option Slot A Connections - Ethernet Communications Module  
If option slot A is fitted with the Ethernet communication module, a standard RJ45 connector  
is accessible from the top of case. No rear connections are required.  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Electrical Installation  
Page 35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Option Slot A Connections - RS485 Serial Communications Module  
If option slot A is fitted with the RS485 serial communication module, connections are as  
illustrated. Carefully observe the polarity of the A (Rx/Tx +ve) and B (Rx/Tx -ve) connections.  
16  
17  
18  
A
B
RS485  
COM  
Figure 34. Option Slot A – RS485 Serial Communications Module  
CAUTION:  
External computing devices connected to the communications port should comply  
with the standard, UL 60950.  
Option Slot B Connections  
Option Slot B Connections – Digital Input B (Full Auxiliary Module)  
If option slot B is fitted with the Full Auxiliary input module (see below), a secondary digital  
input is also provided. This may be connected to the voltage free contacts of a switch or  
relay, or to a TTL compatible voltage.  
9
8
+
_
Figure 35. Option Slot B – Digital Input B Connections  
Option Slot B Connections – Full Auxiliary Input B Module  
If option slot B is fitted with full auxiliary input feature, input connections are as shown.  
7
6
5
(or Pot Low)  
(or Pot Wiper)  
(or Pot High)  
+
_
Figure 36. Option Slot B – Full Auxiliary Input Connections  
Page 36  
Electrical Installation  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
5 Powering Up  
CAUTION:  
Ensure safe wiring practices have been followed. When powering up for the first  
time, disconnect the output connections.  
The instrument must be powered from a supply according to the wiring label on the side of  
the unit. The supply will be either 100 to 240V AC, or 24/48V AC/DC powered. Check  
carefully the supply voltage and connections before applying power.  
Powering Up Procedure  
At power up, a self-test procedure is automatically started, during which a splash screen is  
displayed and the LED indicators are lit. At the first power up from new, or if the option  
modules are changed, the Setup Wizard will run, indicating that configuration is required  
(refer to the Setup Wizard section of this manual). At all other times, the instrument returns to  
Operation Mode once the self-test procedure is complete.  
Front Panel Overview  
The illustration below shows the instrument front panel. A USB socket fitted to USB and Data  
Recorder versions, to the right of the keypad.  
Clean the front panel by washing with warm soapy water and dry immediately If the USB  
option is fitted, close the USB port cover before cleaning.  
Figure 37. Front panel and keys  
Display  
The instrument has a 160 x 80 pixel monochrome graphical display with dual colour  
(red/green) backlight. The main display typically shows the process variable and setpoint  
values or a graphical trend during normal operation. There are various bar graph, recorder  
status and profile status information options (refer to the Display Configuration section for  
more details). The top line of the display has labels for the 4 LED indicators. If desired, the  
backlight colour can be changed to indicate the presence of an active alarm.  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Powering Up  
Page 37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                                     
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
LED Functions  
There are four red LEDs that by default, indicate the status of the primary and secondary  
control outputs, automatic tuning and alarm status. The top line of the graphical display has  
four labels for LED indicators. The function of these LEDs and their display labels can be  
changed using the PC configuration software. The information in this manual assumes  
standard functions for these LEDs.  
Keypad  
Each instrument has four keypad switches, which are used to navigate through the user  
menus and adjust the parameter values. In configuration screens, a context sensitive  
scrolling help text is displayed that guides the user about the function of the keys.  
Table 3. Keypad button functions  
Button  
Function  
Moves backwards to the previous parameter or screen in the  
current mode.  
CAUTION: If editing a parameter, ensure that the current  
(highlighted) parameter value is correct before pressing the key as  
this action will update the instrument to the value displayed.  
In menus and configuration choice screens, this key moves to the  
next item on the list.  
Editable values can be decreased by pressing this key. Holding the  
key down speeds up the change.  
In Trend view this key moves the Cursor Line back through the  
stored data points  
In menus and configuration choice screens, this key moves to the  
previous item on the list.  
Editable values can be increased by pressing this key. Holding the  
key down speeds up the change.  
In Trend view this key moves the Cursor Line forward through the  
stored data points  
Moves forwards to the next parameter or screen in the current  
mode.  
CAUTION: If editing a parameter, ensure that the current  
(highlighted) parameter value is correct before pressing the key as  
this action will update the instrument to the value displayed.  
Pressing the key while holding down the key causes the  
instrument to move up one menu level. From Operation Mode and  
in most menus, this will result in entry to the Main Menu.  
From sub-menus, it is necessary to carry out this sequence more  
than once to reach the main menu.  
CAUTION: If editing a parameter, ensure that the current  
(highlighted) parameter value is correct before pressing the key as  
this action will update the instrument to the value displayed.  
Page 38  
Powering Up  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                 
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
6 Messages and Error Indications  
Start-up Errors  
The following displays are shown when an error detected during the power-up self-test.  
Option Module Problems  
The “Option Slot n Error” display is shown when an error detected with the installed option  
modules - where “n” is the slot number for the fault.  
Replace the module in slot “n”. If this does not solve the problem, return the instrument for  
servicing.  
Configuration Problem  
Warns if a problem has been detected with the instrument configuration. Check all settings  
are correct before proceeding. If the problem persists, return the instrument for servicing.  
Input Problems  
Sensor Break Detection  
Whenever a problem is detected with the process variable or auxiliary input connections,  
their displayed value is replaced with the word “OPEN”.  
This may be the result of a failed sensor, a broken connection or an input circuit fault.  
In this condition, the Control Outputs go to the pre-set power value (see Control  
Configuration).  
CAUTION:  
Correct the signal/wiring problem to continue normal operation.  
Un-Calibrated Input Detection  
The instrument is fully calibrated during manufacture. If a fault occurs and the calibration  
data becomes corrupted, the process input display is replaced with the word “ERROR”.  
In this condition, the Control Outputs go to the pre-set power value (see Control  
Configuration).  
CAUTION:  
Re-calibrate the input before continuing normal operation. If the problem persists,  
return the instrument for servicing.  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Messages and Error Indications  
Page 39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                             
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
PV Over-range or Under-range Indication  
If the measured process variable value is more than 5% above than the Scale Range Upper  
Limit, its value is replace by the word “HIGH”.  
If the measured process variable value is more than 5% below than the Scale Range Lower  
Limit, its value is replace by the word “LOW”.  
Auxiliary Input Over-range or Under-range Indication  
If the auxiliary input (RSP) is more than 5% above than the Auxiliary Input Upper Limit, its  
value is replace by the word “HIGH”.  
If the auxiliary input (RSP) is more than 5% below than the Auxiliary Input Lower Limit, its  
value is replace by the word “LOW”.  
If you need to return your instrument for servicing, check the Service Information screen  
(available from the main menu) or contact your supplier.  
USB Data Transfer Problems  
Data Transfer Failure message  
If the instrument cannot successfully write to the USB memory stick, the message “Data  
Transfer Failure” will be displayed. Check that there is adequate disk space on the memory  
stick, then retry.  
If the instrument cannot successfully read data from the USB memory stick, the message  
“Data Transfer Failure” will also appear. Check that this operation would not cause the  
maximum number of profiles and/or segments to be exceeded, then retry.  
Getting Help  
First Level Support  
If the errors persist or other problems are encountered, refer your supplier for first level  
support. This includes help with configuration, tuning, servicing and replacement modules.  
Second Level Support  
If your supplier is unable to assist or cannot be contacted, check the Service Information  
Page (in Configuration Mode) for details of whom to contact.  
Third Level Support  
If further assistance is required, contact the nearest company from those listed on the back  
page of this manual.  
Page 40  
Messages and Error Indications  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                             
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
7 Configuration and Use  
Operation Mode  
This is the mode used during normal operation of the instrument. It can be accessed from the  
Main Menu, and is the usual mode entered at power-up. The available displays are  
dependent upon the features and options fitted and the way in which it has been configured.  
WARNING:  
DURING NORMAL USE, THE USER MUST NOT REMOVE THE CONTROLLER FROM ITS  
HOUSING OR HAVE UNRESTRICTED ACCESS TO THE REAR TERMINALS, AS THIS WOULD  
PROVIDE POTENTIAL CONTACT WITH HAZARDOUS LIVE PARTS.  
CAUTION:  
Set all Configuration parameters as required before starting normal operations. It is  
the responsibility of the installing engineer to ensure that the configuration is safe  
for the intended application.  
Base, Trend & Profile Operating Screens  
The Base screen is the usual screen displayed during operation. It provides “at a glance”  
information about the process. The Profile Operating screen shows similar information when  
using profiles. Trend View is a graphical representation of recent process conditions. Its  
scale adjusts automatically for the best resolution for the visible data.  
Note:  
Trend data is not retained at power down or if the Sample Interval is changed.  
Example Base Operating Screen  
LED Indicators  
LED Function Labels  
Process Variable Value  
Engineering Units  
Actual Setpoint Value  
Secondary Power,  
Memory remaining or  
-ve Deviation Bar Graph  
Primary Power,  
Memory remaining or  
+ve Deviation Bar Graph  
Example Trend View Screen  
Active Alarm(s)  
Trend Upper Scale Value  
Cursor Line  
Process Variable Trend  
Setpoint Trend (dotted)  
PV Value At Cursor Line  
Trend Lower Scale Value  
Time Markers  
Sample Interval  
(10 samples per marker)  
(or Time At Cursor Line)  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Configuration & Use  
Page 41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                                                             
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Example Profile Operating Screen  
LED Indicators  
LED Function Labels  
Engineering Units  
Process Value & Setpoint  
Profile Name & Progress  
Segment No. & Progress  
Profile Status  
► Run, ▌▌ Held, ■ Stopped  
Table 4. Operation Mode Screens  
Operation Mode:  
After 2 minutes without key activity, the most screens revert to the Base Operating Screen. Screens  
marked do not revert automatically. They remain displayed until the user navigates away.  
Calibration Check Due  
Warning  
Shown if a Calibration Reminder is set and the due date has passed-  
if the feature is enabled in Control Configuration. Recorder version  
only.  
Shown at power up (and repeated once per day).  
Press to acknowledge and continue using the instrument.  
Re-calibrate or disable the reminder to cancel the warning.  
Base Operating Screen.  
Displayed is:  
LED Labels = LED indicator functions. Defaults are HEAT, COOL,  
TUNE & ALARM - can be altered with configuration software  
LED Labels; PV value;  
SP value & Bar Graph  
PV value = The current Process Variable value.  
SP value = The current Setpoint value.  
Bar Graph = Primary/Secondary Power; Deviation or Memory Use. -  
see Bar Graph Format screen in Display Configuration.  
Auto/Manual Control  
Mode Selection  
Allows switching between automatic and manual control modes.  
– only shown if enabled in Control Configuration.  
Setpoint Value Display  
& Adjustment  
View and alter local (internal) setpoint(s) to any value between the  
Setpoint Upper and Lower Limits. Remote setpoints are read only.  
Setpoint Ramp Rate  
Select Setpoint Source  
Control Enable  
Setpoint Ramp Rate adjustment between 0.1 and 9999.0 Display  
Units per hour. - only shown if enabled in Control Configuration.  
Select if Local Setpoint 1 or the Alternate Setpoint is to be the active  
setpoint. - only shown if enabled in Control Configuration.  
Enables or disables control outputs. When disabled, the unit works  
normally except the Primary and Secondary Control Outputs are  
turned off - only shown if enabled in Control Configuration.  
Alarm Status  
Event Status  
Shows the status (Active, Inactive or Unused) of the five alarms.  
Shows the status (Active or Inactive) of the five Events - Profiler  
version only.  
Profiler Operating  
Screen  
LED Labels = LED indicator functions. Defaults are HEAT, COOL,  
TUNE & ALARM - can be altered with configuration software  
Displayed is:  
PV value = The current Process Variable value.  
SP value = The current Setpoint value.  
LED Labels; PV value;  
SP value; Bar Graph &  
Status Indicator  
Bar Graph = The Profile Name & overall progress; the current  
Segment Number and segment progress  
Status Indicator = ► (Run), ▌▌ (Held), or ■ (Stopped).  
- Profiler version only.  
Page 42  
Configuration & Use  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Operator Profile Control  
Allows the operator to control the defined profiles.  
If a profile is running, the choices are: Do Nothing; Abort Profile (end  
immediately); Jump to Next Segment; Hold Profile or Release Hold.  
If no profile is running, the choices are: Do Nothing; Run Profile or  
End Profile Control (returns to standard controller operation). - only  
shown if enabled in the Profile Control Menu.  
Profile Information  
Shows the Profile Status (Running, Held, Aborted or Ended); Profile  
Time Remaining, Cumulative Held Time; Cycles Completed and  
Profile Sequences Completed - not shown when in Controller mode.  
Segment Information  
Shows the Current segment number and type (Ramp Up, Ramp  
Down, Dwell, or End); Segment Time Remaining, Loops completed if  
loop-back active- not shown when in Controller mode.  
Start & Stop Data  
Recording  
Manually Stop or Start a new recording. – only shown if Recorder  
Log Trigger is Operator Start/Stop.  
Recorder Status  
Information  
The status of the data recorder. It shows if a recording is in progress;  
the recording mode (FIFO or Record Until Memory Is Used); the  
memory usage for each recording sample; memory remaining (in  
bytes) and the approximate* recording time remaining.  
*If the status of alarms is recorded, extra samples are taken when  
these alarms change state. Therefore recording time will reduce.  
Trend View  
An auto-scaling trend graph of the Process Variable; Process  
Variable & Setpoint (doted line), or the Minimum and Maximum value  
of the Process Variable measured since the last sample. Any active  
alarm(s) are indicated above the graph. 120 data points are visible.  
The user can scroll the right hand cursor line back to examine up to  
240 data points. The sample interval is set in Display Configuration.  
Recorder Memory Full  
Warning  
Indicates that the Data Recorder memory is full and that recording  
has stopped – Only if Recording mode is Record Until Memory Full.  
- Custom Display  
Screens  
The user can copy up to 50 Configuration Menu parameters into  
Operation Mode using the PC software.  
Note: In this mode these screens are not pass-code protected.  
Note:  
The operator can freely use the screens in this mode, but it is possible to make the entire  
Operation Mode “read only” from the Display Configuration sub-menu. This includes any  
custom screens.  
Navigating in Operator Mode  
Press to move forward or to move backwards through the available screens.  
When a displayed value can be adjusted, use or to change its value.  
In Trend View, pressing or moves the Cursor Line back through the last 240  
data points.  
Adjusting the Local Setpoint(s)  
Setpoints can be adjusted within the limits set by the Setpoint Upper and Lower Limit  
parameters in Control Configuration. Operation Mode adjustment of Setpoint is not possible if  
Read Only Operation Mode has been selected in the Display Configuration settings.  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Configuration & Use  
Page 43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Press to select the Setpoint Value Display and Adjustment screen  
Press or to adjust each Local Setpoint to the required value.  
A Remote Setpoint value cannot be altered from the key pad.  
Adjusting the Setpoint Ramp Rate  
The Setpoint Ramp Rate may be adjusted in the range 0.1 to 9999.0 (in display units per  
hour) and OFF. When the Setpoint Ramp Rate is set to Off, setpoint changes will step  
immediately to the new value.  
Press to select the Setpoint Ramp Rate screen  
Press or to adjust ramp rate to the required value.  
Note:  
The SETPOINT ramp feature disables the pre-tune facility. The self-tune facility will  
calculate new tuning terms only after the SETPOINT has completed the ramp.  
Selecting Automatic or Manual Mode  
Depending on the Control Configuration settings, an Auto/Manual selection screen may be  
shown which allows operators to select between automatic or manual control. Switching to or  
from manual mode is made via Bumpless Transfer. In Manual mode the Setpoint display is  
replaced by a 0 to 100% power output level, labelled “Man”.  
Press to select the Manual Power screen  
Press or to adjust required power to the required value.  
Note:  
In Manual mode a running profile will hold until automatic control is reselected.  
CAUTION:  
The Manual Mode power level can be adjusted from 0 to 100% (-100 to +100% for  
dual control). It is not restricted by the Output Power Limit parameters.  
Control Enable or Disable  
Depending on the Control Configuration settings, a Control Enable/Disable screen may be  
shown. Disabling control turns off all control outputs (Primary and Secondary power output  
levels are set to zero).  
Press to select the Control Enable screen  
Press or to change between control enable and disable.  
CAUTION:  
Use with care. The instrument is not able to control the process when control is  
disabled. The Output Power Lower Limit parameters are also ignored.  
Page 44  
Configuration & Use  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                 
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Main Menu  
This menu is used to access the various features and configuration menus available in the  
instrument. The available menus are dependent upon the features and options fitted and the  
way in which it has been configured  
Entry into the Main Menu  
Holding down and pressing from Operation Mode and most other screens will  
cause the unit to enter the Main Menu. Each time this key press sequence is made,  
the instrument moves to the next menu level above. Sub-menu levels will require this  
sequence to be pressed more than once in order to reach the Main Menu.  
Navigating the Main Menu  
Once in the Main Menu, press or to select the required option  
Press to enter the chosen menu.  
Scrolling “Help Text” is shown at the bottom of the screens to aid navigation.  
Unlock Codes  
To prevent unauthorised entry, most modes require a pass-code (1 to 9999) to gain entry.  
These modes are indicated by the symbol against their names. The default unlock code  
for all modes is 10 and the current codes can be viewed and changed from the Lock Code  
View in Configuration Mode. For security, users should to change the codes. If the  
Configuration Mode lock code is lost, refer to the Lock code View section of this manual.  
Table 5. Main Menu Screens  
Main Menu:  
Operation Mode  
Display of the process and setpoint values, selection/adjustment of  
the Setpoints, auto/manual control, alarm/event status, trend view and  
where available, data recorder and profile information.  
Setup Wizard  
Easy, step-by-step parameter setup for simple applications.  
Supervisor Mode  
If configured from the PC software, a sub-set of up to 50 Configuration  
screens can be accessed.  
Configuration Menu  
Accesses the sub-menus for Input; Control; Outputs; Alarms;  
Communications; Recorder; Clock; Display; Lock Codes and Reset  
To Defaults menus and functions.  
Automatic Tuning  
Profile Setup Menu  
Selection of Pre-Tune, Self-Tune and Auto Pre-Tune.  
Setting of Global Control Parameters for all profiles; plus Profile  
creation, editing and deletion.  
Profile Control Menu  
USB Menu  
Selection of profiles. Running, holding or aborting the selected profile.  
Uploading/downloading instrument configuration, profile information  
and data recordings.  
Recorder Menu  
Product Information  
Service Information  
Manually starting, stopping and deleting recordings.  
Instrument information, including features and options installed.  
Contact information for service/support etc.  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Configuration & Use  
Page 45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                                 
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Setup Wizard  
An easy Setup Wizard runs automatically at first ever power-up or if whenever a Reset To  
Defaults is carried out. Users can follow the Wizard screens to setup parameters required for  
typical applications (screens marked w in the following Screen Sequence lists are also  
included in the Setup Wizard).  
A partial Wizard also runs whenever option modules have been changed. The partial wizard,  
only shows parameters affected by the changes made. The Wizard can also be run manually  
from the Main Menu. Once completed, the Setup Wizard exits to Operation Mode.  
Experts or users with more complex applications can select the parameters they wish to set-  
up from the Configuration Menus instead of using the Wizard.  
Manual entry to the Setup Wizard  
CAUTION:  
Adjustments to these parameters should only be performed by personnel  
competent and authorised to do so.  
The Setup Wizard can be selected from the Main Menu.  
Hold down and press from to enter the Main Menu.  
Press or to select Setup Wizard.  
Press to enter the Setup Wizard.  
Note:  
With the exception of the first ever power-up, entry into this mode is security-protected by the  
Setup Wizard Lock Code. Refer to the Lock Code View section for more details.  
Navigating in the Setup Wizard  
Press to move forward or to move backwards through the screens.  
Press or to change the value as required.  
Hold down and press to return to the Main Menu  
Scrolling “Help Text” is shown at the bottom of the screens to aid navigation.  
Table 6. Setup Wizard Screens  
Setup Wizard:  
Setup Wizard Unlocking  
w
w
Enter correct code number to access Setup Wizard.  
- major screens from  
Configuration Menu  
(those marked w)  
Press to select each major configuration parameter in turn. Follow  
on-screen prompts to alter the values.  
Setup Wizard  
Completed  
w
Confirms completion of the Setup Wizard. Exits to Operation Mode.  
Page 46  
Configuration & Use  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                   
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Supervisor Mode  
This mode is only available if it has been configured from the PC software. The software is  
used to copy up to 50 screens from the Configuration Menus to include in Supervisor Mode.  
The purpose of Supervisor Mode is to allow certain users access to a lock code protected  
sub-set of the main configuration parameters without providing them with the higher level  
Configuration Menu unlock code.  
Entry into Supervisor Mode  
CAUTION:  
Adjustments to these parameters should only be performed by personnel  
competent and authorised to do so.  
Supervisor Mode is entered from the Main Menu  
Hold down and press from to enter the Main Menu.  
Press or to select Supervisor Mode  
Press to enter the Supervisor Mode.  
Note:  
Entry into this mode is security-protected by the Supervisor Mode Lock Code. Refer to the  
Lock Code View section for more details.  
Navigating in Supervisor Mode  
Press to move forward or to move backwards through the screens.  
Press or to change the value as required.  
Hold down and press to return to the Main Menu  
Scrolling “Help Text” is shown at the bottom of the screens to aid navigation.  
Table 7. Supervisor Mode Screens  
Supervisor Mode:  
Supervisor Mode  
Unlocking  
If Supervisor Mode is configured, enter correct code number to  
continue.  
- Supervisor Mode  
Screens …  
Press to select each parameter in turn. Follow on-screen prompts  
to alter the values.  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Configuration & Use  
Page 47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                         
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Configuration Menu  
This menu can be used as an alternative to the more limited Setup Wizard when the  
instrument is configured for the first time, or when further changes are required to the  
instruments characteristics. Configuration contains a number of sub-menus that allow access  
to all of the available parameters. The correct settings must be made before attempting to  
use the instrument in an application. Screens marked w are also shown in the Easy Setup  
Wizard.  
Entry into the Configuration Menu  
CAUTION:  
Adjustments to these parameters should only be performed by personnel  
competent and authorised to do so.  
Configuration is entered from the Main Menu  
Hold down and press from to enter the Main Menu.  
Press or to select Configuration Menu  
Press to enter the Configuration Menu.  
Note:  
Entry into this mode is security-protected by the Configuration Menu Lock Code. Refer to  
the Unlock Code section for more details.  
Navigating the Configuration Menu  
Configuration contains sub-menus to set-up the Input; Output; Control; Alarm;  
Communications; Recorder; Display and Lock Codes. There is also an option to return the  
instrument to its factory default settings.  
The correct settings must be made before attempting to use the instrument in an application.  
From the Configuration Menu, press or to select the required sub-menu.  
Press to enter the sub-menu.  
Scrolling “Help Text” is shown at the bottom of the screens to aid navigation.  
Note:  
Only parameters that are applicable to the hardware and options fitted will be displayed.  
Table 8. Configuration Menu Screens  
Configuration Menu:  
Configuration Mode  
Unlocking  
Enter correct code number to access Configuration Mode.  
Configuration Options  
Select the required Configuration Sub-Menu Option from: Input;  
Control; Output; Alarm; Communications; Recorder; Clock; Display;  
Lock Code or Reset To Defaults.  
Page 48  
Configuration & Use  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                         
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Input Configuration Sub-Menu  
Table 9. Input Configuration Sub-Menu Screens  
Input Configuration:  
Process Variable Input  
Type  
w From various Thermocouple, RTD and Linear inputs. - see  
specifications section for full details of input types available.  
Engineering Units  
w
w
Select display units from: °C; °F; °K; bar; %; %RH; pH; psi or none.  
Decimal Point Position  
Sets the maximum display resolution to 0; 1; 2 or 3 decimal places.  
Temperature inputs are limited to 0 or 1 place. Numbers >99.999  
never display more than 2 dec places, >999.99 never display more  
than 1 dec place and >99999 always display without a decimal place.  
Multi-Point Scaling  
Enable  
Enables or disables Linear Input Multi-Point Scaling. This feature  
allows up to 15 point linearization of mA or V DC input signals.  
Scale Range Lower  
Limit  
w
w
For Temperature inputs, Upper & Lower Limits set the usable span.  
Min span = 100 units, max span = range limits - see specs. For  
Linear inputs, Upper & Lower Limits define the values shown (-1999  
to 9999) when input is at minimum and maximum values. Min span =  
100 units. If Multi-Point Scaling is enabled, up to 15 breakpoints* can  
scale input vs. displayed value between the linear input scale limits.  
*A breakpoint set at 100% input ends the sequence.  
Multi-Point Scale  
Point(s)  
Scale Range Upper  
Limit  
CJC Enable/Disable  
Process Variable Offset  
Input Filter Time  
Enables/disables internal Thermocouple Cold Junction  
Compensation. If disabled, external compensation will be required for  
thermocouples. The default value is Enabled.  
Trims the measured process value. +Ve values add to, –Ve values  
subtract from measured input. Caution: A value other than zero  
alters the apparent calibration of the instrument. Use with care!  
Removes unwanted signal noise. Adjustable from 0.0 (OFF) to 100.0  
seconds or OFF (default = 2s). Caution: Too large a value will cause  
slow response to changes in the process. Use with care!  
Auxiliary Input n Type  
w
Sets the type of signal to be connected to the auxiliary inputs (if  
fitted). From: 0-10V; 2-10V; 0-5V; 1-5V, 0-20mA or 4-20mA DC.  
Auxiliary input B also supports >2KPotentiometer and 0-100mV.  
Auxiliary Input n Scaling w  
Lower Limit  
Scales the displayed a value (-9999 to 10000) when an auxiliary  
input is at or below it’s lower limit (e.g. 4mA for a 4-20mA signal).  
Auxiliary Input n Scaling w  
Upper Limit  
Scales the displayed a value (-9999 to 10000) when an auxiliary  
input is at or above it’s lower limit (e.g. 20mA for a 4-20mA signal).  
Auxiliary Input n Offset  
Trims the displayed a value for auxiliary input A or B. +Ve values are  
added to, –Ve values subtracted from the measured auxiliary input.  
Calibration Reminder  
Enable/Disable  
Enables or disables the display of Calibration Reminder at start-up  
(repeated daily thereafter), if the due date has passed – Available on  
the Recorder version only  
Calibration Reminder  
Due Date  
Sets the due date for the Calibration Reminder - Available on the  
Recorder version only  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Configuration & Use  
Page 49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Control Configuration Sub-Menu  
Table 10. Control Configuration Sub-Menu Screens  
Control Configuration:  
Control Enable/Disable  
Sets the method used to enable/disable the control output(s). From:  
Enabled (always); Disabled (always); Enable/Disable via Digital Input  
A or B, or Operator Selectable (allows control output(s) to be turned  
off from Operation Mode). Caution: The instrument is not able to  
control the process when control is disabled. The Output Power  
Lower Limit parameters are also ignored. Use with care!  
Auto/Manual Mode  
Access  
w
Sets the method used to select Automatic or Manual Control. From:  
Automatic (always); Manual (always); Select via Digital Input A or B,  
or Operator Selectable (allows automatic or manual control to be  
selected from Operation Mode). Caution: In Manual Mode, the user  
must monitor and alter power to correctly control the process (0 to  
100% or -100 to +100% for dual control). Manual power is not  
restricted by the Output Power Limit parameters. Use with care!  
Control Type  
w
w
Set to Single Control for Primary control only (e.g. Heating or Cooling  
only) or to Dual for Primary and Secondary Control outputs (e.g.  
Heating & Cooling).  
Primary Control Action  
Set the Primary Control Output for Reverse or Direct Action. Reverse  
action applies more primary power as the process falls further below  
setpoint (e.g. heating applications). Direct action applies more  
primary power as the process rises further above setpoint (e.g.  
cooling applications).  
If Dual Control is used, the secondary output action is always  
opposite to the Primary action.  
Control Status  
Displays the current Process Variable and Setpoint values to aid  
manual tuning – This screen is Read Only.  
Power Output Level  
Displays the current Primary and Secondary control power levels  
(each 0 to 100%) to aid manual tuning – This screen is Read Only.  
Primary Proportional  
Band  
Sets the width of the Primary Proportional Band between 0.5% and  
999.9%, or select On-Off control. – This screen is Read Only during  
automatic tuning.  
Secondary Proportional  
Band  
Sets the width of the Secondary Proportional Band between 0.5%  
and 999.9%, or select On-Off control. – This screen is Read Only  
during automatic tuning.  
Integral Time Constant  
Sets the Integral Time Constant (Automatic Reset) from 1s to 99min  
59s or OFF. – This screen is Read Only during automatic tuning.  
Derivative Time  
Constant  
Derivative Time Constant (Rate) from 1s to 99 min 59s or OFF. –  
This screen is Read Only during automatic tuning.  
Manual Reset (Bias)  
Sets the Manual Reset (Proportional Band Bias) from 0-100%  
or -100 to +100% for Dual Control.  
Overlap / Deadband  
Sets the Overlap (+ve values) or Deadband (-ve values) between  
Primary & Secondary Proportional Bands when Dual Control is used.  
Primary On-Off  
Differential  
Sets the Primary On-Off control hysteresis (deadband) from 0.1 to  
10.0% of Span (centred about setpoint), when Primary On-Off control  
is used.  
Page 50  
Configuration & Use  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Secondary On-Off  
Differential  
Sets the Secondary On-Off control hysteresis (deadband) from 0.1 to  
10.0% of Span (centred about setpoint), when Primary PID with  
Secondary On-Off control is used.  
Primary & Secondary  
On-Off Differential  
Sets the combined Primary & Secondary On-Off Control hysteresis  
(deadband) from 0.1 to 10.0% of Span. when Primary On-Off control  
and Secondary On-Off control is used.  
Primary Cycle Time  
Sets the Primary Power Cycle Time (0.5s to 512s). For time  
proportioned Primary Relay, SSR Driver or Triac Control Outputs.  
Secondary Cycle Time  
Sets the Secondary Power Cycle Time (0.5s to 512s). For time  
proportioned Secondary Relay, SSR Driver or Triac Control Outputs.  
Primary Power Upper  
Limit  
Sets the Maximum Primary Output Power Limit, from 0 to 100% of  
available power. This value must be higher than the lower limit.  
Caution: The instrument will not be able to correctly control the  
process if sufficient power isn’t available to maintain setpoint. Use  
with care!  
Primary Power Lower  
Limit  
Minimum Primary Output Power limit, from 0 to 100%. This value  
must be less than the upper limit. Caution: The instrument will not  
be able to correctly control the process if the lower limit is more than  
required to maintain setpoint. Use with care!  
Secondary Power Upper  
Limit  
Maximum Secondary Output Power limit, from 0 to 100%. This value  
must be higher than the lower limit. Caution: The instrument will not  
be able to correctly control the process if sufficient power isn’t  
available to maintain setpoint. Use with care!  
Secondary Power Lower  
Limit  
Minimum Secondary Output Power limit, from 0 to 100%. This value  
must be less than the upper limit. Caution: The instrument will not  
be able to correctly control the process if the lower limit is more than  
required to maintain setpoint. Use with care!  
Sensor Break Pre-set  
Power Output  
Sets the power level applied if the process input (or active RSP) is  
lost. Adjustable from 0 to 100% or -100 to +100% for Dual Control.  
The default value is OFF (0% power). Caution: Use a value that will  
maintain safe conditions.  
Setpoint Selection  
w
w
Sets the method to select the Active Setpoint. From: Local  
Setpoint 1 only; Alternate Setpoint only; Select via Digital Input A or  
B; or Operator Selectable (allows Setpoint 1 or Alternate Setpoint to  
be selected from Operation Mode).  
Alternate Setpoint  
Source  
Up to two setpoints can be used, Local Setpoint 1 plus an Alternate  
The Alternate Setpoint can be selected from: Local Setpoint 2 or a  
Remote Setpoint set via Auxiliary Input A or B.  
Setpoint Upper Limit  
Setpoint Lower Limit  
Setpoint Ramp Editing  
The maximum allowable setpoint value. Adjustable within the Input  
Span limits, but must be greater than the Setpoint Lower Limit.  
Applies to both local and remote setpoints. Caution: Operators can  
adjust the setpoint to any value between the Setpoint Upper and  
Lower Limits. Use with care!  
The minimum allowable setpoint value. Adjustable within the Input  
Span limits, but must be less than the Setpoint Upper Limit. Applies  
to both local and remote setpoints. Caution: Operators can adjust  
the setpoint to any value between the Setpoint Upper and Lower  
Limits. Use with care!  
Enables or disables the changing of the Setpoint Ramp Rate in  
Operation Mode – Note: this does not turn off an active ramp. To  
turn of an active ramp, set the Setpoint Ramp Rate to OFF.  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Configuration & Use  
Page 51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Setpoint Ramp Rate  
Local Setpoint 1 Value  
Local Setpoint 1 Offset  
The Setpoint Ramp Rate value (1 to 9999 display units per hour or  
OFF). This ramp is applied at power-up and any setpoint changes.  
w
w
Sets the value of Local Setpoint 1 between the Setpoint Upper and  
Lower Limits.  
A value added to the Setpoint 1 value (+ve values) or subtracted  
from it (-ve values). Use when the instrument is a slave in multi-zone  
applications to achieve a zone offset. Otherwise, always set to zero.  
Local Setpoint 2 Value  
Local Setpoint 2 Offset  
Sets the value of Local Setpoint 1 between the Setpoint Upper and  
Lower Limits.  
A value added to the Setpoint 2 value (+ve values) or subtracted  
from it (-ve values). Use when the instrument is a slave in multi-zone  
applications to achieve a zone offset. Otherwise, always set to zero.  
Output Configuration Sub-Menu  
Table 11. Output Configuration Sub-Menu Screens  
Outputs Configuration:  
No Outputs Warning  
Shown if the Outputs Configuration menu is entered on an  
instrument without any output modules fitted.  
Linear Output n Type  
w
Set the desired type for any Linear Outputs fitted. From: 0-5, 0-10,  
1-5, 2-10V & 0-20, 4-20mA or 0-10VDC adjustable Transmitter PSU.  
Adjustable 0-10V  
w Sets the voltage required if Linear Output n type is 0-10VDC  
Transmitter PSU n  
adjustable Transmitter PSU.  
Output n Usage  
w
w
w
Sets the use for each output fitted. From: Primary or Secondary  
Control; Alarms; Profile Events & Alarms; Retransmit Process  
Variable or Setpoint. Choices offered are as appropriate for the  
output type fitted (e.g. only Linear Outputs can retransmit).  
Output n Alarm  
Selection  
When an Output Usage is Alarms, this selects which alarm(s) will  
cause it to change state. From Alarm 1; 2; 3; 4; 5 or a Logical OR of  
alarms 1 to 2; 1 to 3; 1 to 4 or 1 to 5. Each choice is selectable with  
Direct Action (on during alarm) or Reverse Action (off during alarm).  
Output n Events  
When an Output Usage is Events & Alarms, this selects which  
Events(s) will cause it to change state. From: Profile Running or  
Profile End; Event 1; 2; 3; 4; 5 or a Logical AND of Event n & Alarm  
n. Each choice is selectable with Direct Action (on during event) or  
Reverse Action (off during event). - Profiler version only  
Retransmit Output n  
Scale Low  
w
w
Sets the displayed value at which a retransmission output should be  
at it’s minimum level (e.g. the display value when a 4 to 20mA PV  
Retransmission output will be 4mA. Adjustable from -1999 to 9999.  
Retransmit Output n  
Scale High  
Sets the displayed value at which a retransmission output will be at  
it’s maximum level (e.g. the display value when a 4 to 20mA PV  
Retransmission output will be 20mA. Adjustable from -1999 to 9999.  
Page 52  
Configuration & Use  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Alarm Configuration Sub-Menu  
Table 12. Alarm Configuration Sub-Menu Screens  
Alarm Configuration:  
Alarm n Type  
w
w
Sets the type for each of the 5 alarms From: Unused; Process High;  
Process Low; PV-SP Deviation; Band; Control Loop; Rate Of Signal  
Change; PV Signal Break; Aux. Input A or B Break.  
Alarm n Value  
Alarm activation point. – applicable if type is High; Low; Deviation  
(+ve above, -ve below SP), Band (above or below SP) or Rate of  
Signal Change (a rate of more that x units per hour).  
Process Alarm n  
Hysteresis  
Deadband on “safe” side of alarm, through which signal must pass  
before alarm deactivates.  
Signal Change Alarm n  
Minimum Duration  
The minimum time that the rate of input change must be above the  
alarm threshold for a Rate Of Change Alarm to change state (from on  
to off, or off to on). Adjustable from 1 to 9999 secs. Caution: If the  
duration is less than this time, the alarm will not activate no matter  
how fast the rate of rise.  
Alarm n Inhibit  
Enables or disables the prevention of initial alarm activation, if the  
alarm condition is true at power up. Activation only occurs once the  
alarm condition has passed and then reoccurred.  
Loop Alarm Type  
Sets the source of the Loop Alarm Time. From: Automatic (2x the  
Integral Time Constant) or Manual (the Manual Loop Alarm Time  
value). If configured, a Loop Alarm activates if no response is seen  
after this time.  
Manual Loop Alarm  
Time  
The time allowed after PID power output reaches minimum or  
maximum), for process to begin responding.  
Communications Configuration Sub-Menu  
Table 13. Communications Configuration Sub-Menu Screens  
Communications Configuration:  
No Communications  
Warning  
If Communications Configuration menu is entered without a  
communications module fitted.  
Modbus RTU Parity  
w
w
w
From: Odd; Even or None.  
Modbus RTU Data Rate  
From: 9600; 19200; 57600 or 115200 bps.  
Slave address (1 to 255), or multi-zone Setpoint Master Mode.  
Master Mode, or Slave  
Address  
Target Register In Slave  
Master Mode Format  
Target register for Setpoint value in attached slave controllers.  
The data format required by the attached setpoint slaves. From:  
Integer; integer with 1 decimal place or float.  
Serial Communications  
Write Enable  
Enables/disables writing via RS485 or Ethernet (if fitted). When  
disabled, all parameters are read only.  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Configuration & Use  
Page 53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                   
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Recorder Configuration Sub-Menu  
Table 14. Data Recorder Configuration Sub-Menu Screens  
Recorder Configuration:  
No Recorder Warning  
If the Recorder Configuration menu is entered on an instrument  
without this option fitted.  
Recording In Progress  
Warning  
If recording in progress when Recorder Configuration entered. –  
Allows access to the Recording Start/Stop screen only, until the  
recording is stopped.  
Recorder Mode  
w
Choose Record Until Memory Used (Stop recording when full) or  
Continuous FIFO (First In - First Out) - Caution: A FIFO recording  
will overwrite all previous recordings in memory, starting with the  
oldest data first. Download the previous data to USB memory stick  
before selecting this option.  
Recording Sample  
Interval  
w
w
A recording of the selected data will be taken once every Sample  
Interval. From: Every 1; 2; 5; 10; 15; 30 Seconds, or Every 1; 2; 5;  
10; 15; 30 Minutes. Note: Short intervals will reduce the maximum  
possible duration of the recording.  
Recorder Trigger  
Trigger On Alarms  
The recording Start/Stop trigger method to be used. From: Operation  
Mode selection; Recorder Menu selection; On Alarm(s); Digital Input  
A or B state; or During Profiles.  
Any from: Alarm n – Where n is alarms 1 to 5. Any combination of  
these can be set to trigger (TRG) or not (OFF). Any active alarm set  
to TRG will start the instrument recording. Note: Recording will only  
stop if all alarms selected as triggers become inactive.  
Values To Record  
Any from: Process Variable value; Maximum or Minimum PV (since  
the previous sample was taken); Setpoint; Primary Power or  
Secondary Power. Any combination of these can be set to Record  
(REC) or not (OFF). Note: Recording more parameters will reduce  
the maximum possible duration of the recording.  
Alarms & System  
Events To Record  
Any from: Alarm n Status or Unit turned On/Off. Caution: An alarm  
state change between samples is also recorded. This uses additional  
recorder memory, which may cause the recording to end sooner than  
expected.  
Profiler Events To  
Record  
Any from: Profiler Event n Status. Caution: A profile event state  
change between samples is also recorded. This uses additional  
recorder memory, which may cause the recording to end sooner than  
expected.  
Recorder Status  
Information  
Shows if a recording is in progress; the recording mode; memory  
usage per sample; memory remaining and the recording time  
remaining. The time remaining is adjusted for any alarm/events that  
have already occurred, but cannot allow for any future alarms/events  
Page 54  
Configuration & Use  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Clock Configuration Sub-Menu  
Table 15. Internal Clock Configuration Sub-Menu Screens  
Clock Configuration:  
Date Format  
w Sets the format used for all displayed dates: dd/mm/yyyy (Day /  
Month / Year) or mm/dd/yyyy (Month / Day / Year). – Recorder  
versions only.  
Set Date  
w
Sets the internal clock Date. – Entered in the format defined by Date  
Format screen. – Recorder versions only.  
Set Day Of Week  
Set Time  
Sets the day of week used by the internal clock. – Recorder versions  
only.  
Sets the internal clock Time. - In hh:mm:ss (Hours : Minutes :  
Seconds) format. – Recorder versions only.  
Display Configuration Sub-Menu  
Table 16. Display Configuration Sub-Menu Screens  
Display Configuration:  
Enable Custom Display  
Mode  
Enables/disables Custom Operation Mode, if configured (this mode  
can only be enabled using the PC configuration software).  
Read Only Operation  
Mode?  
Allows Operation Mode to be Read-Only or Read/Write. Screens can  
be seen but values cannot be changed if set to Read-Only.  
Operation Mode Bar  
Graph Format  
From: PID Power; Control Deviation or % Recorder Memory Usage.  
Trend Sample Interval  
Interval between display of next value on the trend graph From: Every  
1; 2; 5; 10; 15; 30 Seconds, or Every 1; 2; 5; 10; 15; 30 Minutes.  
Select Trend Mode  
From: PV only, PV (solid) & SP (dotted) at sample time or Max/Min  
PV between samples (candle-stick graph). Alarm activity is shown  
above the trend graph.  
Display Colour  
From: Red only; Green only; Red to Green on Alarm or Green to Red  
on Alarm.  
Invert Display  
Standard or Negative display image.  
Display Contrast  
Screen contrast (0 and 100) to improve clarity. 100 = maximum  
contrast.  
Language  
Select English or the alternate local language. The alternate language  
is selected at time of order. The choice of alternate language can be  
changed using the PC software.  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Configuration & Use  
Page 55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                     
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Lock Code View  
Unlock Codes  
To prevent unauthorised entry, some menus are protected by a lock code. These screens  
are indicated by the symbol before their names in the screen list tables. To enter these  
screens, the correct code must first be entered. The current lock codes can be viewed and  
changed from the Lock Code View Configuration sub-menu.  
The default unlock code for all protected menus is 10. For security, users are recommended  
to change these codes. A value between 1 and 9999 can be used, or the lock can be set to  
OFF if no protection is required.  
Navigating Lock Code View  
Press to move forward or to move backwards through the screen elements.  
Press or to change the value as required.  
Hold down and press to return to the Main Menu  
Scrolling “Help Text” is shown at the bottom of the screens to aid navigation.  
Table 17. Lock Code View Sub-Menu Screens  
Lock Code View:  
Lock Code View 1  
Setup Wizard; Configuration Mode and Tuning Menu Lock Codes  
(1-9999 or OFF).  
Lock Code View 2  
Supervisor Mode; USB; Recorder and Profiler Menu Lock Codes  
(1-9999 or OFF) - if fitted/configured.  
Lost Lock Codes  
The lock codes can be viewed or changed from Configuration Mode. In the event that the  
Configuration Mode lock code itself is forgotten, the instrument can be forced into Lock Code  
View from power-up, where the codes can be checked or set to new values.  
Forcing Lock Code View  
Power down the instrument.  
Re apply the power and hold down and for more than 5 seconds as the start-up  
splash screen appears. Lock Code View will appear.  
Press to move forward or to move backwards through the screen elements.  
Make note of the codes or press or to change their values if required.  
Hold down and press to return to the Main Menu  
Scrolling “Help Text” is shown at the bottom of the screens to aid navigation.  
Page 56  
Configuration & Use  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                         
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Resetting To Defaults  
Table 18. Reset To Defaults Sub-Menu Screen  
Reset To Defaults:  
Reset To Defaults  
Sets all parameters to their factory default values.  
If the instrument is to be used in a new or changed application, it is possible to reset all of the  
instruments parameters back to their factory default settings. The Easy Setup Wizard runs  
automatically whenever a Reset To Defaults is performed.  
CAUTION:  
User must reconfigure all required settings before using the instrument in a live  
application.  
Automatic Tuning Menu  
The Automatic Tune Menu is used engage the Pre-tune and/or Self-tune facilities to assist  
the user in setting up Proportional band(s), Integral and Derivative parameter values.  
Pre-tune can be used to set PID parameters approximately. Self-tune may then be used to  
optimise the tuning if required.  
Pre-tune can be set to run automatically after every power-up by enabling Auto Pre-Tune.  
The TUNE indicator (LED 3)* will flash while pre-tune is operating, and is continuously on  
whilst Self-tune is operating. If both Pre-tune and Self-tune are engaged the AT indicator will  
flash until Pre-tune is finished, and is then continuously on.  
Note:  
Self-Tune will not engage if either primary or secondary control outputs are set for On-Off  
control.  
Pre-Tune will not engage if either primary or secondary control outputs are set for On-Off  
control, during setpoint ramping, if a profile is running or if the process variable is less than  
5% of the input span from the setpoint.  
Navigating Automatic Tuning Menu  
Press to move forward or to move backwards through the selections.  
Press or to engage or disengage the tuning as required.  
Hold down and press to return to the Main Menu  
Scrolling “Help Text” is shown at the bottom of the screens to aid navigation.  
*Provided the function of LED3 has not been changed (LED functions can be altered using  
the PC Configuration Software).  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Configuration & Use  
Page 57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                 
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Table 19. Automatic Tuning Menus Screens  
Automatic Tuning Menu:  
Automatic Tuning Mode  
Unlocking  
Enter correct code number to access the Automatic Tuning Menu.  
Pre-Tune  
w
Turns Pre-Tune on/off. Pre-Tune is disabled in On-Off Control Mode;  
if the PV is less than 5% of span from SP; during Profiles or if the  
Setpoint is Ramping.  
Pre-Tune Status  
Self-Tune  
Shows the current Pre-Tune status. Active or Inactive.  
Turns Self-Tune on/off. Self-Tune is disabled in On-Off Control  
Mode.  
Self-Tune Status  
Shows current Self-Tune status. Active or Inactive.  
Auto Pre-Tune Enable  
Enables/Disables Automatic Pre-Tune. When enabled, this attempts  
to perform a Pre-Tune at every power-up. Normal Pre-Tune  
engagement rules are applied (see Pre-Tune above).  
Profiler Setup Menu  
Refer to the Profiler Option section of this manual for more details about the profiler features.  
Screens marked will not time-out automatically. They must be completed for a valid profile  
to be created.  
Table 20. Profiler Setup Menu Screens  
Profiler Menu:  
General Profile Configuration: Settings that apply to all profiles  
Profile Run/Hold  
Signal  
Selects the method used to Run or Hold a profile. From: Digital Input  
A; Digital Input B or Key Pad Only (using the either the Profile  
Control Menu or an Operation Mode screen).  
Profile Abort  
Signal  
Selects the method used to force a profile to end prematurely. From:  
Digital Input A; Digital Input B or Key Pad Only (using either the  
Profile Control Menu or an Operation Mode screen).  
Control In  
Operation Mode  
Enables/disables the ability to control profiles (run, hold or abort)  
from Operation Mode.  
Enable Edit While  
Running  
Enables/disables the ability to edit profiles whist a profile is running  
(even if selected, the current or next segment of the running profile  
will not change until after the profile is restarted).  
Create A Profile  
Creates a new profile. A header is created first, followed by the  
segments – see below. A warning is displayed if the maximum  
number of 64 profiles or 255 segments is exceeded.  
Page 58  
Configuration & Use  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                             
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Profile Header: Settings that apply to the chosen profile as a whole  
Enter Profile Name  
Up to 16 characters can be used to name each profile  
Profile Starting  
Point  
The setpoint value to be used at the beginning of the first segment.  
From: Actual Setpoint or Process Variable value at the time the  
profile starts.  
Profile Start  
Trigger  
From: None (profile start is not delayed); After Delay or Day and  
Time (Recorder version only).  
Profile Start Time  
The time (hh:mm:ss) when the profile should run. – This applies only  
if Day and Time is the Profile Start Trigger. Caution: Take care not  
to clash with other profiles. A Profile cannot start if another is  
running.  
Profile Start Day(s)  
Profile Start Delay  
The Day(s) when the profile should run. From: Mon; Tue; Wed; Thu;  
Fri; Sat; Sun; Mon-Fri; Mon-Sat; Sat-Sun or All. – This applies only if  
Day and Time is the Profile Start Trigger.  
The delay time, up to 99:59 (hh:mm), for a profile to begin after the  
start request has been given.  
Profile Recovery  
Method  
The power-on action if profile was running at power-down (e.g. after  
a power cut), or following correction of a signal break. From: Control  
outputs off; Restart profile from the beginning; Maintain last profile  
setpoint; Use controller setpoint; Continue profile from where it was  
when power failed.  
Profile Recovery  
Time  
The Recovery Method is ignored (the profile continues from where  
power failed), if power off for less than this time. Max 99:59  
(hh:mm). - Recorder version only.  
Profile Abort  
Action  
Action after profile has been forced to stop before its end. From:  
Control outputs off; Maintain last profile setpoint or Use controller  
setpoint.  
Profile Cycles  
The number of times the program should run each time it is started  
(1-9999 or Infinite).  
Profile Segments: Settings that apply to individual profile segments  
Segment Number  
Segment Type  
Shows the number of the profile segment being created from 1-255  
Set the segment type from: Ramp Time (time to reach target SP);  
Ramp Rate (rate of change towards target SP); Step (jump to target  
SP), Dwell (keep current SP); Hold (hold the profile until released);  
Loop (back to a previous segment); Join (join to another profile);  
End (end the profile) or Repeat Sequence Then End (repeat a  
sequence of joined profiles – of which this is the last). A Join, End or  
Repeat Sequence Then End will become the last segment in the  
profile.  
Segment Target  
Setpoint  
The setpoint value to be reached by the end of this segment, if the  
segment type is Ramp Time, Ramp Rate or Step.  
Segment Ramp  
Time  
The time (hh:mm:ss) to reach the Segment Target Setpoint if the  
segment type is Ramp Time.  
Segment Ramp  
Rate  
The rate of change towards the Segment Target Setpoint if the  
segment type is Ramp Rate. The rate can be set from 0.001 to  
9999.9 display units per hour.  
Segment Dwell  
Time  
The time (hh:mm:ss) to maintain the current setpoint if the segment  
type is Dwell.  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Configuration & Use  
Page 59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Segment Loop  
Enter the segment to loop back to, and the number of times to loop  
back, before continuing forward to the next segment, if the segment  
type is Loop. Note: Two Loops cannot be set to cross each other.  
Segment Auto-  
Hold Type  
From: None (no auto-hold); Above Setpoint (hold if too high only);  
Below Setpoint (hold if too low only) or Band (hold if too high or low).  
  
Segment Auto-  
Hold Band Value  
The distance from setpoint beyond which the profile is held for the  
selected Auto-Hold Type. The profile continues once the process  
returns within this band.  
  
Segment Hold  
Release Type  
Sets the method used to release the profile from hold if the segment  
type is Hold. From: Digital Input A; Digital Input B; Front Keys or  
Time Of Day. (Time of day on Recorder version only )  
  
Hold Release Time  
The time of day (hh:mm:ss) when a Hold Segment will release if the  
Release Type is Time Of Day. Release occurs at the next  
occurrence of this time.  
  
Times To Repeat  
Sequence  
The number of times the entire sequence of profiles should run. – if  
the last segment is Repeat Sequence Then End.  
Segment End Type  
The action taken after the profile ends normally. From: Control  
outputs off; Maintain last profile setpoint; Use controller setpoint.  
Select Profile To  
Join  
Choose a profile to join to from the list provided – if the last  
segment type is Join. The selected profile will start immediately the  
current profile ends.  
Segment Events  
Edit A Profile Header  
Edit A Profile Segment  
Select the event(s) to be active during this segment. For end  
segments, events selected to be active stay on until the unit exits  
from profiler mode or a new profile runs.  
Choose the profile to be edited from the list of names provided, then  
alter any values as required – The profile header details are as  
shown in “Create A Profile” above.  
Choose the profile, then the segment to be edited from the lists  
provided. Alter any values as required – The profile segment details  
are as shown in “Create A Profile” above. Note: The last segment  
type can only be set to Join, End or Repeat Sequence Then End.  
Choose the profile, then the new segment’s position from the lists  
provided – Enter the new segments values as required – The profile  
segment details are as shown in “Create A Profile” above. Note: The  
new segments type cannot be set to Join, End or Repeat Sequence  
Then End.  
Insert A Segment  
Delete A Segment  
Delete A Profile  
Choose the profile, then the segment to be deleted from the lists  
provided. End, Join or Repeat segments cannot be deleted.  
Choose the profile to be deleted from the list of names is provided.  
The user is then prompted confirm that it should be deleted.  
Delete All Profiles  
Deletes all profiles from memory. The user is prompted to confirm  
that all profiles should be deleted. Caution: Use with care!  
Page 60  
Configuration & Use  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Profiler Control Menu  
Table 21. Profiler Control Menu Screens  
Profiler Menu:  
Profile Control  
If a profile is running, choose from: Do Nothing, Abort Profile (end  
immediately); or Jump to Next Profile Segment, Hold Profile or  
Release Hold.  
If no profile is running, choose from: Do Nothing, Run Profile or End  
Profile Control (Return to normal controller operation).  
Select Active Profile  
Change the active profile. Choose from the list of profile names  
provided. The active profile is the profile that will run, when a run  
instruction is given (perhaps via a digital input).  
Select A Profile To Run  
Choose the profile to run from the list of names provided. The profile  
name and run status is then confirmed.  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Configuration & Use  
Page 61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
USB Menu  
A Notification is shown if a USB Memory Stick is inserted or removed from the USB Port. The  
USB Menu will automatically be offered after insertion. The USB menu can also be accessed  
from the Main Menu. Refer to the USB Interface section for more details on the use of the  
USB port option.  
Table 22. USB Menu Screens  
USB Menu:  
USB Mode Unlocking  
Enter correct code number to access USB Menu.  
Read/Write To USB  
Device?  
Select the required action from: Read Instrument Configuration  
(from USB stick); Write Instrument Configuration (to USB stick);  
Read Profiles (from USB stick); Write Profiles (to USB stick) or Write  
Recorder Log File (to USB stick).  
Select Profile To  
Write  
If writing a profile to the USB Memory Stick, choose a profile to write  
from the list provided.  
Enter A File or  
Folder Name  
Enter an 8-character folder name for recorder logs, or a file name  
for configurations or profiles. An extension (bct for configurations,  
.pfl for profiles) is added to files automatically. Caution: Existing  
files/folders with the same name will be over-written.  
Writing  
Profile/Configuration  
File  
An animated screen is shown while the file(s) are being written.  
Caution: Do not disconnect USB device until completed! Data loss  
or corruption may result.  
Transfer Successful  
Confirmation that the data transfer to the USB stick completed  
correctly. Press to continue  
Transfer Failure  
Select File  
For write failures, check for adequate disk space on the USB stick.  
Select the Configuration or Profile file to transfer from the USB stick.  
Caution: A configuration read overwrites all existing instrument  
settings.  
Reading  
Profile/Configuration  
File  
An animated screen is shown while the file is being read.  
Caution: Do not remove the memory stick whist this operation is in  
progress. Data corruption may result.  
Transfer Successful  
Transfer Failure  
Confirmation that the data transfer from the USB stick completed  
correctly. Press to continue  
For read failures, check the maximum number of profiles and/or  
segments is not being exceeded.  
CAUTION:  
Do not remove the memory stick from the USB port whilst a Data Transfer to or from  
the USB stick is in progress. Data loss or corruption may result.  
CAUTION:  
During Data Transfer, normal operation carries on in the background, but operator  
access to other screens is not possible. The transfer of a full memory can take up to  
7 minutes. Only begin a transfer when you are certain that access (e.g. setpoint  
changes) will not be required.  
Page 62  
Configuration & Use  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Recorder Menu  
This menu controls the starting and stopping of the Data Recorder and the deletion of  
previous recordings. Refer to the Recorder Configuration sub-menu in Configuration Mode  
for information about how to setup the data to be recorded and the recording interval.  
See to the Data Recorder Option section for more details on the use of the recorder and it’s  
features.  
Table 23. Recorder Menu Screens  
Recorder Menu:  
Recorder Mode  
Unlocking  
Enter correct code number to access Data Recorder Menu.  
Recording In Progress  
Warning  
Shown if a recording is in progress when the Recorder Menu is  
entered. - Allows access to the Recording Start/Stop screen only, until  
the recording is stopped.  
Start/Stop Data  
Recording  
Manually Stop, or Start a new recording. – if Log Trigger is Recorder  
Menu Start/Stop.  
Abort Recording  
Forces a recording to Stop, overriding the selected record trigger. – if  
Log Trigger is During Alarms; Digital Input A or B; or During Profile.  
Recorder Status  
Information  
Shows if a recording is in progress; the recording mode; memory  
usage per sample; memory remaining and the recording time  
remaining. The time remaining is adjusted for any alarm or events that  
have already occurred, but cannot allow for future alarms or events.  
Delete Recording  
Clears the recorder memory. Caution: Permanently removes All  
recorded data.  
Product Information Mode  
This is a read only mode describing the instrument and the options fitted to it.  
Navigating Product Information Mode  
Press to move forward or to move backwards through the displayed  
information.  
Hold down and press to return to the Main Menu  
Scrolling “Help Text” is shown at the bottom of the screens to aid navigation.  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Configuration & Use  
Page 63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                         
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Table 24. Product Information Screens  
Product Information Mode:  
Input Calibration Status  
Calibration status of the mVDC, VDC, mADC, RTD and  
Thermocouple CJC inputs. Caution: Re-calibrate the unit if any inputs  
are not shown as “Calibrated”.  
Calibration Check Due  
Date  
The date re-calibration is due. – Only shown if the Calibration  
Reminder is enabled in the Input Configuration menu.  
Option Slot n  
Information  
The type of Option Modules (if any) fitted in Option Slot s 1 to 4 and A  
to C.  
Controller Feature  
Information  
Shows the features fitted/enabled in the instrument:  
Controller Only; USB Port; Data Recorder (includes USB Port) or  
Profiler.  
Firmware Information  
Serial Number  
The type and version of firmware installed in the instrument.  
The instruments serial number.  
Date of Manufacture  
The instrument’s Date of Manufacture  
Service Information Mode  
This is a read only mode. It provides contact information to the user about where they can  
obtain service, sales or technical support for the product. Normally this shows either the  
manufacturer or supplier details. Using the PC software, the user can enter their own details.  
There are 7 lines of text - each up to 26 characters in length.  
Navigating Product Information Mode  
There are no other screens in this mode.  
Hold down and press to return to the Main Menu  
Table 25. Service Contact Information Screen  
Service Information Mode:  
For Service Contact  
Contact information for Service, Sales or Technical Support.  
Page 64  
Configuration & Use  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
8 The USB Interface  
The features covered in this section of the manual are available on models fitted with the  
optional USB Interface or the Data Recorder (which includes the USB Interface).  
Using the USB Port  
The USB Interface option allows the user to upload or download instrument settings to or  
from a USB memory stick. This allows easy configuration of multiple instruments by copying  
from one to another, or to transfer it to or from the PC configuration software. If the Data  
Recorder or Profiler options are fitted, recordings and profile information can also be  
transferred via USB memory stick. Refer to the USB Menu section for more details.  
USB Memory Stick Folders & Files  
When a USB stick is inserted, the instrument looks for, and if necessary creates the DEVICE,  
CONFIG, PROFILE and RECORDER folders. Files must be located in these folders in order  
to be used. When preparing to upload files from your PC, ensure that you save them to the  
correct folder on the memory stick.  
DEVICE – This folder must be located in the  
Root of the USB memory stick  
CONFIG – Configuration files (*.bct)  
PROFILE – Profile program files (*.pfl)  
RECORDER – Recorder log folders/files The  
user is asked for a new recorder sub-folder  
name before transferring recorder data to USB.  
The instrument stores the log files (*.csv) in this  
folder.  
CAUTION:  
If the file or folder named already exists, data will be overwritten  
The first recorder log file written is named 000001-1.csv and placed in the new Recorder  
sub-folder. Stopping/starting a recording does not create a new file, but each time the  
parameters being recorded are changed a new file is created (e.g. 000002-1.csv then  
000003-1.csv etc). If any of these files would exceed the maximum spreadsheet size of  
65500 data lines, a new file is created with the last digit incremented by 1 (e.g. 000001-2.csv  
then 000001-3.csv).  
Note:  
To speed up the disk operation, keep the number of files in these folders to a minimum.  
CAUTION:  
Do not remove the memory stick from the USB port whilst a data transfer operation  
is in progress. Data loss or corruption may result.  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Recorder Option  
Page 65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                                       
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
9 The Data Recorder Option  
The features covered in this section are available on models fitted with the Data Recorder  
option. This option includes a USB Interface (refer to section 8) and a Real Time Clock (RTC)  
with battery backup..  
Introduction  
The Data Recorder option allows the user to make a recording of the process over time.  
Recordings can be transferred to a memory stick using the USB Port.  
Recordings are stored in Comma Separated format (.csv), suitable for use with  
spreadsheets, or for import in to other software. See the USB Memory Stick Folders & Files  
details (in section 8) for file information.  
A Recorder Configuration sub-menu is added to the Configuration Menu and Recorder  
Control can be optionally added to the Main Menu or Operation Mode. The RTC also  
expands the profiling capabilities (refer to section 10) and allows a “calibration due” reminder  
to be shown at a date specified by the user.  
Changes To Operation Mode  
The Data Recorder adds the option for a Calibration Reminder and a % memory use bar  
graph to the Operation Mode screen sequence.  
Calibration Reminder  
A "calibration due reminder" can be shown if the date is equal to or after the Calibration  
Reminder Date. The reminder screen persists until the key is pressed. If due, the reminder  
is shown at Power-up, and repeated every 24hrs until the reminder date is changed.  
The Calibration Reminder enable/disable and Reminder Date parameters can be set from  
the Input Configuration Menu.  
Memory Use Bar Graph  
The bar-graph shown in the main Operation Mode screen can be set to show 0 to 100% of  
recorder memory used instead of the standard options of PID power or control deviation. The  
Bar Graph Format is defined in the Display Configuration Menu.  
Page 66  
Data Recorder  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                             
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
10 The Profiler  
The features covered in this section relate to the Profiler (Setpoint Programmer) option. If the  
instrument also has the Data Recorder option fitted, it’s Real Time Clock is used to expand  
the profiling capabilities by adding Day & Time profile start options, releasing of hold  
segments at a specific time of day and changing the power fail recovery option to one based  
on the length of time the power has been off. These features are explained below and in the  
Profiler Setup and Profile Control menus (refer to section 7)  
Introduction  
The Profiler allows the user to store up to 255 profile segments, shared between a maximum  
of 64 Profiles. Each profile controls the value of the setpoint over time; increasing,  
decreasing or holding its value as required. If fitted, Profiler options are shown to the Main  
Menu as well as the Operation Mode.  
Profile Components  
The General Profile Configuration settings decide how profiles can be Run, Held or Aborted.  
These settings apply to all profiles.  
Each profile has its own header information, plus 1 or more segments.  
Profile Header & Segment Information  
The profile header contains information about how the profile starts and stops, the power  
loss recovery action and how many times it should be repeated.  
Note:  
Profile Header information is stored to memory as the Segment creation sequence begins.  
No profile is created if you exit before this point.  
Segments can be ramps, dwells, steps or special segments such as holds, ends or joins.  
Note: Segment information is stored as each segment is created, but the profile remains  
invalid until an end or join segment is defined.  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Profiler Option  
Page 67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                         
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Profile Starting & Standard Segments  
The example profiles below contain examples of the standard segment types required to  
make simple profiles or profile sequences. A Start Trigger is the instruction to begin the  
selected profile. Depending on the Run/Hold Signal parameter setting in the Profile Setup  
Menu, this can be from a Key-press given in the appropriate screen, a digital input signal or  
via a serial communications command.  
Following a Start Trigger, profiles can start immediately, after a delay, or from the Timer  
(Timer start available on Recorder version only).  
CAUTION:  
A timer start time should not clash with other profiles. A profile will not start if  
another is running. Remember that delays caused by manual holds or Auto-Hold  
can effect when the previous running profile will finish.  
PROFILE 1  
PROFILE 9  
Seg. 1 Target SP  
Step  
End  
Ramp (Time/Rate)  
Starting Setpoint  
Start  
Trigger  
Timer or Delay  
Dwell  
Join (Profile 1 to Profile 9)  
Figure 38. Profile Starting and Standard Segment Types  
Ramps, Dwells and Step Segments each have an end of segment Target Setpoint.  
If a segment is a Ramp-Time type, the slope needed to reach the target in the defined time  
will change depending on the Starting Setpoint value. For a Ramp-Rate segment, the slope  
is defined by the segments Ramp Rate, so the time to reach the target setpoint will change  
instead. This is of particular significance for the first segment, since the starting value of the  
process may not be known.  
A Dwell (sometimes called a soak) holds the last segment’s value for the specified Dwell  
Time.  
Step segments jump straight to the new target setpoint value.  
An End segment ends the profile sequence.  
If the last segment is a Join, the join target profile will start.  
Note:  
The Profile sequence will abort if the join target has been deleted.  
Page 68  
Profiler Option  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Loops Segments  
A Loop Segment goes back to a specified segment in the current profile. This action is  
repeated for the required number of times (1 to 9999) before the profile continues onwards.  
More than one Loop Segment can be used in a profile, but they must not cross.  
Loop back target segment  
Example:  
Runs segments 1 to 5, then  
repeats segments 3 to 5 for 500  
times, before continuing on to  
segments 7 to 9,  
End  
x 500  
Loop Segment  
Figure 39. Loops Segments  
Profile Running / Holding vs. Hold Segments  
Continue  
Triggers  
Hold Start  
End  
Run  
Hold Stop  
Hold Segments  
Figure 40. Run/Hold & Hold Segments  
A Hold during a segment maintains the current setpoint value. Once the hold condition is  
stopped the Ramp or Dwell continues. Depending on the configuration, a hold can be the  
started & stopped by via a key-press, breaking the signal to a Run/Hold digital input, a serial  
comms command or by the Auto-Hold feature (see below).  
Note:  
A running profile will also hold while Manual Control is selected.  
A Hold Segment is a pre-planned hold, programmed into the profile. It maintains the value of  
the previous segment. The profile does not continue until a Continue Trigger occurs. This  
can be via a key-press, a digital input signal or after waiting for a time of day (available on  
Recorder version only).  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Profiler Option  
Page 69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                         
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
The Auto-Hold Feature  
Each profile segment has individual Auto-Hold settings. If utilised, these ensure that the  
profile and the actual process remain synchronised. If the process does not closely match  
the required setpoint by remaining within the defined Hold Band, the profile can be held until  
it returns within bounds.  
The user can choose to hold the profile if the process goes beyond the Hold Band Above  
The Setpoint only, Below The Setpoint only or to Band (either side of the setpoint). When  
Auto-Hold becomes active, the profile status is shown as “Held”.  
Held if Auto-Hold set to Above Setpoint or Band  
Hold Band  
Dwell Segment  
Process Variable  
Setpoint  
Held if Auto-Hold set to Below Setpoint or Band  
Figure 41. Auto-Hold On A Dwell Segment  
During a Dwell, the dwell time is increase by the time that the process is outside of the hold  
band in the selected direction(s). This ensures the process was at the desired level for the  
required amount of time.  
Held if Auto-Hold set to Above Setpoint or Band  
Process Variable  
Hold Band  
Ramp Setpoint  
(without Auto-  
Hold)  
Ramp Setpoint  
(with Auto-Hold)  
Held if Auto-Hold set to Below Setpoint or Band  
Figure 42. Auto-Hold On A Ramp Segment  
During a Ramp segment, the ramp is held at the current setpoint value while the process is  
outside of the hold band in the selected direction(s). The time taken to complete the ramp is  
increased by the time taken by the Auto-Hold.  
Page 70  
Profiler Option  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Profile Cycles & Repeat Sequences  
A profile can be configured to run itself 1 to 9999 times or continuously using the Profile  
Cycles setting. A profile ending with Repeat Then End will run the entire sequence of  
profiles again from 1 to 9999 times before ending.  
PROFILE 4  
PROFILE 31  
PROFILE 7  
Profile 4  
Cycles = 1  
Profile 7  
Profile 31  
Cycles = 3  
Cycles = 1  
Example:  
Runs profile 4 once,  
profile 31 three times  
& profile 7 once.  
This sequence is  
repeated ten times.  
Repeat Then End  
(times to repeat = 10)  
Join (Profile 31 to Profile 7)  
Repeat Sequence = 10  
Join (Profile 4 to Profile 31)  
Figure 43. Profile Cycles & Repeats  
Power/Signal Lost Recovery Actions  
If there is a power cut while a profile is running, the instrument will use the defined Profile  
Recovery Method once the power has been restored.  
If there is a break in the input while a program is running, the unit will go to the Pre-Set  
Power Value during the break condition. Once the condition has ended it carries out the  
same recovery action as specified for power failure.  
Note:  
Recorder versions always use option E (Continue profile from the point it had reached  
when the power failed) if the Power Off Time is less than the Profile Recovery Time  
setting. If the power is off for more than this time, the defined Profile Recovery Method is  
used.  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Profiler Option  
Page 71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                         
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Power On  
Power Off  
Run  
(Start-on SP)  
Power Off Time  
Planned Profile  
Controller SP  
= Control Off  
Possible Recovery Methods:  
A
B
C
D
E
Abort the profile and maintain the profile value from the time the power failed.  
Abort the profile and use Controller Setpoint value.  
Abort the profile with the Control outputs off.  
Restart the profile again from the beginning.  
Continue profile from the point it had reached when the power failed  
Figure 44. End, Abort and Recovery Actions  
Profile End Actions  
Once a running profile ends, that profiles’ Segment End Type defines action taken by the  
instrument. If a sequence of profiles has been completed, the End Segment Type of the last  
profile will be carried out. The possible end actions are explained below.  
Run  
(Start-on SP)  
Last Profile SP  
Normal Profile End  
Controller SP  
= Control Off  
Controller SP  
Possible Profile End Actions:  
A
B
C
At profile end, maintain the Final Setpoint value of the last segment.  
At profile end, exit Profiler Mode and use the Controller Setpoint value.  
At profile end, remain in Profiler Mode with the Control outputs off.  
Figure 45. Profile End Action  
Page 72  
Profiler Option  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Profile Abort Actions  
If a running profile is forced to end early, the Profile Abort Action defines action taken by  
the instrument. This is set in the General Profile Configuration section of the Profile Setup  
Menu, and is common to all profiles.  
The possible options are explained below.  
Last Profile SP  
Run  
(Start-on SP)  
Profile Aborted  
Controller SP  
Controller SP  
= Control Off  
Possible Profile Abort Actions:  
A
B
C
Abort the profile and maintain the value of the setpoint at the time of the abort.  
Abort the profile and exit Profiler Mode using the Controller Setpoint value.  
Abort the profile and remain in Profiler Mode with the Control outputs off.  
Figure 46. Profile Abort Action  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Profiler Option  
Page 73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
11 Manually Tuning Controllers  
Single Control Tuning (PID with Primary Output only)  
This technique balances the need to reach setpoint quickly, with the wish to limit setpoint  
overshoot at start-up or during process changes. It determines values for the Primary  
Proportional Band and the Integral and Derivative time constants that allow the PID control  
algorithm to give acceptable results in most applications that use a single control device.  
CAUTION:  
This technique is suitable only for processes that are not harmed by large  
fluctuations in the process variable.  
1. Check that the Setpoint Upper Limit and Setpoint Lower Limit are set to safe levels for  
your process. Adjust if required.  
2. Set the Setpoint to the normal operating value for the process (or to a lower value if  
overshoots beyond this value might cause damage).  
3. Select On-Off control (i.e. set the Primary Proportional Band to zero).  
4. Switch on the process. The process variable will oscillate about the setpoint. Record the  
Peak-to-Peak variation (P) of the first cycle (i.e. the difference between the highest value  
of the first overshoot and the lowest value of the first undershoot), and the time period of  
the oscillation (T) in minutes. See the example diagram below - Manually Tuning PID.  
5. Calculate the PID control parameters using the formula below. P.Pb is the Primary  
Proportional Band, Int.T is the Integral Time Constant, and Der.T is the Derivative Time  
Constant. The Input Span is the difference between Scale Range Lower Limit and Scale  
Range Upper Limit:  
P
P.Pb =  
x 100  
Input Span  
Int.T = T minutes  
T
Der.T =  
minutes  
6
Time  
Figure 47. Manually Tuning PID  
Page 74  
Manual Tuning  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                             
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Dual Control Tuning (PID with Primary and Secondary Outputs)  
This tuning technique balances the need to reach setpoint quickly, with the wish to limit  
setpoint overshoot at start-up and during process changes. It determines values for the  
Primary Proportional Band, Secondary Proportional Band, Integral and Derivative time  
constants that allow the PID control algorithm to give acceptable results in most applications  
that use dual control (e.g. Heat & Cool).  
CAUTION:  
This technique is suitable only for processes that are not harmed by large  
fluctuations in the process variable.  
1. Tune the controller using only the Primary Control output as described in the Single  
Control Tuning section above.  
2. Set the Secondary Proportional Band to the same value as the Primary Proportional Band  
and monitor the operation of the controller in dual control mode. If there is a tendency to  
oscillate as the control passes into the Secondary Proportional Band, increase its value. If  
the process appears to be over-damped (slow to respond) in the region of the Secondary  
Proportional Band, decrease its value.  
3. When the PID tuning values have been determined, if there is a disturbance to the  
process variable as control passes from one proportional band to the other, set the  
Overlap/Deadband parameter to a positive value to introduce some overlap. Adjust this  
value by trial and error until satisfactory results are obtained.  
PI Tuning (Valve, Damper & Speed Controllers)  
This tuning technique is used when controlling a damper, a modulating valve or motor speed  
controller. It determines values for the Primary Proportional Band, and Integral Time  
Constant. The Derivative Time Constant is normally set to OFF. This type of control (known  
as PI Control) minimises valve/motor wear whilst giving optimal process control.  
CAUTION:  
This technique is suitable only for processes that are not harmed by large  
fluctuations in the process variable.  
1. Set the setpoint to the normal operating process value (or to a lower value if overshoot  
beyond this value is likely to cause damage).  
2. Set controller to On/Off Control mode (i.e. set Primary Proportional Band to the minimum  
value).  
3. Set the Integral Time Constant to OFF.  
4. Set the Derivative Time Constant to OFF.  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Manual Tuning  
Page 75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
5. Follow the instructions in the diagram below. At each stage, allow sufficient settling time  
before moving on to the next stage. P.Pb is the Primary Proportional Band, Int.T is the  
Integral Time Constant.  
START  
Apply Power to  
the load.  
Does the  
Time  
Tb  
Yes  
PV  
continuously  
Oscillate?  
No  
Note the time  
interval Ta  
Are the  
Oscillations  
decaying to  
zero?  
Yes  
Note the period  
of the decaying  
Set P.Pb = 0.8%  
Set Int.T = Ta  
No  
oscillations (Tb)  
Multiply P.Pb  
setting by 1.5  
Multiply P.Pb  
setting by 1.5  
Set Int.T = Tb  
2
END  
The controller is now tuned.  
Fine-tuning may be required  
to optimise the controllers  
Time  
Ta  
Table 26. Manually Tuning Valve Control  
Page 76  
Manual Tuning  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Fine Tuning.  
A separate cycle time adjustment parameter is provided for the Primary and Secondary  
control when using time proportioning control outputs.  
Note:  
Adjusting the cycle time affects the controllers operation; a shorter cycle time gives control  
that is more accurate, but mechanical components such as relays will have a reduced life  
span.  
1. Increase the width of the proportional band if the process overshoots or oscillates  
excessively.  
2. Decrease the width of the proportional band if the process responds slowly or fails to  
reach setpoint.  
3. To find the optimum value for the Integral Time, decrease its value until the process  
becomes unstable, then increase it a little at a time, until stability has is restored. Induce a  
load disturbance or make a setpoint change to verify that the process stabilises. If not  
increase the value some more and re-test.  
Note:  
Allow enough time for the controller and process to adjust between changes.  
4. Initially add Derivative at a value between 1/4th and 1/10th of the Integral Time value.  
5. Increase the Derivative Time if the process overshoots/undershoots, increase its value a  
little at a time, if the process becomes unstable, until the oscillation stops. Induce a load  
disturbance or make a setpoint change to verify that the process stabilises. If not decrease  
the value some more and re-test.  
Note:  
When controlling a modulating valve, it is recommended that Derivative is set to OFF to  
avoid excessive valve activity. Derivative can cause process instability in these processes.  
6. After making all other adjustments, if an offset exists between the setpoint and the process  
variable use the Bias (manual reset) to eliminate the error:  
Below setpoint - use a larger value  
Above setpoint - use a smaller value.  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Manual Tuning  
Page 77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
12 Serial Communications  
Supported Protocols  
Communication with a Modbus RTU or Modbus TCP master device is possible if the  
appropriate communications module is fitted into Option Slot A. An RS485 Module is  
required for Modbus RTU. An Ethernet Module is required for Modbus TCP.  
The instrument can also act as Setpoint Master over RS485 in multi-zone applications. In this  
mode the unit continuously sends its setpoint value using Modbus broadcast messages.  
For a complete description of the Modbus protocol refer to the description provided at  
http://www.modbus.org/  
All models also have a configuration socket for use with the PC configuration software. An  
RS232 to TTL lead (available from your supplier) is required in order to use this socket.  
A front mounted USB port is available on some models; this can also be used to configure  
the instrument or to transfer recorder or profile files via a USB memory stick.  
RS485 Configuration  
The RS485 address, bit rate and character format are configured via the front panel from the  
Comms Configuration menu or by using the PC Configurator software.  
Physical layer configuration settings possible are:  
Data rate:  
Parity:  
4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600 or 115200 bps  
None (default), Even, Odd  
Character format: Always 8 bits per character.  
Device Address: See below.  
RS485 Device Addressing  
The instrument must be assigned a unique device address in the range 1 to 255. This  
address is used to recognise Modbus Queries intended for this instrument. With the  
exception of globally addressed broadcast messages, the instrument ignores Modbus  
Queries that do not match the address that has been assigned to it.  
The instrument will accept broadcast messages (global queries) using device address 0 no  
matter what device address is assigned. No response messages are returned for globally  
addressed Queries.  
Ethernet Configuration  
For Modbus TCP communications (Modbus over Ethernet), the IP address can either be  
assigned by a Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP), BootP or AutoIP server on the  
network, or manually assigned using the IP address allocation software tool.  
Refer to the PC Software section of this manual for more information setting IP addresses.  
The supported data rates 10/100BASE-T (10 or 100 Mbps) are automatically detected.  
Page 78  
Serial Communications  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                                           
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Link Layer  
A Query (or command) is transmitted from the Modbus Master to the Modbus Slave. The  
slave instrument assembles the reply to the master. All of the instruments covered by this  
manual are slave devices, and cannot act as a Modbus Master.  
MODBUS  
MASTER  
SLAVE  
INSTRUMENT  
QUERY  
RESPONSE  
Figure 48. Modbus Link Layer  
A message for either a QUERY or RESPONSE is made up of an inter-message gap followed  
by a sequence of data characters. The inter-message gap is at least 3.5 data character times  
- the transmitter must not start transmission until 3 character times have elapsed since  
reception of the last character in a message, and must release the transmission line within 3  
character times of the last character in a message.  
Note:  
Three character times is approximately 0.25ms at 115200 bps, 0.51ms at 57600 bps,  
0.75ms at 38400 bps, 1.5ms at 19200 bps, 3ms at 9600 bps and 6ms at 4800bps.  
Data is encoded for each character as binary data, transmitted LSB first.  
For a QUERY the address field contains the address of the slave destination. The slave  
address is given together with the Function and Data fields by the Application layer. The  
CRC is generated from the given address, function and data characters.  
For a RESPONSE the address field contains the address of the responding slave. The  
Function and Data fields are generated by the slave application. The CRC is generated from  
the address, function and data characters.  
The standard MODBUS RTU CRC-16 calculation employing the polynomial 216+215+22+1 is  
used.  
Inter-message Address  
Function  
1 character  
Data  
n characters  
CRC Check  
2 characters  
gap  
1 character  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Serial Communications  
Page 79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Supported Modbus Functions  
Modbus defines several function types. The following types are supported by this instrument:  
Function Code  
(decimal)  
Modbus Meaning  
Description  
03 / 04  
Read Holding/Input registers  
Read current binary value of specified number of  
parameters at given address. Up to 64 parameters  
can be accessed with one Query.  
06  
Write Single Register  
Diagnostics  
Writes two bytes to a specified word address.  
Used for loopback test only.  
08  
16 (0x10 hex)  
Write Multiple Registers  
Writes up to 253 bytes of data to the specified  
address range.  
23 (0x17 hex)  
Read/Write Multiple Registers  
Reads and Writes 253 bytes of data to the specified  
address ranges.  
Function Descriptions  
The following is interpreted from the Modbus Protocol Description obtainable from  
http://www.modbus.org/. Refer to that document if clarification is required.  
In the function descriptions below, the preceding device address value is assumed, as is the  
correctly formed two-byte CRC value at the end of the QUERY and RESPONSE frames.  
Function 03 / 04 - Read Holding/Input Registers  
Reads current binary value of data at the specified word addresses.  
QUERY  
Function  
Address of 1st Word  
HI LO  
Number of Words  
03 / 04  
HI  
LO  
RESPONSE  
First Word  
Function  
Number of  
Bytes  
Last Word  
03 / 04  
HI  
LO  
HI  
LO  
In the response the “Number of Bytes” indicates the number of data bytes read from the  
instrument. E.g. if 5 words are read, the count will be 10 (A hex). The maximum number of  
words that can be read is 64. If a parameter does not exist at one of the addresses read,  
then a value of 0000h is returned for that word.  
Page 80  
Serial Communications  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                       
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Function 06 - Write Single Register  
Writes two bytes to a specified word address.  
QUERY  
Address of Word  
Function  
Value to write  
Value written  
06  
HI  
HI  
LO  
HI  
HI  
LO  
LO  
RESPONSE  
Address of Word  
Function  
06  
LO  
Note:  
The Response normally returns the same data as the Query.  
Function 08 - Loopback Diagnostic Test  
QUERY  
Function  
Diagnostic Code  
LO=00  
RESPONSE  
Sub-function  
Value  
Value  
08  
HI =00  
HI=00  
HI  
HI  
LO  
LO  
Function  
08  
LO=00  
Note:  
The Response normally returns the same data as the loopback Query. Other Diagnostic  
Codes are not supported.  
Function 16 - Write Multiple Registers (0x10 Hex)  
Writes consecutive word (two-byte) values starting at the specified address.  
QUERY  
Number of  
Words to Write Query Bytes  
Function  
1st Write  
Address  
Number of  
1st Query  
Byte  
2nd Query  
Byte  
Last Query  
Byte  
etc  
10  
HI  
LO  
HI  
HI  
LO  
→
RESPONSE  
1st Word Address  
Function  
10  
Number of Words  
LO  
HI  
LO  
Note:  
The number of data bytes that can be written in one message is 253 bytes.  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Serial Communications  
Page 81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Function 23 Hex - Read / Write Multiple Registers (0x17 hex)  
Reads and writes the requested number of consecutive words (two-bytes) starting at the  
specified addresses.  
QUERY  
Function  
1st Read  
Address  
Number of 1st Write Number of  
Values to Write  
Words to  
Read  
Address  
Words to  
Write  
1st Word  
HI LO  
2nd Word etc Last Word  
17  
HI  
LO  
HI  
LO  
HI LO  
HI  
LO  
HI  
LO  
→
HI  
LO  
RESPONSE  
1st Word  
Function  
17  
Number of  
Bytes  
Read Data  
2nd Word  
HI LO  
etc  
Last Word  
HI LO  
HI  
LO  
→
Note:  
The number of data bytes that can be read and written in one message is 253 bytes.  
Exception Responses  
When a QUERY is sent that the instrument cannot interpret, an Exception RESPONSE is  
returned. Possible exception responses are:  
Exception Code  
Error Condition  
Unused  
Interpretation  
00  
None.  
01  
02  
Illegal function  
Function number out of range.  
Illegal Data Address  
Write functions: Parameter number out of range or not  
supported. (for write functions only).  
Read Functions: Start parameter does not exist or end  
parameter greater than 65536.  
03  
Illegal Data Value  
Attempt to write invalid data / required action not executed.  
The format of an exception response is:  
RESPONSE  
Function  
Exception Code  
as detailed above  
Original Function code with its Most  
Significant Bit (MSB) set.  
Note:  
In the case of multiple exception codes for a single QUERY the Exception code returned is  
the one corresponding to the first parameter in error.  
Page 82  
Serial Communications  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
13 Modbus Parameters  
The Modbus parameter register addresses are detailed in the tables below.  
The Access column indicates if a parameter is read only (RO) or if it can also be written to  
(R/W). Communications writes will not be implemented if the Writing Via Serial Comms  
parameter in the Communications Configuration menu is set to Disabled.  
Note:  
Some parameters that do not apply for a particular configuration will accept reads and  
writes (e.g. attempting to scale a Linear output which has not been fitted). Read only  
parameters will return an exception if an attempt is made to write values to them.  
Data Formats  
Data can be read or written in three formats: Integer Only, Integer with 1 Decimal Place and  
Floating Point Number.  
The Modbus Address column shows the register address for each parameter in integer  
format. Other formats can be calculated from the Integer Only address.  
When working in Hexadecimal, the format calculations are:  
Address for Integer with 1 Decimal Place = Integer address plus 0x4000  
Address for Floating Point = Integer address multiplied by 2, plus 0x8000  
When working in Decimal, the format calculations are:  
Address for Integer with 1 Decimal Place = Integer address plus 16384  
Address for Floating Point = Integer address multiplied by 2, plus 32768  
Example Register Address Calculations  
Calculating Parameter Register Addresses  
Integer Only  
Address  
Address  
0x0407  
1031  
Integer+1  
Address + 0x4000  
Address + 16384  
0x4407  
Floating Point  
Address x 2 + 0x8000  
Address x 2 + 32768  
0x880E  
(hex)  
(dec)  
(hex)  
(dec)  
(hex)  
(dec)  
(hex)  
(dec)  
(hex)  
(dec)  
Register Address Calculation  
Address Example:  
(For Process Variable)  
17415  
34830  
Data Value Returned:  
If actual Value = 23.9 decimal  
0x00, 0x17  
23  
0x00, 0xEF  
239  
0x41, 0xBF, 0x33, 0x33  
23.9 as floating decimal  
0xA03E  
Address Example:  
(For Selected Setpoint)  
0x101F  
4127  
0x501F  
20511  
41022  
Data Value Returned:  
If Value = 1 (Alternative SP)  
0x00, 0x01  
1
0x00, 0x0A  
10  
0x3F, 0x80, 0x00, 0x00  
1.0 as floating decimal  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Modbus Parameters  
Page 83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                           
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Universal Process Input Parameters  
Parameter Name  
Modbus Address  
Access Values  
(Dec)  
1024  
(Hex)  
Value  
0
Process Input Type  
B Type Thermocouple  
C Type Thermocouple  
D Type Thermocouple  
E Type Thermocouple  
J Type Thermocouple  
K Type Thermocouple  
L Type Thermocouple  
N Type Thermocouple  
R Type Thermocouple  
S Type Thermocouple  
T Type Thermocouple  
PtRh 20%: 40% Thermocouple  
PT100 RTD  
Universal Process  
Input Type  
0x0400  
R/W  
2
4
6
8
10  
12  
14  
16  
18  
20  
22  
24  
26  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
Value  
0
NI120 RTD  
0 to 20mA DC  
4 to 20mA DC  
0 to 50mV DC  
10 to 50mV DC  
0 to 5V DC  
1 to 5V DC  
0 to 10V DC  
2 to 10V DC  
Engineering Units  
Engineering Units  
1025  
1026  
0x0401  
0x0402  
R/W  
R/W  
= None  
= °C (Default for Europe)  
= °F (Default for USA)  
Decimal Places  
1
2
Value  
0
Maximum Display  
Decimal Places  
None (e.g. 1234)  
One (e.g. 123.4)  
Two (e.g. 12.34)  
Three (e.g. 1.234)  
1
2
3
Range Minimum  
Range Maximum  
1027  
1028  
1029  
0x0403  
0x0404  
0x0405  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
Valid between input range maximum and minimum  
(see Specifications Section for input details)  
Process Variable  
Offset  
Valid between scale range maximum and minimum  
Filter Time Constant  
Process Variable  
1030  
1031  
1032  
0x0406  
0x0407  
0x0408  
R/W  
RO  
RO  
Valid between 0.0 and 512.0  
The current process input value  
Value  
Process Input Break Status  
Input Signal /Sensor  
Break Flag  
0
1
Inactive  
Active  
Page 84  
Modbus Parameters  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Parameter Name  
Modbus Address  
Access Values  
(Dec)  
1033  
(Hex)  
Value  
Process Input Under Range Status  
Input Signal Under  
Range Flag  
0x0409  
RO  
0
Inactive  
1
Active  
Value  
Process Input Over Range Status  
Input Signal Over  
Range Flag  
1034  
1035  
1048  
0x040A  
0x040B  
0x0418  
RO  
0
Inactive  
1
Active  
Value  
CJC Status  
Disabled  
Cold Junction  
Compensation  
Enable/disable  
R/W  
R/W  
0
Enabled (default)  
Calibration Reminder Status  
Disabled  
1
Value  
Calibration Reminder  
Enable  
0
1
Enabled  
Calibration Reminder  
Date  
1049  
1052  
0x0419  
0x041C  
R/W  
RO  
Data Format = ddmmyy where dd = day, mm = month  
and yy = year (e.g. 200308 is 20th March 2008)  
Value  
Calibration Status  
Calibration OK  
Calibration Reminder  
Status  
0
1
Calibration Required  
Multi-point Scaling Status  
Disabled  
Value  
Multi-point Scaling  
Enable  
1053  
0x041D  
R/W  
0
1
Enabled (only if the input type is linear)  
Scale Point 1  
Display Point 1  
Scale Point 2  
Display Point 2  
Scale Point 3  
Display Point 3  
Scale Point 4  
Display Point 4  
Scale Point 5  
Display Point 5  
Scale Point 6  
Display Point 6  
Scale Point 7  
Display Point 7  
Scale Point 8  
Display Point 8  
Scale Point 9  
Display Point 9  
Scale Point 10  
Display Point 10  
Scale Point 11  
Display Point 11  
Scale Point 12  
Display Point 12  
1054  
1055  
1056  
1057  
1058  
1059  
1060  
1061  
1062  
1063  
1064  
1065  
1066  
1067  
1068  
1069  
1070  
1071  
1072  
1073  
1074  
1075  
1076  
1077  
0x041E  
0x041F  
0x0420  
0x0421  
0x0422  
0x0423  
0x0424  
0x0425  
0x0426  
0x0427  
0x0428  
0x0429  
0x042A  
0x042B  
0x042C  
0x042D  
0x042E  
0x042F  
0x0430  
0x0431  
0x0432  
0x0433  
0x0434  
0x0435  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
0.1 to 100.0%  
Valid between scale range maximum and minimum  
>Scale point 1 to 100.0%  
Valid between scale range maximum and minimum  
>Scale point 2 to 100.0%  
Valid between scale range maximum and minimum  
>Scale point 3 to 100.0%  
Valid between scale range maximum and minimum  
>Scale point 4 to 100.0%  
Valid between scale range maximum and minimum  
>Scale point 5 to 100.0%  
Valid between scale range maximum and minimum  
>Scale point 6 to 100.0%  
Valid between scale range maximum and minimum  
>Scale point 7 to 100.0%  
Valid between scale range maximum and minimum  
>Scale point 8 to 100.0%  
Valid between scale range maximum and minimum  
>Scale point 9 to 100.0%  
Valid between scale range maximum and minimum  
>Scale point 10 to 100.0%  
Valid between scale range maximum and minimum  
>Scale point 11 to 100.0%  
Valid between scale range maximum and minimum  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Modbus Parameters  
Page 85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Parameter Name  
Modbus Address  
Access Values  
(Dec)  
1078  
(Hex)  
0x0436  
0x0437  
0x0438  
0x0439  
0x043A  
0x043B  
Scale Point 13  
Display Point 13  
Scale Point 14  
Display Point 14  
Scale Point 15  
Display Point 15  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
>Scale point 12 to 100.0%  
1079  
1080  
1081  
1082  
1083  
Valid between scale range maximum and minimum  
>Scale point 13 to 100.0%  
Valid between scale range maximum and minimum  
>Scale point 14 to 100.0%  
Valid between scale range maximum and minimum  
Option Slot A Parameters  
Parameter Name  
Modbus Address  
Access Values  
(Dec)  
Digital Input A Status 2115  
(Hex)  
Value  
Digital Input A Status  
Inactive  
0x0845  
RO  
RO  
0
1
Active  
Value  
Module Fitted In Slot A  
None Fitted  
Option Slot A  
Module Type  
2116  
0x0844  
0
1
RS485 Communications  
Digital Input  
3
4
Auxiliary Input A  
5
Ethernet Communications  
Error (unrecognised module)  
RS485 Address  
Modbus Master mode  
255  
Value  
0
RS485 Address  
2117  
2118  
0x0845  
0x0846  
R/W  
R/W  
1 to 255 Modbus Slave Address  
Value  
Baud Rate  
RS485 Data Rate  
0
4800  
1
9600  
19200 (Default)  
38400  
2
3
4
57600  
5
115200  
Parity  
Value  
RS485 Parity  
2119  
2120  
0x0847  
0x0848  
R/W  
R/W  
0
None  
1
Even  
2
Odd  
Value  
Auxiliary A Input Type  
0 to 20mA DC  
4 to 20mA DC  
0 to 10V DC  
2 to 10V DC  
0 to 5V DC  
1 to 5V DC  
Auxiliary Input A  
Type  
0
1
2
3
4
5
Target Setpoint  
Address  
2121  
0x0849  
R/W  
Target setpoint parameter address for master mode  
Page 86  
Modbus Parameters 51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Parameter Name  
Modbus Address  
Access Values  
(Dec)  
2123  
(Hex)  
Value  
Data Format  
Master Transmit  
Format  
0x084B  
R/W  
0
Integer  
1
Integer with 1 decimal place  
2
Floating point number  
Value  
Communications Status  
Comms Write  
Enable/Disable  
2124  
2127  
2128  
2129  
0x084C  
0x084F  
0x0850  
0x0851  
R/W  
RO  
RO  
RO  
0
Writing via serial communications disabled  
1
Writing via serial communications enabled  
Value  
Auxiliary Input A Break Status  
Auxiliary Input A  
Input Signal Break  
0
Inactive  
1
Active  
Value  
Auxiliary Input A Under Range Status  
Auxiliary Input A  
Input Signal Under  
Range  
0
Inactive  
1
Active  
Value  
Auxiliary Input A Over Range Status  
Auxiliary Input A  
Input Signal Over  
Range  
0
1
Inactive  
Active  
Option Slot B Parameters  
Parameter Name  
Modbus Address  
Access Values  
(Dec)  
2080  
(Hex)  
Value  
Auxiliary B Input Type  
0 to 20mA DC  
Auxiliary Input B  
Type  
0x0820  
R/W  
0
1
4 to 20mA DC  
2
0 to 10V DC  
3
2 to 10V DC  
4
0 to 5V DC  
5
1 to 5V DC  
6
0 to 100mV DC  
7
>2000 Ohm Potentiometer  
Module Fitted In Slot B  
None Fitted  
Value  
Option Slot B  
Module Type  
2081  
0x0821  
RO  
0
1
Auxiliary Input B with Digital Input B  
Error (unrecognised module)  
Auxiliary Input B Break Status  
Inactive  
255  
Value  
Auxiliary Input B  
Input Signal Break  
2082  
2083  
2084  
0x0822  
0x0823  
0x0824  
RO  
RO  
RO  
0
1
Active  
Value  
Auxiliary Input B Under Range Status  
Inactive  
Auxiliary Input B  
Input Signal Under  
Range  
0
1
Active  
Value  
Auxiliary Input B Over Range Status  
Inactive  
Auxiliary Input B  
Input Signal Over  
Range  
0
1
Active  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Modbus Parameters  
Page 87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Parameter Name  
Modbus Address  
Access Values  
(Dec)  
Digital Input B Status 2085  
(Hex)  
Value  
Digital Input B Status  
Inactive  
0x0825  
RO  
RO  
0
1
Active  
Value  
Calibration Status  
Calibration OK  
Calibration Required  
Calibration Status  
2086  
0x0826  
0
1
Option Slot 1 Parameters  
Parameter Name  
Modbus Address  
Access Values  
(Dec)  
2130  
(Hex)  
Value  
Module Fitted In Slot 1  
None Fitted  
Option Slot 1  
Module Type  
0x0852  
RO  
R/W  
RO  
0
1
Single Relay  
2
Single SSR Driver  
Linear mA/V DC  
Triac  
3
8
Error (unrecognised module)  
Linear Output 1 Type  
0 to 5V DC  
255  
Value  
Linear mA/V DC  
Output 1 Type  
2131  
0x0853  
0
1
0 to 10V DC  
2
2 to 10V DC  
3
0 to 20mA DC  
4
4 to 20mA DC  
5
Variable 0 to 10VDC Transmitter PSU  
Digital Output 1 Status  
Inactive  
Value  
Digital Output 1  
Status  
2132  
0x0854  
0
1
Active  
Linear Output 1  
Level Status  
2134  
2144  
0x0856  
0x0860  
RO  
-2.0% to 102.0% of nominal range  
(control output will over/under drive by 2%).  
Value  
Linear Output 1 Function  
Disabled  
Linear Output 1  
Function  
R/W  
0
1
Primary Output Power  
Secondary Output Power  
Retransmit Actual Setpoint Value  
Retransmit Process Variable Value  
Digital Output 1 Function  
Disabled  
2
3
4
Value  
Digital Output 1  
Function  
(Relays, SSR  
Drivers or Triacs.  
Linear Outputs are  
mA or VDC)  
2146  
2148  
0x0862  
0x0864  
R/W  
R/W  
0
1
Primary Output Power  
Secondary Output Power  
Alarm  
2
3
4
Alarm and Event  
Value  
Output 1 Alarm Selection  
Alarm 1. Direct Acting  
Output 1 Alarm  
Selection  
0
Page 88  
Modbus Parameters  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Parameter Name  
Modbus Address  
Access Values  
(Dec)  
(Hex)  
1
Alarm 1. Reverse Acting  
2
Alarm 2, Direct Acting  
3
Alarm 2. Reverse Acting  
4
Alarm 3. Direct Acting  
5
Alarm 3. Reverse Acting  
6
Alarm 4. Direct Acting  
7
Alarm 4. Reverse Acting  
8
Alarm 5. Direct Acting  
9
Alarm 5. Reverse Acting  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
Value  
0
OR of Alarm 1 or 2. Direct  
OR of Alarm 1 or 2. Reverse  
OR of Alarm 1, 2, or 3. Direct  
OR of Alarm 1, 2, or 3. Reverse  
OR of Alarm 1, 2, 3, or 4. Direct  
OR of Alarm 1, 2, 3, or 4. Reverse  
OR of Alarm 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5. Direct  
OR of Alarm 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5. Reverse  
Output 1 Event And Alarm Selection  
Event 1. Direct Acting  
Output 1 Event And  
Alarm Selection  
2150  
0x0866  
R/W  
1
Event 1. Reverse Acting  
2
Event 2. Direct Acting  
3
Event 2. Reverse Acting  
4
Event 3. Direct Acting  
5
Event 3. Reverse Acting  
6
Event 4. Direct Acting  
7
Event 4. Reverse Acting  
8
Event 5. Direct Acting  
9
Event 5. Reverse Acting  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
Profile Running. Direct Acting  
Profile Running. Reverse Acting  
End of Profile. Direct Acting  
End of Profile. Reverse Acting  
Event 1 AND Alarm 1. Direct Acting  
Event 1 AND Alarm 1. Reverse Acting  
Event 2 AND Alarm 2. Direct Acting  
Event 2 AND Alarm 2. Reverse Acting  
Event 3 AND Alarm 3. Direct Acting  
Event 3 AND Alarm 3. Reverse Acting  
Event 4 AND Alarm 4. Direct Acting  
Event 4 AND Alarm 4. Reverse Acting  
Event 5 AND Alarm 5. Direct Acting  
Event 5 AND Alarm 5. Reverse Acting  
Output 1 Retransmit 2152  
Minimum  
0x0868  
0x0869  
R/W  
R/W  
Limited by input range maximum and minimum  
Output 1 Retransmit 2153  
Maximum  
Limited by input range maximum and minimum  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Modbus Parameters  
Page 89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Option Slot 2 Parameters  
Parameter Name  
Modbus Address  
Access Values  
(Dec)  
2160  
(Hex)  
Value  
Module Fitted In Slot 2  
Option Slot 2  
Module Type  
0x0870  
RO  
0
None Fitted  
1
Single Relay  
2
Single SSR Driver  
Linear mA/V DC  
Triac  
3
8
9
Dual Relay  
10  
Dual SSR Driver  
24VDC Transmitter PSU  
Error (unrecognised module)  
Linear Output 2 Type  
11  
255  
Value  
Linear mA/V DC  
Output 2 Type  
2161  
0x0871  
R/W  
0
0 to 5V DC  
1
0 to 10V DC  
2
2 to 10V DC  
3
0 to 20mA DC  
4 to 20mA DC  
Variable 0 to 10VDC Transmitter PSU  
Digital Output 2 or 2A Status  
Inactive  
4
5
Value  
Digital Output 2 or  
2A Status  
2162  
2163  
0x0872  
0x0873  
RO  
RO  
0
1
Active  
Value  
Digital Output 2B Status  
Inactive  
Digital Output 2B  
Status  
0
1
Active  
Linear Output 2  
Level Status  
2164  
2174  
0x0874  
0x087E  
RO  
-2.0% to 102.0% of nominal range  
(control output will over/under drive by 2%).  
Value  
Linear Output 2 or 2A Function  
Disabled  
Linear Output 2 or  
2A Function  
R/W  
0
1
Primary Output Power  
Secondary Output Power  
Retransmit Actual Setpoint Value  
Retransmit Process Variable Value  
Digital Output 2 or 2A Function  
Disabled  
2
3
4
Value  
Digital Output 2 or  
2A Function  
2176  
0x0880  
R/W  
0
1
2
3
4
Primary Output Power  
Secondary Output Power  
Alarm  
Alarm and Event  
Page 90  
Modbus Parameters  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Parameter Name  
Modbus Address  
Access Values  
(Dec)  
2177  
(Hex)  
Value  
0
Digital Output 2B Function  
Disabled  
Digital Output 2B  
Function  
0x0881  
R/W  
R/W  
1
Primary Output Power  
2
Secondary Output Power  
Alarm  
3
4
Alarm and Event  
Value  
0
Output 2 or 2A Alarm Selection  
Alarm 1. Direct Acting  
Output 2 or 2A  
Alarm Selection  
2178  
0x0882  
1
Alarm 1. Reverse Acting  
Alarm 2, Direct Acting  
2
3
Alarm 2. Reverse Acting  
Alarm 3. Direct Acting  
4
5
Alarm 3. Reverse Acting  
Alarm 4. Direct Acting  
6
7
Alarm 4. Reverse Acting  
Alarm 5. Direct Acting  
8
9
Alarm 5. Reverse Acting  
OR of Alarm 1 or 2. Direct  
OR of Alarm 1 or 2. Reverse  
OR of Alarm 1, 2, or 3. Direct  
OR of Alarm 1, 2, or 3. Reverse  
OR of Alarm 1, 2, 3, or 4. Direct  
OR of Alarm 1, 2, 3, or 4. Reverse  
OR of Alarm 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5. Direct  
OR of Alarm 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5. Reverse  
Output 2B Alarm Selection  
Alarm 1. Direct Acting  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
Value  
0
Output 2B Alarm  
Selection  
2179  
0x0883  
R/W  
1
Alarm 1. Reverse Acting  
Alarm 2, Direct Acting  
2
3
Alarm 2. Reverse Acting  
Alarm 3. Direct Acting  
4
5
Alarm 3. Reverse Acting  
Alarm 4. Direct Acting  
6
7
Alarm 4. Reverse Acting  
Alarm 5. Direct Acting  
8
9
Alarm 5. Reverse Acting  
OR of Alarm 1 or 2. Direct  
OR of Alarm 1 or 2. Reverse  
OR of Alarm 1, 2, or 3. Direct  
OR of Alarm 1, 2, or 3. Reverse  
OR of Alarm 1, 2, 3, or 4. Direct  
OR of Alarm 1, 2, 3, or 4. Reverse  
OR of Alarm 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5. Direct  
OR of Alarm 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5. Reverse  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Modbus Parameters  
Page 91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Parameter Name  
Modbus Address  
Access Values  
(Dec)  
2180  
(Hex)  
Value  
0
Output 2 or 2A Event/Alarm Selection  
Event 1. Direct Acting  
Output 2 or 2A  
Event And Alarm  
Selection  
0x0884  
R/W  
1
Event 1. Reverse Acting  
2
Event 2. Direct Acting  
3
Event 2. Reverse Acting  
4
Event 3. Direct Acting  
5
Event 3. Reverse Acting  
6
Event 4. Direct Acting  
7
Event 4. Reverse Acting  
8
Event 5. Direct Acting  
9
Event 5. Reverse Acting  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
Value  
0
Profile Running. Direct Acting  
Profile Running. Reverse Acting  
End of Profile. Direct Acting  
End of Profile. Reverse Acting  
Event 1 AND Alarm 1. Direct Acting  
Event 1 AND Alarm 1. Reverse Acting  
Event 2 AND Alarm 2. Direct Acting  
Event 2 AND Alarm 2. Reverse Acting  
Event 3 AND Alarm 3. Direct Acting  
Event 3 AND Alarm 3. Reverse Acting  
Event 4 AND Alarm 4. Direct Acting  
Event 4 AND Alarm 4. Reverse Acting  
Event 5 AND Alarm 5. Direct Acting  
Event 5 AND Alarm 5. Reverse Acting  
Output 2B Event/Alarm Selection  
Event 1. Direct Acting  
Output 2B Event  
And Alarm Selection  
2181  
0x0885  
R/W  
1
Event 1. Reverse Acting  
2
Event 2. Direct Acting  
3
Event 2. Reverse Acting  
4
Event 3. Direct Acting  
5
Event 3. Reverse Acting  
6
Event 4. Direct Acting  
7
Event 4. Reverse Acting  
8
Event 5. Direct Acting  
9
Event 5. Reverse Acting  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
Profile Running. Direct Acting  
Profile Running. Reverse Acting  
End of Profile. Direct Acting  
End of Profile. Reverse Acting  
Event 1 AND Alarm 1. Direct Acting  
Event 1 AND Alarm 1. Reverse Acting  
Event 2 AND Alarm 2. Direct Acting  
Event 2 AND Alarm 2. Reverse Acting  
Event 3 AND Alarm 3. Direct Acting  
Event 3 AND Alarm 3. Reverse Acting  
Page 92  
Modbus Parameters  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Parameter Name  
Modbus Address  
Access Values  
(Dec)  
(Hex)  
20  
21  
22  
23  
Event 4 AND Alarm 4. Direct Acting  
Event 4 AND Alarm 4. Reverse Acting  
Event 5 AND Alarm 5. Direct Acting  
Event 5 AND Alarm 5. Reverse Acting  
Output 2 Retransmit 2182  
Minimum  
0x0886  
0x0887  
R/W  
R/W  
Limited by input range maximum/minimum  
Output 2 Retransmit 2183  
Maximum  
Limited by input range maximum/minimum  
Option Slot 3 Parameters  
Parameter Name  
Modbus Address  
Access Values  
(Dec)  
2192  
(Hex)  
Value  
Module Fitted In Slot 3  
None Fitted  
Option Slot 3  
Module Type  
0x0890  
RO  
0
1
Single Relay  
2
Single SSR Driver  
Linear mA/V DC  
Triac  
3
8
9
Dual Relay  
10  
Dual SSR Driver  
24VDC Transmitter PSU  
Error (unrecognised module)  
Linear Output 3 Type  
0 to 5V DC  
11  
255  
Value  
Linear mA/V DC  
Output 3 Type  
2193  
0x0891  
R/W  
0
1
0 to 10V DC  
2
2 to 10V DC  
3
0 to 20mA DC  
4
4 to 20mA DC  
5
Variable 0 to 10VDC Transmitter PSU  
Digital Output 3 or 3A Status  
Inactive  
Value  
Digital Output 3 or  
3A Status  
2194  
2195  
0x0892  
0x0893  
RO  
RO  
0
1
Active  
Value  
Digital Output 3B Status  
Inactive  
Digital Output 3B  
Status  
0
1
Active  
Linear Output 3  
Level Status  
2196  
2203  
0x0894  
0x089B  
RO  
-2.0% to 102.0% of nominal range  
(control output will over/under drive by 2%).  
Value  
Linear Output 3 or 3A Function  
Disabled  
Linear Output 3 or  
3A Function  
R/W  
0
1
2
3
4
Primary Output Power  
Secondary Output Power  
Retransmit Actual Setpoint Value  
Retransmit Process Variable Value  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Modbus Parameters  
Page 93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Parameter Name  
Modbus Address  
Access Values  
(Dec)  
2205  
(Hex)  
Value  
Digital Output 3 or 3A Function  
Disabled  
Digital Output 3 or  
3A Function  
0x089D  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
0
1
Primary Output Power  
Secondary Output Power  
Alarm  
2
3
4
Alarm and Event  
Value  
Digital Output 3B Function  
Disabled  
Digital Output 3B  
Function  
2206  
2207  
0x089E  
0x089F  
0
1
Primary Output Power  
Secondary Output Power  
Alarm  
2
3
4
Alarm and Event  
Value  
0
Output 3 or 3A Alarm Selection  
Alarm 1. Direct Acting  
Alarm 1. Reverse Acting  
Alarm 2, Direct Acting  
Alarm 2. Reverse Acting  
Alarm 3. Direct Acting  
Alarm 3. Reverse Acting  
Alarm 4. Direct Acting  
Alarm 4. Reverse Acting  
Alarm 5. Direct Acting  
Alarm 5. Reverse Acting  
OR of Alarm 1 or 2. Direct  
OR of Alarm 1 or 2. Reverse  
OR of Alarm 1, 2, or 3. Direct  
OR of Alarm 1, 2, or 3. Reverse  
OR of Alarm 1, 2, 3, or 4. Direct  
OR of Alarm 1, 2, 3, or 4. Reverse  
OR of Alarm 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5. Direct  
OR of Alarm 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5. Reverse  
Output 3B Alarm Selection  
Alarm 1. Direct Acting  
Alarm 1. Reverse Acting  
Alarm 2, Direct Acting  
Alarm 2. Reverse Acting  
Alarm 3. Direct Acting  
Alarm 3. Reverse Acting  
Alarm 4. Direct Acting  
Alarm 4. Reverse Acting  
Alarm 5. Direct Acting  
Alarm 5. Reverse Acting  
OR of Alarm 1 or 2. Direct  
OR of Alarm 1 or 2. Reverse  
OR of Alarm 1, 2, or 3. Direct  
Output 3 or 3A  
Alarm Selection  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
Value  
0
Output 3B Alarm  
Selection  
2208  
0x08A0  
R/W  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
Page 94  
Modbus Parameters  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Parameter Name  
Modbus Address  
Access Values  
(Dec)  
(Hex)  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
Value  
0
OR of Alarm 1, 2, or 3. Reverse  
OR of Alarm 1, 2, 3, or 4. Direct  
OR of Alarm 1, 2, 3, or 4. Reverse  
OR of Alarm 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5. Direct  
OR of Alarm 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5. Reverse  
Output 3 or 3A Event/Alarm Selection  
Event 1. Direct Acting  
Output 3 or 3A  
Event And Alarm  
Selection  
2209  
0x08A1  
R/W  
1
Event 1. Reverse Acting  
2
Event 2. Direct Acting  
3
Event 2. Reverse Acting  
4
Event 3. Direct Acting  
5
Event 3. Reverse Acting  
6
Event 4. Direct Acting  
7
Event 4. Reverse Acting  
8
Event 5. Direct Acting  
9
Event 5. Reverse Acting  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
Value  
0
Profile Running. Direct Acting  
Profile Running. Reverse Acting  
End of Profile. Direct Acting  
End of Profile. Reverse Acting  
Event 1 AND Alarm 1. Direct Acting  
Event 1 AND Alarm 1. Reverse Acting  
Event 2 AND Alarm 2. Direct Acting  
Event 2 AND Alarm 2. Reverse Acting  
Event 3 AND Alarm 3. Direct Acting  
Event 3 AND Alarm 3. Reverse Acting  
Event 4 AND Alarm 4. Direct Acting  
Event 4 AND Alarm 4. Reverse Acting  
Event 5 AND Alarm 5. Direct Acting  
Event 5 AND Alarm 5. Reverse Acting  
Output 3B Event/Alarm Selection  
Event 1. Direct Acting  
Output 3B Event  
And Alarm Selection  
2210  
0x08A2  
R/W  
1
Event 1. Reverse Acting  
2
Event 2. Direct Acting  
3
Event 2. Reverse Acting  
4
Event 3. Direct Acting  
5
Event 3. Reverse Acting  
6
Event 4. Direct Acting  
7
Event 4. Reverse Acting  
8
Event 5. Direct Acting  
9
Event 5. Reverse Acting  
10  
11  
12  
13  
Profile Running. Direct Acting  
Profile Running. Reverse Acting  
End of Profile. Direct Acting  
End of Profile. Reverse Acting  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Modbus Parameters  
Page 95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Parameter Name  
Modbus Address  
Access Values  
(Dec)  
(Hex)  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
Event 1 AND Alarm 1. Direct Acting  
Event 1 AND Alarm 1. Reverse Acting  
Event 2 AND Alarm 2. Direct Acting  
Event 2 AND Alarm 2. Reverse Acting  
Event 3 AND Alarm 3. Direct Acting  
Event 3 AND Alarm 3. Reverse Acting  
Event 4 AND Alarm 4. Direct Acting  
Event 4 AND Alarm 4. Reverse Acting  
Event 5 AND Alarm 5. Direct Acting  
Event 5 AND Alarm 5. Reverse Acting  
Output 3 Retransmit 2211  
Minimum  
0x08A3  
0x08A4  
R/W  
R/W  
Limited by input range maximum/minimum  
Output 3 Retransmit 2212  
Maximum  
Limited by input range maximum/minimum  
Option Slot 4 Parameters  
Parameter Name  
Modbus Address  
Access Values  
(Dec)  
2222  
(Hex)  
Value  
Module Fitted In Slot 4  
Option Slot 4  
Module Type  
0x08AE  
RO  
0
None Fitted  
1
Quad Relay  
Error (unrecognised module)  
Digital Output 4A, 4B, 4C & 4D Status  
255  
Value  
Digital Output 4  
Status  
2223  
2230  
2231  
0x08AF  
0x08B6  
0x08B7  
RO  
0
All outputs inactive  
Output 4A Active  
Output 4B Active  
Output 4C Active  
Output 4D Active  
Digital Output 4A Function  
Disabled  
Bit 0  
Bit 1  
Bit 2  
Bit 3  
Value  
Digital Output 4A  
Function  
R/W  
R/W  
0
1
Primary Output Power  
Secondary Output Power  
Alarm  
2
3
4
Alarm and Event  
Digital Output 4B Function  
Disabled  
Value  
Digital Output 4B  
Function  
0
1
2
3
4
Primary Output Power  
Secondary Output Power  
Alarm  
Alarm and Event  
Page 96  
Modbus Parameters  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Parameter Name  
Modbus Address  
Access Values  
(Dec)  
2232  
(Hex)  
Value  
Digital Output 4C Function  
Disabled  
Digital Output 4C  
Function  
0x08B8  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
0
1
Primary Output Power  
Secondary Output Power  
Alarm  
2
3
4
Alarm and Event  
Value  
Digital Output 4D Function  
Disabled  
Digital Output 4D  
Function  
2233  
2234  
0x08B9  
0x08BA  
0
1
Primary Output Power  
Secondary Output Power  
Alarm  
2
3
4
Alarm and Event  
Value  
0
Output 4A Alarm Selection  
Alarm 1. Direct Acting  
Alarm 1. Reverse Acting  
Alarm 2, Direct Acting  
Alarm 2. Reverse Acting  
Alarm 3. Direct Acting  
Alarm 3. Reverse Acting  
Alarm 4. Direct Acting  
Alarm 4. Reverse Acting  
Alarm 5. Direct Acting  
Alarm 5. Reverse Acting  
OR of Alarm 1 or 2. Direct  
OR of Alarm 1 or 2. Reverse  
OR of Alarm 1, 2, or 3. Direct  
OR of Alarm 1, 2, or 3. Reverse  
OR of Alarm 1, 2, 3, or 4. Direct  
OR of Alarm 1, 2, 3, or 4. Reverse  
OR of Alarm 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5. Direct  
OR of Alarm 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5. Reverse  
Output 4B Alarm Selection  
Alarm 1. Direct Acting  
Alarm 1. Reverse Acting  
Alarm 2, Direct Acting  
Alarm 2. Reverse Acting  
Alarm 3. Direct Acting  
Alarm 3. Reverse Acting  
Alarm 4. Direct Acting  
Alarm 4. Reverse Acting  
Alarm 5. Direct Acting  
Alarm 5. Reverse Acting  
OR of Alarm 1 or 2. Direct  
OR of Alarm 1 or 2. Reverse  
OR of Alarm 1, 2, or 3. Direct  
Output 4A Alarm  
Selection  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
Value  
0
Output 4B Alarm  
Selection  
2235  
0x08BB  
R/W  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Modbus Parameters  
Page 97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Parameter Name  
Modbus Address  
Access Values  
(Dec)  
(Hex)  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
Value  
0
OR of Alarm 1, 2, or 3. Reverse  
OR of Alarm 1, 2, 3, or 4. Direct  
OR of Alarm 1, 2, 3, or 4. Reverse  
OR of Alarm 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5. Direct  
OR of Alarm 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5. Reverse  
Output 4C Alarm Selection  
Alarm 1. Direct Acting  
Output 4C Alarm  
Selection  
2236  
0x08BC  
R/W  
1
Alarm 1. Reverse Acting  
2
Alarm 2, Direct Acting  
3
Alarm 2. Reverse Acting  
4
Alarm 3. Direct Acting  
5
Alarm 3. Reverse Acting  
6
Alarm 4. Direct Acting  
7
Alarm 4. Reverse Acting  
8
Alarm 5. Direct Acting  
9
Alarm 5. Reverse Acting  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
Value  
0
OR of Alarm 1 or 2. Direct  
OR of Alarm 1 or 2. Reverse  
OR of Alarm 1, 2, or 3. Direct  
OR of Alarm 1, 2, or 3. Reverse  
OR of Alarm 1, 2, 3, or 4. Direct  
OR of Alarm 1, 2, 3, or 4. Reverse  
OR of Alarm 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5. Direct  
OR of Alarm 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5. Reverse  
Output 4D Alarm Selection  
Alarm 1. Direct Acting  
Output 4D Alarm  
Selection  
2237  
0x08BD  
R/W  
1
Alarm 1. Reverse Acting  
2
Alarm 2, Direct Acting  
3
Alarm 2. Reverse Acting  
4
Alarm 3. Direct Acting  
5
Alarm 3. Reverse Acting  
6
Alarm 4. Direct Acting  
7
Alarm 4. Reverse Acting  
8
Alarm 5. Direct Acting  
9
Alarm 5. Reverse Acting  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
OR of Alarm 1 or 2. Direct  
OR of Alarm 1 or 2. Reverse  
OR of Alarm 1, 2, or 3. Direct  
OR of Alarm 1, 2, or 3. Reverse  
OR of Alarm 1, 2, 3, or 4. Direct  
OR of Alarm 1, 2, 3, or 4. Reverse  
OR of Alarm 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5. Direct  
OR of Alarm 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5. Reverse  
Page 98  
Modbus Parameters  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Parameter Name  
Modbus Address  
Access Values  
(Dec)  
2238  
(Hex)  
Value  
0
Output 4A Event/Alarm Selection  
Event 1. Direct Acting  
Output 4A Event  
And Alarm Selection  
0x08BE  
R/W  
1
Event 1. Reverse Acting  
2
Event 2. Direct Acting  
3
Event 2. Reverse Acting  
4
Event 3. Direct Acting  
5
Event 3. Reverse Acting  
6
Event 4. Direct Acting  
7
Event 4. Reverse Acting  
8
Event 5. Direct Acting  
9
Event 5. Reverse Acting  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
Value  
0
Profile Running. Direct Acting  
Profile Running. Reverse Acting  
End of Profile. Direct Acting  
End of Profile. Reverse Acting  
Event 1 AND Alarm 1. Direct Acting  
Event 1 AND Alarm 1. Reverse Acting  
Event 2 AND Alarm 2. Direct Acting  
Event 2 AND Alarm 2. Reverse Acting  
Event 3 AND Alarm 3. Direct Acting  
Event 3 AND Alarm 3. Reverse Acting  
Event 4 AND Alarm 4. Direct Acting  
Event 4 AND Alarm 4. Reverse Acting  
Event 5 AND Alarm 5. Direct Acting  
Event 5 AND Alarm 5. Reverse Acting  
Output 4B Event/Alarm Selection  
Event 1. Direct Acting  
Output 4B Event  
And Alarm Selection  
2239  
0x08BF  
R/W  
1
Event 1. Reverse Acting  
2
Event 2. Direct Acting  
3
Event 2. Reverse Acting  
4
Event 3. Direct Acting  
5
Event 3. Reverse Acting  
6
Event 4. Direct Acting  
7
Event 4. Reverse Acting  
8
Event 5. Direct Acting  
9
Event 5. Reverse Acting  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
Profile Running. Direct Acting  
Profile Running. Reverse Acting  
End of Profile. Direct Acting  
End of Profile. Reverse Acting  
Event 1 AND Alarm 1. Direct Acting  
Event 1 AND Alarm 1. Reverse Acting  
Event 2 AND Alarm 2. Direct Acting  
Event 2 AND Alarm 2. Reverse Acting  
Event 3 AND Alarm 3. Direct Acting  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Modbus Parameters  
Page 99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Parameter Name  
Modbus Address  
Access Values  
(Dec)  
(Hex)  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
Value  
0
Event 3 AND Alarm 3. Reverse Acting  
Event 4 AND Alarm 4. Direct Acting  
Event 4 AND Alarm 4. Reverse Acting  
Event 5 AND Alarm 5. Direct Acting  
Event 5 AND Alarm 5. Reverse Acting  
Output 4C Event/Alarm Selection  
Event 1. Direct Acting  
Output 4C Event  
And Alarm Selection  
2240  
0x08C0  
R/W  
1
Event 1. Reverse Acting  
2
Event 2. Direct Acting  
3
Event 2. Reverse Acting  
4
Event 3. Direct Acting  
5
Event 3. Reverse Acting  
6
Event 4. Direct Acting  
7
Event 4. Reverse Acting  
8
Event 5. Direct Acting  
9
Event 5. Reverse Acting  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
Value  
0
Profile Running. Direct Acting  
Profile Running. Reverse Acting  
End of Profile. Direct Acting  
End of Profile. Reverse Acting  
Event 1 AND Alarm 1. Direct Acting  
Event 1 AND Alarm 1. Reverse Acting  
Event 2 AND Alarm 2. Direct Acting  
Event 2 AND Alarm 2. Reverse Acting  
Event 3 AND Alarm 3. Direct Acting  
Event 3 AND Alarm 3. Reverse Acting  
Event 4 AND Alarm 4. Direct Acting  
Event 4 AND Alarm 4. Reverse Acting  
Event 5 AND Alarm 5. Direct Acting  
Event 5 AND Alarm 5. Reverse Acting  
Output 4D Event/Alarm Selection  
Event 1. Direct Acting  
Output 4D Event  
And Alarm Selection  
2241  
0x08C1  
R/W  
1
Event 1. Reverse Acting  
2
Event 2. Direct Acting  
3
Event 2. Reverse Acting  
4
Event 3. Direct Acting  
5
Event 3. Reverse Acting  
6
Event 4. Direct Acting  
7
Event 4. Reverse Acting  
8
Event 5. Direct Acting  
9
Event 5. Reverse Acting  
10  
11  
12  
13  
Profile Running. Direct Acting  
Profile Running. Reverse Acting  
End of Profile. Direct Acting  
End of Profile. Reverse Acting  
Page 100  
Modbus Parameters  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Parameter Name  
Modbus Address  
(Dec) (Hex)  
Access Values  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
Event 1 AND Alarm 1. Direct Acting  
Event 1 AND Alarm 1. Reverse Acting  
Event 2 AND Alarm 2. Direct Acting  
Event 2 AND Alarm 2. Reverse Acting  
Event 3 AND Alarm 3. Direct Acting  
Event 3 AND Alarm 3. Reverse Acting  
Event 4 AND Alarm 4. Direct Acting  
Event 4 AND Alarm 4. Reverse Acting  
Event 5 AND Alarm 5. Direct Acting  
Event 5 AND Alarm 5. Reverse Acting  
Setpoint Parameters  
Parameter Name  
Modbus Address  
Access Values  
(Dec)  
3944  
(Hex)  
0x0F68  
0x0F69  
0x0F78  
Setpoint Minimum  
Setpoint Maximum  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
Valid between Scale Range Maximum and Minimum  
Valid between Scale Range Maximum and Minimum  
Valid between Setpoint Maximum and Minimum  
3945  
3960  
Local Setpoint 1  
Value  
Local Setpoint 1  
Offset  
3961  
3962  
3963  
4000  
0x0F79  
0x0F7A  
0x0F7B  
0x0FA0  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
Setpoint is always limited within Setpoint Maximum  
and Minimum  
Local Setpoint 2  
Value  
Valid between Setpoint Maximum and Minimum  
Local Setpoint 2  
Offset  
Setpoint is always limited within Setpoint Maximum  
and Minimum  
Value  
Setpoint Selection Method  
Local Setpoint 1 only  
Setpoint Selection  
Method  
0
1
Selected by Digital Input A  
Selected by Digital Input B  
Alternate Setpoint only  
2
3
4
Operator or Comms selectable  
Alternate Setpoint Source  
Local Setpoint 2  
Value  
Alternate Setpoint  
Source  
4001  
0x0FA1  
R/W  
0
1
2
Remote Setpoint from Auxiliary Input A  
Remote Setpoint from Auxiliary Input B  
Auxiliary Input A  
Scale Minimum  
4073  
4074  
4075  
4076  
4078  
4079  
0x0FE9  
0x0FEA  
0x0FEB  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
Valid between Setpoint Maximum and Minimum  
Auxiliary Input A  
Scale Maximum  
Valid between Setpoint Maximum and Minimum  
Auxiliary Input A  
Offset  
Setpoint is always limited within Setpoint Maximum  
and Minimum  
Auxiliary Input A  
Value  
0x0FEC RO  
The value of analogue Auxiliary Input A  
Auxiliary Input B  
Scale Minimum  
0x0FEE  
0x0FEF  
R/W  
R/W  
Valid between Setpoint Maximum and Minimum  
Valid between Setpoint Maximum and Minimum  
Auxiliary Input B  
Scale Maximum  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Modbus Parameters  
Page 101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Parameter Name  
Modbus Address  
Access Values  
(Dec)  
4080  
(Hex)  
Auxiliary Input B  
Offset  
0x0FF0  
R/W  
RO  
Setpoint is always limited within Setpoint Maximum  
and Minimum  
Auxiliary Input B  
Value  
4081  
0x0FF1  
0x101A  
The value of analogue Auxiliary Input B  
Value  
Setpoint Select  
Local Setpoint 1  
Alternate setpoint  
0 or >10000 = Off  
User Setpoint Select 4122  
R/W  
0
1
Setpoint Ramp Rate 4123  
0x101B  
0x101D  
0x101E  
R/W  
RO  
0 to 10000  
Target Setpoint  
4125  
The target setpoint value when ramping  
Value  
Operator Access To Ramp Rate  
Disabled  
Operator Access To 4126  
Setpoint Ramp Rate  
R/W  
0
1
Enabled  
Value  
Selected Setpoint  
Local Setpoint 1  
Alternate setpoint  
Selected Setpoint  
Actual Setpoint  
4127  
8256  
0x101F  
0x2040  
RO  
RO  
0
1
The current instantaneous value of the active setpoint  
Control Parameters  
Parameter Name  
Modbus Address  
Access Values  
(Dec)  
4299  
(Hex)  
Value  
Manual Control Selection Method  
Automatic Control Only  
Manual Control Only  
User Selectable From Key Pad  
Digital input A  
Manual Control  
Select Method  
0x10CB  
R/W  
0
1
2
3
4
Digital input B  
Value  
Control Enable Selection Method  
Enabled Only  
Control Enable  
Select Method  
4300  
0x10CC R/W  
0
1
2
3
4
Disabled Only  
User Selectable From Key Pad  
Digital input A  
Digital input B  
Primary Cycle Time  
4301  
4302  
0x10CD R/W  
0.5 to 512.0 Seconds  
0.5 to 512.0 Seconds  
Secondary Cycle  
Time  
0x10CE  
R/W  
Value  
Control Type  
Control type  
4310  
0x10D6  
R/W  
0
Single Control  
Dual Control  
Control Type  
Direct Acting  
Reverse Acting  
1
Value  
Control Action  
4311  
0x10D7  
R/W  
0
1
Primary Proportional 4312  
Band  
0x10D8  
0x10D9  
R/W  
R/W  
0.0 to 999.9 (% of Input Span)  
Secondary  
4313  
0.0 to 999.9 (% of Input Span)  
Page 102  
Modbus Parameters  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Parameter Name  
Modbus Address  
Access Values  
(Dec)  
(Hex)  
Proportional Band  
Integral Time  
Constant  
4314  
0x10DA  
0x10DB  
R/W  
R/W  
0.0 to 5999 Seconds  
0.0 to 5999 Seconds  
Derivative Time  
Constant  
4315  
4316  
Bias  
0x10DC R/W  
0x10DD R/W  
For single control 0 to 100.  
For Dual control -100 to 100  
Overlap/Deadband  
On/Off Differential  
4317  
4320  
4321  
-100 to 100  
0.1 to 100  
0x10E0  
0x10E1  
R/W  
R/W  
Primary Power  
Upper limit  
10 to 100% Can not be made smaller than Primary  
Lower limit + 10  
Heat/Primary Power 4322  
Lower limit  
0x10E2  
0x10E3  
0x10E4  
0x10E5  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
0 to 90% Can not be made larger than Heat/Primary  
Upper limit – 10  
Cool/Secondary  
Upper Power limit  
4323  
4324  
4325  
10 to 100% Can not be made smaller than  
Cool/Secondary Lower limit + 10  
Cool/Secondary  
Power Lower limit  
0 to 90% Can not be made larger than  
Cool/Secondary Upper limit – 10  
Value  
Pre-Tune Engage/disengage  
Pre-Tune OFF  
Pre-Tune  
Engage/disengage  
0
1
Run Pre-Tune  
Value  
Self-Tune Engage/disengage  
Self-Tune OFF  
Self-Tune  
Engage/disengage  
4326  
4327  
0x10E6  
0x10E7  
R/W  
R/W  
0
1
Self-Tune ON  
Value  
Loop Alarm Type  
Loop Alarm Type  
1
2
Timed  
Automatic (2x Integral Time)  
Loop Alarm Time  
Primary Power  
4328  
4329  
4330  
4331  
4332  
0x10E8  
0x10E9  
0x10EA  
0x10EB  
0x10EC  
R/W  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
1 to 5999 Seconds after output saturation  
The current primary power (0 to 100%)  
The current secondary power (0 to 100%)  
The current combined PID power (-100 to 100%)  
Secondary Power  
Combined Power  
Pre-Tune Status  
Value  
Pre-Tune Status  
Inactive  
0
1
Active  
Value  
Self-Tune Status  
Inactive  
Self-Tune Status  
Loop Alarm status  
4333  
4334  
0x10ED  
0x10EE  
RO  
RO  
0
1
Active  
Value  
Loop Alarm Status  
Inactive  
0
1
Active  
Input Failure Preset  
Power  
4335  
4336  
0x10EF  
0x10F0  
R/W  
R/W  
Power output required if input signal is lost 0 to 100%  
(-100% to 100% for dual control).  
Value  
Auto Pre-Tune  
Disabled  
Auto Pre-tune  
0
1
Enabled  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Modbus Parameters  
Page 103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Alarm parameters  
Parameter Name  
Modbus Address  
Access Values  
(Dec)  
6144  
(Hex)  
Value  
Alarm 1 Type  
Alarm 1 Type  
0x1800  
R/W  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Process High Alarm  
Process Low Alarm  
Deviation Alarm (SP-PV)  
Band Alarm  
Loop Alarm  
Input/Sensor Break Alarm  
Auxiliary Input A Break Alarm  
Auxiliary Input B Break Alarm  
Alarm 1 Value  
6145  
0x1801  
R/W  
Limited by the input range maximum and minimum for  
Alarm types 0 and 1. Limited by the input span for  
alarm types 2 and 3. Not used for alarms 4 to 7.  
Alarm 1 Hysteresis  
6146  
6147  
0x1802  
0x1803  
R/W  
R/W  
Limited by the input span  
Value  
Alarm 1 Inhibit Enable  
Disabled  
Alarm 1 Inhibit  
Enable/disable  
0
1
Enabled  
Value  
Alarm 1 Status  
Inactive  
Alarm 1 Status  
6148  
6149  
6160  
0x1804  
0x1805  
0x1810  
RO  
RO  
R/W  
0
1
Active  
Value  
Alarm 1 Inhibit Status  
Not Inhibited  
Alarm 1 Inhibit  
Status  
0
1
Inhibited  
Value  
Alarm 2 Type  
Alarm 2 Type  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Process High Alarm  
Process Low Alarm  
Deviation Alarm (SP-PV)  
Band Alarm  
Loop Alarm  
Input/Sensor Break Alarm  
Auxiliary Input A Break Alarm  
Auxiliary Input B Break Alarm  
Alarm 2 Value  
6161  
0x1811  
R/W  
Limited by the input range maximum and minimum for  
Alarm types 0 and 1. Limited by the input span for  
alarm types 2 and 3. Not used for alarms 4 to 7.  
Alarm 2 Hysteresis  
6162  
6163  
0x1812  
0x1813  
R/W  
R/W  
Limited by the input span  
Value  
Alarm 2 Inhibit Enable  
Disabled  
Alarm 2 Inhibit  
Enable/disable  
0
1
Enabled  
Value  
Alarm 2 Status  
Inactive  
Alarm 2 Status  
6164  
6165  
0x1814  
0x1815  
RO  
RO  
0
1
Active  
Value  
Alarm 2 Inhibit Status  
Not Inhibited  
Alarm 2 Inhibit  
Status  
0
Page 104  
Modbus Parameters  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Parameter Name  
Modbus Address  
Access Values  
(Dec)  
(Hex)  
1
Inhibited  
Value  
Alarm 3 Type  
Alarm 3 Type  
6176  
0x1820  
R/W  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Process High Alarm  
Process Low Alarm  
Deviation Alarm (SP-PV)  
Band Alarm  
Loop Alarm  
Input/Sensor Break Alarm  
Auxiliary Input A Break Alarm  
Auxiliary Input B Break Alarm  
Alarm 3 Value  
6177  
0x1821  
R/W  
Limited by the input range maximum and minimum for  
Alarm types 0 and 1. Limited by the input span for  
alarm types 2 and 3. Not used for alarms 4 to 7.  
Alarm 3 Hysteresis  
6178  
6179  
0x1822  
0x1823  
R/W  
R/W  
Limited by the input span  
Value  
Alarm 3 Inhibit Enable  
Disabled  
Alarm 3 Inhibit  
Enable/disable  
0
1
Enabled  
Value  
Alarm 3 Status  
Inactive  
Alarm 3 Status  
6180  
6181  
6192  
0x1824  
0x1825  
0x1830  
RO  
RO  
R/W  
0
1
Active  
Value  
Alarm 3 Inhibit Status  
Not Inhibited  
Alarm 3 Inhibit  
Status  
0
1
Inhibited  
Value  
Alarm 4 Type  
Alarm 4 Type  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Process High Alarm  
Process Low Alarm  
Deviation Alarm (SP-PV)  
Band Alarm  
Loop Alarm  
Input/Sensor Break Alarm  
Auxiliary Input A Break Alarm  
Auxiliary Input B Break Alarm  
Alarm 4 Value  
6193  
0x1831  
R/W  
Limited by the input range maximum and minimum for  
Alarm types 0 and 1. Limited by the input span for  
alarm types 2 and 3. Not used for alarms 4 to 7.  
Alarm 4 Hysteresis  
6194  
6195  
0x1832  
0x1833  
R/W  
R/W  
Limited by the input span  
Value  
Alarm 4 Inhibit Enable  
Disabled  
Alarm 4 Inhibit  
Enable/disable  
0
1
Enabled  
Value  
Alarm 4 Status  
Inactive  
Alarm 4 Status  
6196  
6197  
0x1834  
0x1835  
RO  
RO  
0
1
Active  
Value  
Alarm 4 Inhibit Status  
Not Inhibited  
Inhibited  
Alarm 4 Inhibit  
Status  
0
1
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Modbus Parameters  
Page 105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Parameter Name  
Modbus Address  
Access Values  
(Dec)  
6208  
(Hex)  
Value  
Alarm 5 Type  
Alarm 5 Type  
0x1840  
R/W  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Process High Alarm  
Process Low Alarm  
Deviation Alarm (SP-PV)  
Band Alarm  
Loop Alarm  
Input/Sensor Break Alarm  
Auxiliary Input A Break Alarm  
Auxiliary Input B Break Alarm  
Alarm 5 Value  
6209  
0x1841  
R/W  
Limited by the input range maximum and minimum for  
Alarm types 0 and 1. Limited by the input span for  
alarm types 2 and 3. Not used for alarms 4 to 7.  
Alarm 5 Hysteresis  
6210  
6211  
0x1842  
0x1843  
R/W  
R/W  
Limited by the input span  
Value  
Alarm 5 Inhibit Enable  
Disabled  
Alarm 5 Inhibit  
Enable/disable  
0
1
Enabled  
Value  
Alarm 5 Status  
Inactive  
Alarm 5 Status  
6212  
6213  
0x1844  
0x1845  
RO  
RO  
0
1
Active  
Value  
Alarm 5 Inhibit Status  
Not Inhibited  
Inhibited  
Alarm 5 Inhibit  
Status  
0
1
Recorder & Clock Parameters  
Parameter Name  
Modbus Address  
Access Values  
(Dec)  
7550  
(Hex)  
Value  
Recording Sample Interval  
Every Second  
Recording Sample  
Interval  
0x1D7E  
R/W  
0
1
Every 2 Seconds  
2
Every 5 Seconds  
3
Every 10 Seconds  
Every 15 Seconds  
Every 30 Seconds  
Every Minute  
4
5
6
7
Every 2 Minutes  
8
Every 5 Minutes  
9
Every 10 Minutes  
Every 15 Minutes  
Every 30 Minutes  
Recording Mode  
Record until memory used  
Continuous FIFO buffer  
Operator Start/Stop Recording  
Stop Recording  
10  
11  
Value  
Recording Mode  
7551  
7552  
0x1D7F  
0x1D80  
R/W  
R/W  
0
1
Value  
Start Stop  
Recording  
0
Page 106  
Modbus Parameters  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Parameter Name  
Modbus Address  
Access Values  
(Dec)  
(Hex)  
1
Start Recording  
Data Recorder Fitted  
Not Fitted  
Value  
Data Recorder  
Fitted  
7553  
0x1D81  
RO  
0
1
Recorder Fitted  
Memory Remaining  
Time Remaining  
Recorder Trigger  
7554  
7555  
7563  
0x1D82  
0x1D83  
0x1D8B  
RO  
RO  
R/W  
Memory unused remaining left, in bytes  
Time remaining until memory is used up, in seconds  
Value  
Recorder Trigger  
0
Operator start/stop  
1
Recorder Menu start/stop  
On Alarm (see Alarm 1-5 trigger below)  
Digital input A  
2
3
4
Digital input B  
5
During running of profiles  
Record Process Variable  
Value  
Record Process  
Variable  
7572  
7573  
0x1D94  
0x1D95  
0x1D96  
0x1D97  
0x1D98  
0x1D99  
0x1D9A  
0x1D9B  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
0
Do Not Record PV  
1
Record PV Value  
Value  
Record Max PV Since Last Sample  
Do Not Record Maximum PV  
Record Maximum PV Between Samples  
Record Min PV Since Last Sample  
Do Not Record Minimum PV  
Record Minimum PV Between Samples  
Record Actual Setpoint Value  
Do Not Record Setpoint  
Record Maximum  
PV Between  
Samples  
0
1
Value  
Record Minimum PV 7574  
Between Samples  
0
1
Value  
Record Actual  
Setpoint  
7575  
7576  
7577  
7578  
7579  
7580  
7581  
0
1
Record Actual Setpoint  
Value  
Record Primary Power Value  
Do Not Record Primary Power  
Record Primary Power  
Record Primary  
Power  
0
1
Value  
Record Secondary Power Value  
Do Not Record Secondary Power  
Record Secondary Power  
Record Change Of State For Alarm 1  
Do Not Record Alarm 1  
Record Secondary  
Power  
0
1
Value  
Record Alarm 1  
Status  
0
1
Record Alarm 1  
Value  
Record Change Of State For Alarm 2  
Do Not Record Alarm 2  
Record Alarm 2  
Status  
0
1
Record Alarm 2  
Value  
Record Change Of State For Alarm 3  
Do Not Record Alarm 3  
Record Alarm 3  
Status  
0x1D9C R/W  
0x1D9D R/W  
0
1
Record Alarm 3  
Value  
Record Change Of State For Alarm 4  
Do Not Record Alarm 4  
Record Alarm 4  
Status  
0
1
Record Alarm 4  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Modbus Parameters  
Page 107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Parameter Name  
Modbus Address  
Access Values  
(Dec)  
7582  
(Hex)  
Value  
Record Change Of State For Alarm 5  
Do Not Record Alarm 5  
Record Alarm 5  
Status  
0x1D9E  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
0
1
Record Alarm 5  
Value  
Record Power Turned On/Off  
Do Not Record Power On/Off  
Record Power On/Off  
Record Power  
7583  
7584  
7685  
7686  
7687  
7688  
0x1D9F  
0x1DA0  
0x1DA1  
0x1DA2  
0x1DA3  
0x1DA4  
0
1
Value  
Alarm 1 To Trigger Recording  
Off  
Trigger Recording  
On Alarm 1  
0
Trigger On Alarm 1 (if trigger is alarm)  
Alarm 2 To Trigger Recording  
1
Value  
Trigger Recording  
On Alarm 2  
0
Off  
Trigger On Alarm 2 (if trigger is alarm)  
Alarm 3 To Trigger Recording  
1
Value  
Trigger Recording  
On Alarm 3  
0
Off  
Trigger On Alarm 3 (if trigger is alarm)  
Alarm 4 To Trigger Recording  
Off  
1
Value  
Trigger Recording  
On Alarm 4  
0
Trigger On Alarm 4 (if trigger is alarm)  
Alarm 5 To Trigger Recording  
1
Value  
Trigger Recording  
On Alarm 5  
0
1
Off  
Trigger On Alarm 5 (if trigger is alarm)  
Sample Size  
7595  
7599  
0x1DA5  
0x1DAF  
RO  
Size in bytes, for current setup of recording sample  
Value  
Record Change Of State For Event 1  
Do Not Record Event 1  
Record Event 1  
R/W  
0
1
Record Event 1  
Value  
Record Change Of State For Event 2  
Do Not Record Event 2  
Record Event 2  
Record Event 3  
Record Event 4  
Record Event 5  
7600  
7601  
7602  
7603  
0x1DB0  
0x1DB1  
0x1DB2  
0x1DB3  
0x1DB5  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
RO  
0
1
Record Event 2  
Value  
Record Change Of State For Event 3  
Do Not Record Event 3  
0
1
Record Event 3  
Value  
Record Change Of State For Event 4  
Do Not Record Event 4  
0
1
Record Event 4  
Value  
Record Change Of State For Event 5  
Do Not Record Event 5  
0
1
Record Event 5  
Recorder Memory Used. 0 (Empty) to 100% (Full)  
Memory Used  
Date format  
7605  
7868  
Value  
Display Date Format  
0x1EBC R/W  
0
1
dd/mm/yyyy (European Default)  
mm/dd/yyyy (USA Default)  
Time  
Date  
7869  
7870  
0x1EBD R/W  
0x1EBE R/W  
Format is the number of seconds since midnight.  
Format 6 digits. Example 280308 for 28/03/2008  
Page 108  
Modbus Parameters  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Parameter Name  
Modbus Address  
Access Values  
(Dec)  
7871  
(Hex)  
Value  
Real Time Clock Fitted  
Not Fitted  
Real Time Clock  
Fitted  
0x1EBF  
RO  
0
1
Fitted  
Value  
Day Of Week  
Day Of The Week  
7872  
0x1EC0  
R/W  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Monday  
Tuesday  
Wednesday  
Thursday  
Friday  
Saturday  
Sunday  
Display Parameters  
Parameter Name  
Modbus Address  
Access Values  
(Dec)  
7660  
(Hex)  
LED 1 Label  
LED 2 Label  
LED 3 Label  
LED 4 Label  
0x1DEC R/W  
0x1DED R/W  
0x1DEE R/W  
5 ASCII characters, which can re read or written using  
Modbus functions 16 or 23. Valid characters are 0 to  
9, a to z, A to Z, plus ( ) - and _.  
Defaults: 1 = PRI (Primary); 2 = SEC (Secondary);  
3 = TUNE (Tuning); 4 = ALARM (Alarm)  
7661  
7662  
7663  
0x1DEF  
0x1DF0  
R/W  
R/W  
Value  
0
LED 1 Usage  
Primary Control  
Secondary Control  
Tuning  
LED 1 Usage  
7664  
1
2
3
Any Alarm  
Alarm 1  
4
5
Alarm 2  
6
Alarm 3  
7
Alarm 4  
8
Alarm 5  
9
Event 1  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
Value  
0
Event 2  
Event 3  
Event 4  
Event 5  
Any Event  
Manual Control  
Profile Running  
Profile Ended  
LED 2 Usage  
Primary Control  
Secondary Control  
Tuning  
LED 2 Usage  
7665  
0x1DF1  
R/W  
1
2
3
Any Alarm  
Alarm 1  
4
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Modbus Parameters  
Page 109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Parameter Name  
Modbus Address  
Access Values  
(Dec)  
(Hex)  
5
Alarm 2  
6
Alarm 3  
7
Alarm 4  
8
Alarm 5  
9
Event 1  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
Value  
0
Event 2  
Event 3  
Event 4  
Event 5  
Any Event  
Manual Control  
Profile Running  
Profile Ended  
LED 3 Usage  
Primary Control  
Secondary Control  
Tuning  
LED 3 Usage  
7666  
0x1DF2  
R/W  
1
2
3
Any Alarm  
Alarm 1  
4
5
Alarm 2  
6
Alarm 3  
7
Alarm 4  
8
Alarm 5  
9
Event 1  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
Value  
0
Event 2  
Event 3  
Event 4  
Event 5  
Any Event  
Manual Control  
Profile Running  
Profile Ended  
LED 4 Usage  
Primary Control  
Secondary Control  
Tuning  
LED 4 Usage  
7667  
0x1DF3  
R/W  
1
2
3
Any Alarm  
Alarm 1  
4
5
Alarm 2  
6
Alarm 3  
7
Alarm 4  
8
Alarm 5  
9
Event 1  
10  
11  
Event 2  
Event 3  
Page 110  
Modbus Parameters  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Parameter Name  
Modbus Address  
Access Values  
(Dec)  
(Hex)  
12  
Event 4  
13  
Event 5  
14  
Any Event  
15  
Manual Control  
Profile Running  
Profile Ended  
16  
17  
Value  
Backlight Colour  
Green to Red on Alarm  
Red to Green on Alarm  
Permanent Green  
Permanent Red  
Language  
Backlight Colour  
Display Language  
7668  
0x1DF4  
R/W  
0
1
2
3
Value  
7675  
0x1DFB R/W  
0x1DFC R/W  
0
Main Display Language  
Alternate Display Language  
1
Display Contrast  
Invert Display  
7676  
7677  
0 to 127  
Value  
Invert Display  
Normal Display  
Inverted Display  
0x1DFD  
R/W  
0
1
Setup Lock Code  
7678  
7679  
0x1DFE  
0x1DFF  
R/W  
R/W  
1 to 9999. Default is 10  
1 to 9999. Default is 10  
Configuration Lock  
Code  
Tuning Lock Code  
7680  
7681  
0x1E00  
0x1E01  
R/W  
R/W  
1 to 9999. Default is 10  
1 to 9999. Default is 10  
Supervisor Lock  
Code  
Profiler Lock Code  
USB Lock Code  
7682  
7683  
0x1E02  
0x1E03  
0x1E04  
0x1E05  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
1 to 9999. Default is 10  
1 to 9999. Default is 10  
1 to 9999. Default is 10  
Recorder Lock Code 7684  
Value  
Read Only Operation Mode  
Read Only  
7685  
Operation Mode  
0
Operation Mode Read/Write  
Operation Mode Read Only  
Bar Graph Format  
Power Output  
1
Value  
Bar Graph Format  
7686  
0x1E06  
0x2328  
R/W  
R/W  
0
1
Control Deviation  
% Memory Remaining  
Trend Sample Interval  
Every Second  
2
Value  
Trend View Sample  
Interval  
9000  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Every 2 Seconds  
Every 5 Seconds  
Every 10 Seconds  
Every 15 Seconds  
Every 30 Seconds  
Every Minute  
Every 2 Minutes  
Every 5 Minutes  
Every 10 Minutes  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Modbus Parameters  
Page 111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Parameter Name  
Modbus Address  
Access Values  
(Dec)  
(Hex)  
10  
Every 15 Minutes  
11  
Every 30 Minutes  
Value  
Trend View Data  
Values To Display In 9001  
Trend View  
0x2329  
R/W  
0
1
2
3
None (trend view off)  
Process variable only  
Process variable and setpoint  
Process variable maximum & minimum  
since last sample  
Profiler Control & Status Parameters  
Parameter Name  
Modbus Address  
Access  
Values  
(Dec)  
8192  
(Hex)  
Value  
Profile Run/Hold Signal Source  
Operator Key Press Only  
Digital input A  
Profile Run/Hold  
Signal  
0x2000  
R/W  
0
1
2
Digital input B  
Value  
Profile Abort Signal Source  
Operator Key Press Only  
Digital input A  
Profile Abort Signal  
8193  
0x2001  
R/W  
0
1
2
Digital input B  
Active Profiler  
Number  
Active Segment  
Number  
8243  
8244  
0x2033  
0x2034  
R/W  
RO  
Currently selected profile number (1 to 64)  
Currently active segment (1 to 255)  
Value  
Profiler Command  
Profiler Control  
Commands  
8245  
0x2035  
R/W  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
Do nothing  
Run the currently selected profile  
Hold the currently running profile  
Abort the currently running profile  
Jump to the next segment  
Release the hold  
Exit profiler, return to controller mode  
Note: The Profiler Control Commands must be followed by a Profiler Control Confirmation Action command.  
Value  
Implement Profiler Command  
Profiler Control  
Confirmation Action  
8257  
8262  
8260  
8247  
0x2041  
0x2046  
0x2044  
0x2037  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
RO  
0
Do Not Implement Command  
1
Implement previous Profiler Command  
Editing Current Running Profile  
Editing current running profile forbidden  
Editing current running profile allowed  
Profile Control From Operation Mode  
Operation Mode profile control disabled  
Operation Mode profile control enabled  
Value  
Enable Edit While  
Running  
0
1
Value  
Profile Control In  
Operation Mode  
0
1
Profile Cycles Run  
The Number of times the currently running profile has  
cycled  
Page 112  
Modbus Parameters  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Parameter Name  
Modbus Address  
Access  
Values  
(Dec)  
8249  
(Hex)  
Value  
Status Of Event 1  
Event 1 Inactive  
Event 1 Active  
Status Of Event 2  
Event 2 Inactive  
Event 2 Active  
Status Of Event 3  
Event 3 Inactive  
Event 3 Active  
Status Of Event 4  
Event 4 Inactive  
Event 4 Active  
Status Of Event 5  
Event 5 Inactive  
Event 5 Active  
Segment Type Status  
No segment  
Event 1 Status  
0x2039  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
0
1
Value  
Event 2 Status  
Event 3 Status  
Event 4 Status  
Event 5 Status  
8250  
8251  
8252  
8253  
8258  
0x203A  
0x203B  
0x203C  
0x203D  
0x2042  
0
1
Value  
0
1
Value  
0
1
Value  
0
1
Value  
Segment Type  
Status  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Setpoint ramping up  
Step  
Dwell  
Held  
Loop  
Join  
End  
Setpoint ramping down  
Currently Active  
Profile Name  
8259  
8232  
0x2043  
0x2028  
RO  
RO  
The name of the currently selected profile  
Value  
Secondary Profile  
Status  
0
1
2
3
4
Profile running  
Input sensor break  
Profile not valid  
Controller in manual mode  
Profile finished. Profiler is maintaining the  
last profile setpoint  
5
6
Profile finished with control outputs off  
Profile control has ended. Unit is  
Controller Mode.  
Delay time  
8233  
8235  
0x2029  
0x202B  
RO  
RO  
The current start delay time remaining  
The elapsed time of the current running profile  
Current Profile  
Running Time  
Current Profile  
Remaining Time  
Current Segment  
Running Time  
8236  
8237  
0x202C  
0x202D  
RO  
RO  
The remaining time for the current running profile  
The elapsed time of the current profile segment  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Modbus Parameters  
Page 113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Parameter Name  
Modbus Address  
Access  
Values  
(Dec)  
8238  
(Hex)  
Current Segment  
Remaining Time  
Total Hold Time  
Current Segment  
Loops Run  
0x202E  
RO  
The remaining time for the current profile segment  
8239  
8240  
0x202F  
0x2030  
RO  
RO  
Total time the current profile has been held  
The number of times the current looping segment has  
looped back  
Refer to the Profile Setup Over Modbus  
information below  
Profile Setup  
8198  
0x2006  
R/W  
Profile Setup Via Modbus  
The information in this section is intended for advanced users writing their own software  
code. Most users will create or edit profiles using the instrument keypad, or using the the PC  
software (available from your supplier). Either method allows quick and easy editing of  
profiles.  
Advanced users can setup or edit profiles by writing to the Profile Configuration parameter at  
address 8198 (0x2006). This can only be accessed by using Modbus function code 23  
(0x17). The instrument replies with a status message.  
When creating a new profile the steps below must be followed exactly, either to create a  
profile at the next available position, or at a position that you specify.  
Each message in the sequence includes a 2 byte Command Code that tells the instrument  
the purpose of the message, and therefore the meaning of the data contained in it.  
Instruction Sequence to create a profile at the next available position  
1. Create a profile by writing the profile header data using the Command Code value CP  
(0x43, 0x50). This starts the profile creation process by reserving a profile memory slot.  
The profile number is returned by the instrument in the Edit Response Message.  
2. Write the first segment using the Command Code value Code WS (0x57, 0x53). This  
command will fill the next available segment position and link it to the profile created in  
step 1.  
3. Write the second segment, again using Command Code WS. This fills the next available  
segment position and links it to the segment created in step 2.  
4. Continue writing segments until the profile is complete (whilst remaining within the overall  
limit of 255 segments for all profiles combined). Each of these segments fills the next  
available position and links it to the previous segment specified.  
5. The very last segment of the profile must be one of the end type segments. Thereafter, no  
more segments can be added to the specified profile. To add a segment to an existing  
profile the insert segment command must be used.  
Page 114  
Modbus Parameters  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Instruction Sequence to create a profile at a specified profile position  
CAUTION:  
If this profile number is already in use then the profile header data is overwritten but  
the segments associated with it are kept.  
1. Determine which profile positions are being used by using the Command Code value PS  
(0x50, 0x53). This command will return a list of all the profile positions currently being  
used.  
2. Choose a location that is not being used and write the profile header data using the  
Command Code value WP (0x57, 0x50).  
The profile number is echoed back by the instrument in the Edit Response Message.  
3. Write the first segment using the Command Code value Code WS (0x57, 0x53). This  
command will fill the next available segment position and link it to the profile created in  
step 1.  
4. Write the second segment, again using Command Code WS. This fills the next available  
segment position and links it to the segment created in step 2.  
5. Continue writing segments until the profile is complete (whilst remaining within the overall  
limit of 255 segments for all profiles combined). Each of these segments fills the next  
available position and links it to the previous segment specified.  
6. The very last segment of the profile must be one of the end type segments. Thereafter, no  
more segments can be added to the specified profile. To add a segment to an existing  
profile the insert segment command must be used.  
Instruction Sequence to edit an existing Profile Header  
When a profile header is changed, the segments associated with it remain unchanged. They  
must be edited separately if required.  
1. Determine the number of the profile to be edited. Use the Command Code value PS  
(0x50, 0x53) which returns a list of all profile positions/numbers currently in use.  
2. Write a new profile header data using the Command Code value EP (0x45, 0x50).  
The profile number is echoed back by the instrument in the Edit Response Message.  
Instruction Sequence to read a profile  
1. Use the command RP to read the profile header data  
2. Use the command RS to read the 1st segment’s data  
3. Use the command RS to read the 2nd segment’s data.  
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 until an end segment is reached.  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Modbus Parameters  
Page 115  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
The following rules apply when creating a profile over communications:  
Profiles must always be terminated with an end segment.  
Segments cannot be added after an end segment has been added.  
All changes made to the selected profile are immediately saved in the instrument.  
Creating Or Editing A Profile Header  
Creating Or Editing A Profile Header - Request (to instrument)  
Field Name  
Data  
(Hex)  
A/R  
Comments  
(Dec)  
A/R  
23  
Unit Address  
The ID address of the instrument.  
Function Code  
17  
20  
Requires the multi read/write function.  
Read Start Address High Byte  
Read Start Address Low Byte  
Read Quantity Of Registers High Byte  
Read Quantity Of Registers Low Byte  
Write Start Address High Byte  
Write Start Address Low Byte  
Write Quantity Of Registers High Byte  
Write Quantity Of Registers Low Byte  
Byte Count  
32  
06  
06  
00  
00  
01  
01  
32  
20  
06  
06  
00  
00  
19  
13  
38 or 40  
26 or 28  
38dec / 0x26hex if creating a profile at the  
next available location.  
40dec / 0x28hex if creating a profile at a  
specified location, or editing a profile.  
Command Code High Byte  
67, 69 or  
87  
43, 45 or  
57  
Create Profile (CP) = 67dec / 0x43hex  
Edit Profile (EP) = 69dec / 0x45hex  
Write Profile (WP) = 87dec / 0x57hex  
Command Code Low Byte  
Profile Number High Byte  
Profile Number Low Byte  
80  
50  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
Note: The profile number is not included  
in the message when creating a profile  
at the next available position.  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
00  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
00  
Profile Name Character 1  
Profile Name Character 2  
Profile Name Character 3  
Profile Name Character 4  
Profile Name Character 5  
Profile Name Character 6  
Profile Name Character 7  
Profile Name Character 8  
Profile Name Character 9  
Profile Name Character 10  
Profile Name Character 11  
Profile Name Character 12  
Profile Name Character 13  
Profile Name Character 14  
Profile Name Character 15  
Profile Name Character 16  
Profile Start Signal High Byte  
The ASCII codes equivalent to each of the  
16 characters of the profile name, e.g. :  
A = 65dec / 0x41, B = 66dec / 0x42 etc  
a = 97dec / 0x61, b = 98dec / 0x62 etc  
Note: Only valid characters from the  
instruments supported character set  
should be used  
The space character (32dec / 0x20hex) is  
used to fill any unused characters at the  
end of the name.  
0 = No delay, 1 = After delay, 2 = At  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Page 116  
Modbus Parameters  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Creating Or Editing A Profile Header - Request (to instrument)  
Field Name  
Data  
(Hex)  
A/R  
Comments  
(Dec)  
A/R  
Profile Start Signal Low Byte  
Profile Start Time (Byte 4 - High)  
Profile Start Time (Byte 3)  
Profile Start Time (Byte 2)  
Profile Start Time (Byte 1 - Low)  
Profile Start Day High Byte  
Profile Start Day Low Byte  
Time/day  
Floating point number  
00  
00  
1 = Monday, 2 = Tuesday, 3 = Wednesday,  
4 = Thursday, 5 = Friday, 6 = Saturday,  
7 = Sunday, 8 = Monday to Friday,  
9 = Monday to Saturday,  
A/R  
A/R  
10 = Saturday And Sunday, 11= All Week  
00  
A/R  
00  
Profile Starting Setpoint High  
Profile Starting Setpoint Low  
Profile Recovery High Byte  
Profile Recovery Low Byte  
00  
A/R  
00  
0 = Current Setpoint, 1 = Current Process  
Variable Value  
0 = Control to off, 1 = Restart profile,  
2 = Maintain last profile setpoint  
3 = Use controller setpoint, 4 = Continue  
profile from where it was when power failed  
A/R  
A/R  
Profile Recovery Time (Byte 4 - high)  
Profile Recovery Time (Byte 3)  
Profile Recovery Time (Byte 2)  
Profile Recovery Time (Byte 1 - Low)  
Profile Abort action High Byte  
Profile Abort Action Low Byte  
Floating point number  
00  
00  
0 = Control to off  
1 = Maintain last profile setpoint  
2 = Use controller setpoint  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
Profile Cycles High Byte  
Profile Cycles Low Byte  
CRC High Byte  
1 to 9999 or 10,000 for “Infinite”  
CRC Low Byte  
The instrument replies to this message with an Edit Response Message.  
Creating, Editing or Inserting Segments  
Creating new segments is only possible when a new profile is being created (see above for  
instruction for creating a profile at the next available position, or at a position that you  
specify). An error is returned if the correct sequence is not followed.  
The Insert Segment command is used to add segments to an existing profile (one that  
already has an end segment). This inserts a new segment at the position specified.  
The Edit Segment command is used to alter segments of an existing profile.  
The segment number is in relation to the profile number, e.g. to edit or insert a segment at  
position 3 of profile 1 the segment number will be 3, and to edit or insert a segment at  
position 3 of profile 6 the segment number will also be 3.  
Creating, Editing or Inserting Segments - Request (to instrument)  
Field Name  
Data  
(Hex)  
A/R  
Comments  
(Dec)  
A/R  
23  
Unit Address  
The ID address of the instrument.  
Function Code  
17  
20  
06  
Requires the multi read/write function.  
Read Start Address High Byte  
Read Start Address Low Byte  
32  
06  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Modbus Parameters  
Page 117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Creating, Editing or Inserting Segments - Request (to instrument)  
Data Comments  
(Hex)  
00  
Field Name  
(Dec)  
00  
Read Quantity Of Registers High  
Read Quantity Of Registers Low  
Write Start Address High  
01  
01  
20  
06  
00  
32  
Write Start Address Low  
06  
Write Quantity Of Registers High  
Write Quantity Of Registers Low  
00  
11 or 12  
0B or 0C Create Segment (WS) = 11dec / 0x0Bhex  
Insert Segment (IS) = 12dec / 0x0Chex  
Edit A Segment (ES) = 12dec / 0x0Chex  
Byte Count  
22 or 24  
16 or 18  
57 or 49  
Create Segment (WS) = 22dec / 0x16hex  
Insert Segment (IS) = 24dec / 0x18hex  
Edit A Segment (ES) = 24dec / 0x18hex  
Command Code High Byte  
87, 73 or  
69  
Create Segment (WS) = 87dec / 0x57hex  
Insert Segment (IS) = 73dec / 0x49hex  
Edit A Segment (ES) = 69dec / 0x45hex  
Command Code Low Byte  
Profile Number High Byte  
Profile Number Low Byte  
Segment Position High Byte  
Segment Position Low Byte  
83  
53  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
Note: The Segment Position is not  
included in the message when creating  
a segment at the next available position.  
Segment Type High Byte  
Segment Type Low Byte  
00  
00  
0 = Ramp Time, 1 = Ramp Rate,  
2 = Step, 3 = Dwell, 4 = Hold, 5 = Loop  
6 = Join, 7 = End, 8 = Repeat sequence  
then end  
A/R  
A/R  
The meaning of the data contained in  
Segment Info A depends on the type of  
segment it relates to. See below.  
Segment Info A (Byte 4 - High)  
Segment Info A (Byte 3)  
Floating point number  
Floating point number  
Segment Info A (Byte 2)  
Segment Info A (Byte 1 - Low)  
Segment Info B (Byte 4 - High)  
Segment Info B (Byte 3)  
The meaning of the data contained in  
Segment Info B depends on the type of  
segment it relates to. See below.  
Segment Info B (Byte 2)  
Segment Info B (Byte 1 - Low)  
Auto Hold Type High Byte  
Auto Hold Type Low Byte  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
0 = Auto-Hold Off, 1 = Hold above SP,  
2 = Hold below SP,3 - Hold above and  
below SP  
Auto Hold Value (Byte 4 - High)  
Auto Hold Value (Byte 3)  
Auto Hold Value (Byte 2)  
Auto Hold Value (Byte 1 - Low)  
Events High Byte  
Floating point number  
00  
00  
The status of the five events are defined by  
the lowest 5 bits of the low byte. A bit value  
of 1 signifies the event is on.  
A/R  
A/R  
Events Low Byte  
Bit 0 = event 1, bit 1 = event 2, bit 3 =  
event 4 and bit 5 = event 4.  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
CRC High Byte  
CRC Low Byte  
Page 118  
Modbus Parameters  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Segment Data  
The Segment Data is included in the command message when creating, editing or inserting  
segments (see above). It is provided in two parts (Segment Info A and B).  
The meaning of the data contained in Segment Info A and B depends on the type of segment  
it relates to. Null is shown for unused data, these data values should be set to zero when  
writing the segment data.  
Segment  
Type  
Segment Info  
Description  
A
B
Ramp Time  
Ramp Rate  
Step  
Dwell  
Hold  
Time  
Ramp rate  
Null  
Dwell time  
0 = Operator  
1 = Time of day  
Target setpoint  
Target setpoint  
Target setpoint  
Null  
Null  
Start Time  
Ramp to the target setpoint “B” in the time “A”  
Ramp to the target setpoint “B” at the ramp rate “A”  
Step to a target setpoint “B”  
Stay at the current setpoint for a period of time “A”  
Wait for the operator to release the hold  
Wait until time of the day “B” in seconds since  
midnight. (recorder only).  
Null  
Null  
2 = Aux A digital  
input  
3 = Aux B digital  
input  
Wait for digital input A signal  
Wait for digital input B signal  
Loop  
Number of times to Segment number  
repeat 1 to 9999  
Loop to the specified segment number “B” from this  
point. Repeat this “A” times. Only segments below  
the current segment can be entered. Two loops  
must not cross each other.  
Null  
Join  
End  
Profile number  
Null  
Null  
On completion of this profile jump run profile “B”  
Turn off all control outputs.  
Stay at the final setpoint of the profile  
0 = Control off  
1 = Maintain profile  
setpoint  
Null  
2 = Use controller  
setpoint  
Use the active controller setpoint.  
Repeat  
0 = Outputs off  
Number of times to Repeat the profile sequence number “B” times,  
Sequence  
Then End  
repeat sequence  
then turn off the control outputs  
Repeat the profile sequence number “B” times,  
then hold the last profile setpoint.  
1 = Maintain profile  
setpoint  
2 = Use controller  
setpoint  
Repeat the profile sequence number “B” times,  
then use the active controller setpoint.  
The instrument replies to this message with an Edit Response Message.  
Deleting Profiles  
An individual profile can be deleted, or all profiles can be cleared with a single message.  
Deleting a profile removes the header of the specified profile and any segments associated  
with it. Delete all profiles wipes all profiles and segments from the instrument.  
Delete Profiles - Request (to instrument)  
Field Name  
Data  
(Hex)  
A/R  
Comments  
(Dec)  
A/R  
23  
Unit Address  
The ID address of the instrument.  
Function Code  
17  
20  
06  
00  
01  
Requires the multi read/write function  
Read Start Address High Byte  
Read Start Address Low Byte  
Read Quantity Of Registers High  
Read Quantity Of Registers Low  
32  
06  
00  
01  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Modbus Parameters  
Page 119  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Delete Profiles - Request (to instrument)  
Field Name  
Data  
(Hex)  
20  
Comments  
(Dec)  
32  
Write Start Address High  
Write Start Address Low  
06  
06  
00  
Write Quantity Of Registers High  
Write Quantity Of Registers Low  
00  
02 or 01  
02 or 01  
Delete A Profile (DP) = 02dec / 0x02hex  
Delete All Profiles (DA) = 01dec / 0x01hex  
Byte Count  
04 or 02  
04 or 02  
Delete A Profile (DP) = 04dec / 0x04hex  
Delete All Profiles (DA) = 02dec / 0x02hex  
Command Code High Byte  
Command Code Low Byte  
68  
44  
80 or 65  
50 or 41  
Delete A Profile (DP) = 80dec / 0x50hex  
Delete All Profiles (DA) = 65dec / 0x41hex  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
Note: The profile number is not included  
in the message when deleting all  
profiles.  
Profile Number High Byte  
Profile Number Low Byte  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
CRC High Byte  
CRC Low Byte  
The instrument replies to this message with an Edit Response Message.  
Delete A Segment  
The delete segment command deletes the specified segment from the specified profile. The  
following segments are moved up one place in the profile (e.g. if segment 6 is deleted  
segment 7 now becomes segment 6).  
Delete A Segment - Request (to instrument)  
Field Name  
Data  
(Hex)  
A/R  
Comments  
(Dec)  
A/R  
23  
Unit Address  
The ID address of the instrument  
Function Code  
17  
20  
Requires the multi read/write function  
Read Start Address High Byte  
Read Start Address Low Byte  
Read Quantity Of Registers High  
Read Quantity Of Registers Low  
Write Start Address High  
Write Start Address Low  
Write Quantity Of Registers High  
Write Quantity Of Registers Low  
Byte Count  
32  
06  
06  
00  
00  
01  
01  
32  
20  
06  
06  
00  
00  
03  
03  
06  
06  
Command Code High Byte  
Command Code Low Byte  
Profile Number High Byte  
Profile Number Low Byte  
Segment Number High Byte  
Segment Number Low Byte  
CRC High Byte  
68  
44  
83  
53  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
CRC Low Byte  
The instrument replies to this message with an Edit Response Message.  
Page 120  
Modbus Parameters  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Get Segments Remaining  
Returns the number of unused segments remaining in the instrument. The number will be  
between 0 and 255, depending on how many have been used in the profiles so far created.  
Get Segments Remaining - Request (to instrument)  
Field Name  
Data  
(Hex)  
A/R  
Comments  
(Dec)  
A/R  
Unit Address  
The ID address of the instrument as  
required  
Function Code  
23  
32  
06  
00  
01  
32  
06  
00  
01  
02  
83  
82  
A/R  
A/R  
17  
20  
06  
00  
01  
20  
06  
00  
01  
02  
53  
52  
A/R  
A/R  
Requires the multi read/write function  
Read Start Address High Byte  
Read Start Address Low Byte  
Read Quantity Of Registers High  
Read Quantity Of Registers Low  
Write Start Address High  
Write Start Address Low  
Write Quantity Of Registers High  
Write Quantity Of Registers Low  
Byte Count  
Command Code High Byte  
Command Code Low Byte  
CRC High Byte  
CRC Low Byte  
The instrument replies to this message with an Edit Response Message.  
Edit Response Message From Instrument  
The instrument replies to each profile or segment creation, edit or delete message with an  
Edit Response Message. The same format is used when replying to the Get Segments  
Remaining request.  
Edit Response Message - Response (from instrument)  
Field Name  
Data  
Comments  
(Dec)  
A/R  
23  
(Hex)  
A/R  
17  
Unit Address  
The ID address of the instrument  
The multi read/write function  
Function Code  
Byte Count  
02  
02  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
Two data bytes containing the  
Command Response data (see below)  
Command Response High Byte  
Command Response Low Byte  
CRC High Byte  
CRC Low Byte  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Modbus Parameters  
Page 121  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Command Response Data  
The data contained in the Edit Response Message returned after each profile or segment  
edit message is shown below. The data seen can be an error code, the number of unused  
segments or the profile number following a successful profile header creation/edit.  
The error code shown will be as appropriate for the request message and instrument status.  
Command Response Name  
Two Byte Response  
Description  
Low Byte High Byte  
Profile Number  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
The number of the profile created or edited  
The number of unused segments remaining  
The command requested executed without error  
The command is not recognized  
The profile number specified is not available.  
The profile name/characters are not valid  
The start signal is not recognized  
The specified time is not within range  
The specified day is not recognized  
The specified starting setpoint is not recognized  
The profile recovery is not recognized  
The recovery time is not within limits  
The abort action is not recognized  
The number of profile cycles is not within limits  
The segment number is not valid for this profile  
The segment type is not recognized  
The segment information A not valid for segment  
type defined  
Segments Remaining  
Command Successfully  
Command Not Recognized  
Profile Number Invalid  
Profile Name Invalid  
Start Signal Invalid  
0x4F  
0xFF  
0xF0  
0xF0  
0xF0  
0xF0  
0xF0  
0xF0  
0xF0  
0xF0  
0xF0  
0xF0  
0xF0  
0xF0  
0xF0  
0x4B  
0xFF  
0x00  
0x01  
0x02  
0x03  
0x04  
0x05  
0x06  
0x07  
0x08  
0x09  
0x0A  
0x0B  
0x0C  
Start Time Invalid  
Start Day Invalid  
Starting Setpoint Invalid  
Profile Recovery Invalid  
Recovery Time Invalid  
Abort Action Invalid  
Profile Cycles Invalid  
Segment Number Invalid  
Segment Type Invalid  
Segment Info A Invalid  
Segment Info B Invalid  
0xF0  
0x0D  
The segment information B is not valid for the  
segment type defined  
Auto Hold Type Invalid  
Auto Hold Value Invalid  
Events Value Invalid  
No Segments Remaining  
Write Length Invalid  
0xF0  
0xF0  
0xF0  
0xF0  
0xF0  
0x0E  
0x0F  
0x10  
0x11  
0x12  
The auto hold type is not recognized  
The auto hold value is not within input span  
The events are not within range  
There are no more segments available  
The number of parameters to be written are invalid  
for the function requested  
Segment Setpoint Clamped  
0xF0  
0x13  
The setpoint value entered was out of bounds. It  
has been clamped within the units setpoint limits.  
Read A Profile Header  
Read A Profile Header - Request (to instrument)  
Field Name  
Data  
(Hex)  
A/R  
Comments  
(Dec)  
A/R  
23  
Unit Address  
The ID address of the instrument  
Function Code  
17  
20  
06  
00  
12  
20  
06  
Requires the multi read/write function  
Read Start Address High Byte  
Read Start Address Low Byte  
Read Quantity Of Registers High Byte  
Read Quantity Of Registers Low Byte  
Write Start Address High Byte  
Write Start Address Low Byte  
32  
06  
00  
18  
32  
06  
Page 122  
Modbus Parameters  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Read A Profile Header - Request (to instrument)  
Data Comments  
(Hex)  
00  
Field Name  
(Dec)  
00  
Write Quantity Of Registers High Byte  
Write Quantity Of Registers Low Byte  
Byte Count  
02  
02  
04  
04  
Command Code High Byte  
Command Code Low Byte  
Profile Number High Byte  
Profile Number Low Byte  
CRC High Byte  
82  
52  
80  
50  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
CRC Low Byte  
The instrument replies to the Read A Profile Header request as follows:  
Read Profile Header - Response (from instrument)  
Field Name  
Data  
(Hex)  
A/R  
Comments  
(Dec)  
A/R  
23  
Unit Address  
The ID address of the instrument  
The multi read/write function  
Function Code  
17  
Byte Count  
36  
24  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
00  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
00  
Profile Name Character 1  
Profile Name Character 2  
Profile Name Character 3  
Profile Name Character 4  
Profile Name Character 5  
Profile Name Character 6  
Profile Name Character 7  
Profile Name Character 8  
Profile Name Character 9  
Profile Name Character 10  
Profile Name Character 11  
Profile Name Character 12  
Profile Name Character 13  
Profile Name Character 14  
Profile Name Character 15  
Profile Name Character 16  
Profile Start Signal High Byte  
Profile Start Signal Low Byte  
Profile Start Time (Byte 4 - High)  
Profile Start Time (Byte 3)  
Profile Start Time (Byte 2)  
Profile Start Time (Byte 1 - Low)  
Profile Start Day High Byte  
Profile Start Day Low Byte  
The ASCII codes equivalent to each of the  
16 characters of the profile name, e.g. :  
A = 65dec / 0x41, B = 66dec / 0x42 etc  
a = 97dec / 0x61, b = 98dec / 0x62  
The space character (32dec / 0x20hex) is  
used to fill any unused characters at the  
end of the name.  
0 = No delay, 1 = After delay, 2 = At  
Time/day  
A/R  
A/R  
Floating point number  
00  
00  
1 = Monday, 2 = Tuesday, 3 = Wednesday,  
4 = Thursday, 5 = Friday, 6 = Saturday,  
7 = Sunday, 8 = Monday to Friday,  
9 = Monday to Saturday, 10 = Saturday  
And Sunday, 11= All Week  
A/R  
A/R  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Modbus Parameters  
Page 123  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Read Profile Header - Response (from instrument)  
Field Name  
Data  
(Hex)  
00  
Comments  
(Dec)  
00  
Profile Starting Setpoint High  
Profile Starting Setpoint Low  
Profile Recovery High Byte  
Profile Recovery Low Byte  
0 = Current Setpoint, 1 = Current Process  
Variable Value  
A/R  
00  
A/R  
00  
0 = Control to off, 1 = Restart profile,  
2 = Maintain last profile setpoint  
3 = Use controller setpoint, 4 = Continue  
profile from where it was when power failed  
A/R  
A/R  
Profile Recovery Time (Byte 4 - high)  
Profile Recovery Time (Byte 3)  
Profile Recovery Time (Byte 2)  
Profile Recovery Time (Byte 1 - Low)  
Profile Abort action High Byte  
Profile Abort Action Low Byte  
Floating point number  
00  
00  
0 = Control to off  
1 = Maintain last profile setpoint  
2 = Use controller setpoint  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
Profile Cycles High Byte  
Profile Cycles Low Byte  
CRC High Byte  
1 to 9999 or 10,000 for “Infinite”  
CRC Low Byte  
Read A Segment  
Read A Segment - Request (to instrument)  
Field Name  
Data  
(Hex)  
A/R  
Comments  
(Dec)  
A/R  
23  
Unit Address  
The ID address of the instrument  
Function Code  
17  
20  
Requires the multi read/write function  
Read Start Address High Byte  
Read Start Address Low Byte  
Read Quantity Of Registers High Byte  
Read Quantity Of Registers Low Byte  
Write Start Address High Byte  
Write Start Address Low Byte  
Write Quantity Of Registers High Byte  
Write Quantity Of Registers Low Byte  
Byte Count  
32  
06  
06  
00  
00  
11  
0B  
16  
22  
06  
06  
00  
00  
03  
03  
06  
06  
Command Code High Byte  
Command Code Low Byte  
Profile Number High Byte  
Profile Number Low Byte  
Segment Number High Byte  
Segment Number Low Byte  
CRC High Byte  
82  
52  
83  
53  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
CRC Low Byte  
The instrument replies to the Read A Segment request as follows:  
Page 124  
Modbus Parameters  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Read A Segment - Response (from instrument)  
Field Name  
Data  
Comments  
(Dec)  
A/R  
23  
(Hex)  
A/R  
17  
Unit Address  
The ID address of the instrument  
The multi read/write function  
Function Code  
Byte Count  
02  
18  
Command Response High Byte  
Command Response Low Byte  
Profile Number High Byte  
Profile Number Low Byte  
Segment Number High Byte  
Segment Number Low Byte  
Segment Type High Byte  
Segment Type Low Byte  
82  
52  
83  
53  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
00  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
00  
0 = Ramp Time, 1 = Ramp Rate,  
2 = Step, 3 = Dwell, 4 = Hold, 5 = Loop  
6 = Join, 7 = End, 8 = Repeat sequence  
then end  
A/R  
A/R  
The meaning of the data contained in  
Segment Info A depends on the type of  
segment it relates to. See below.  
Segment Info A (Byte 4 - High)  
Segment Info A (Byte 3)  
Floating point number  
Floating point number  
Segment Info A (Byte 2)  
Segment Info A (Byte 1 - Low)  
Segment Info B (Byte 4 - High)  
Segment Info B (Byte 3)  
The meaning of the data contained in  
Segment Info B depends on the type of  
segment it relates to. See below.  
Segment Info B (Byte 2)  
Segment Info B (Byte 1 - Low)  
Auto Hold Type High Byte  
Auto Hold Type Low Byte  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
0 = Auto-Hold Off, 1 = Hold above SP,  
2 = Hold below SP,3 - Hold above and  
below SP  
Auto Hold Value (Byte 4 - High)  
Auto Hold Value (Byte 3)  
Auto Hold Value (Byte 2)  
Auto Hold Value (Byte 1 - Low)  
Events High Byte  
Floating point number  
00  
00  
The status of the five events are defined by  
the lowest 5 bits of the low byte. A bit value  
of 1 signifies the event is on.  
A/R  
A/R  
Events Low Byte  
Bit 0 = event 1, bit 1 = event 2, bit 3 =  
event 4 and bit 5 = event 4.  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
CRC High Byte  
CRC Low Byte  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Modbus Parameters  
Page 125  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Segment Data  
The Segment Data is included in the response to a Read Segment request. It is provided in  
two parts (Segment Info A and B).  
The meaning of the data contained in Segment Info A and B depends on the type of segment  
it relates to. Null is shown for unused data, this can be any value.  
Segment  
Type  
Segment Info  
Description  
A
B
Ramp Time  
Ramp Rate  
Step  
Dwell  
Hold  
Time  
Ramp rate  
Null  
Dwell time  
0 = Operator  
1 = Time of day  
Target setpoint  
Target setpoint  
Target setpoint  
Null  
Null  
Start Time  
Ramp to the target setpoint “B” in the time “A”  
Ramp to the target setpoint “B” at the ramp rate “A”  
Step to a target setpoint “B”  
Stay at the current setpoint for a period of time “A”  
Wait for the operator to release the hold  
Wait until time of the day “B” in seconds since  
midnight. (recorder only).  
Null  
Null  
2 = Aux A digital  
input  
3 = Aux B digital  
input  
Wait for digital input A signal  
Wait for digital input B signal  
Loop  
Number of times to Segment number  
repeat 1 to 9999  
Loop to the specified segment number “B” from this  
point. Repeat this “A” times. Only segments below  
the current segment can be entered. Two loops  
must not cross each other.  
Null  
0 = Control off  
1 = Maintain profile  
setpoint  
Join  
End  
Profile number  
Null  
Null  
On completion of this profile jump run profile “B”  
Turn off all control outputs.  
Stay at the final setpoint of the profile  
Null  
2 = Use controller  
setpoint  
Use the active controller setpoint.  
Repeat  
0 = Outputs off  
Number of times to Repeat the profile sequence number “B” times,  
Sequence  
Then End  
repeat sequence  
then turn off the control outputs  
Repeat the profile sequence number “B” times,  
then hold the last profile setpoint.  
1 = Maintain profile  
setpoint  
2 = Use controller  
setpoint  
Repeat the profile sequence number “B” times,  
then use the active controller setpoint.  
Read Profile Name  
This command returns the name of the profile defined by the profile number requested.  
Read Profile Name - Request (to instrument)  
Field Name  
Data  
(Hex)  
A/R  
Comments  
(Dec)  
A/R  
23  
Unit Address  
The ID address of the instrument  
Function Code  
17  
20  
06  
00  
08  
20  
06  
Requires the multi read/write function  
Read Start Address High Byte  
Read Start Address Low Byte  
Read Quantity Of Registers High Byte  
Read Quantity Of Registers Low Byte  
Write Start Address High Byte  
Write Start Address Low Byte  
32  
06  
00  
08  
32  
06  
Page 126  
Modbus Parameters  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Read Profile Name - Request (to instrument)  
Data Comments  
(Hex)  
00  
Field Name  
(Dec)  
00  
Write Quantity Of Registers High Byte  
Write Quantity Of Registers Low Byte  
Byte Count  
02  
02  
04  
04  
Command Code High Byte  
Command Code Low Byte  
Profile Number High Byte  
Profile Number Low Byte  
CRC High Byte  
80  
50  
78  
4E  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
CRC Low Byte  
The instrument replies to the Read Profile Name request as follows:  
Read Profile Name - Response (from instrument)  
Field Name  
Data  
(Hex)  
A/R  
Comments  
(Dec)  
A/R  
23  
Unit Address  
The ID address of the instrument  
The multi read/write function  
Function Code  
17  
Byte Count  
16  
10  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
Profile Name Character 1  
Profile Name Character 2  
Profile Name Character 3  
Profile Name Character 4  
Profile Name Character 5  
Profile Name Character 6  
Profile Name Character 7  
Profile Name Character 8  
Profile Name Character 9  
Profile Name Character 10  
Profile Name Character 11  
Profile Name Character 12  
Profile Name Character 13  
Profile Name Character 14  
Profile Name Character 15  
Profile Name Character 16  
CRC High Byte  
The ASCII codes equivalent to each of the  
16 characters of the profile name, e.g. :  
A = 65dec / 0x41, B = 66dec / 0x42 etc  
a = 97dec / 0x61, b = 98dec / 0x62  
The space character (32dec / 0x20hex) is  
used to fill any unused characters at the  
end of the name.  
CRC Low Byte  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Modbus Parameters  
Page 127  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Read Profile Memory Status  
This command returns the status of the profile memory used. The response to this command  
is to return a table of all the profile numbers that are in use. A value of 0x00 indicates that the  
profile position is free and value of 0x01 indicates that the position is used by a profile. Using  
this command in conjunction with the read profile name command will give a directory of  
profile numbers to profile names.  
Read Profile Memory Status - Request (to instrument)  
Field Name  
Data  
(Hex)  
A/R  
Comments  
(Dec)  
A/R  
23  
Unit Address  
The ID address of the instrument  
Function Code  
17  
20  
Requires the multi read/write function  
Read Start Address High Byte  
Read Start Address Low Byte  
Read Quantity Of Registers High Byte  
Read Quantity Of Registers Low Byte  
Write Start Address High Byte  
Write Start Address Low Byte  
Write Quantity Of Registers High Byte  
Write Quantity Of Registers Low Byte  
Byte Count  
32  
06  
06  
00  
00  
32  
20  
32  
20  
06  
06  
00  
00  
02  
02  
04  
04  
Command Code High Byte  
Command Code Low Byte  
Profile Number High Byte  
Profile Number Low Byte  
CRC High Byte  
80  
50  
83  
53  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
CRC Low Byte  
Read Profile Status  
The instrument replies to the Read Profile Memory Status request as follows:  
Read Profile Memory Status - Response (from instrument)  
Field Name  
Data  
(Hex)  
A/R  
Comments  
(Dec)  
A/R  
23  
Unit Address  
Function Code  
Byte Count  
The ID address of the instrument  
The multi read/write function  
17  
40  
64  
Profile 1 Position  
0 or 1  
0 or 1  
For each of the 64 possible profile  
positions, a value of 0 is returned if the  
position is free, or 1 if the position is empty.  
Profile 2 Position  
0 or 1  
0 or 1  
etc…..  
Profile 63 Position  
0 or 1  
0 or 1  
Profile 64 Position  
CRC High Byte  
CRC Low Byte  
0 or 1  
A/R  
0 or 1  
A/R  
A/R  
A/R  
Page 128  
Modbus Parameters  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Instrument Data  
Parameter Name  
Modbus Address  
Access  
Values  
(Dec)  
210  
211  
(Hex)  
0x00D2  
0x00D3  
0x00D4  
0x00D5  
0x0172  
0x0173  
0x0174  
0x1D4F  
Serial Number 1  
Serial Number 2  
Serial Number 3  
Serial Number 4  
Manufacture Day  
Manufacture Month  
Manufacture Year  
USB Option Fitted  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
The first 4 digits of the instrument’s Serial number.  
The digits 5 to 8 of the instrument’s Serial number.  
The digits 9 to 11 of the instrument’s Serial number.  
The digits 12 to 14 of the instrument’s Serial number.  
Date of manufacture – 1 to 31 (day of month)  
Month of manufacture – 1 to 12  
212  
213  
370  
371  
372  
7503  
4 digit number = Year of manufacture (e.g. 2008)  
Value  
USB Option  
Not Fitted  
0
1
Fitted  
Value  
Data Recorder Fitted  
Not Fitted  
Data Recorder  
Fitted  
7868  
8199  
0x1EBC RO  
0
1
Fitted  
Value  
Profiler Enabled  
Profiler Not Enabled  
Profiler Enabled  
Profiler Enabled  
0x2007  
RO  
0
1
Software PRL  
208  
207  
217  
218  
400  
401  
402  
403  
404  
405  
406  
0x00D0  
0x00CF  
0x00D9  
0x00DA  
0x0190  
0x0191  
0x0192  
0x0193  
0x0194  
0x0195  
0x0196  
RO  
Product Revision Level – Firmware Level  
Product Revision Level – Hardware Level  
Firmware major version number  
Hardware PRL  
RO  
Firmware Type  
Firmware Version  
Contact Details 1  
Contact Details 2  
Contact Details 3  
Contact Details 4  
Contact Details 5  
Contact Details 6  
Contact Details 7  
RO  
RO  
Firmware minor version number  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
7 lines of user definable text - 25 ASCII characters  
per line which can re read or written using Modbus  
functions 16 or 23. Valid characters are 0 to 9, a to z,  
A to Z, plus ( ) - and _.  
Example. To write “My Company Name” to line 1  
send:  
[ADDRESS], 16, 01, 90, 00, 08, 10, 4D, 79, 20, 43,  
6F, 6D, 70, 61, 6E, 79, 20, 4E, 61, 6D, 65, [CRC]  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Modbus Parameters  
Page 129  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
14 Calibration  
WARNING:  
CALIBRATION IS ONLY REQUIRED FOR INSTRUMENTS IN WHICH CALIBRATION ERRORS  
HAVE BEEN ENCOUNTERED. REFER TO CALIBRATION CHECK BELOW.  
CAUTION:  
Calibration must be performed by personnel who are technically competent and  
authorised to do so.  
Calibration Reminder  
Calibration of each input type is carried out during manufacture. This can be verified from  
Product Information Mode. Recorder versions can provide the user with a calibration  
reminder if the application requires regular checks – see Input Configuration for details.  
For most applications, re-calibration is not required during the lifetime of the instrument.  
Equipment Required For Checking or Calibrating The Universal Input  
A suitable calibration signal source is required for each input type. To verify the accuracy of  
the instrument or carry out recalibration, the listed input sources are required. These must  
have better than ±0.05% of the reading accuracy:  
1. DC linear inputs: 0 to 50mV, 0 to 10VDC and 0 to 20mADC.  
2. Thermocouple inputs - complete with 0ºC reference facility, appropriate thermocouple  
functions and compensating leads (or equivalent).  
3. RTD inputs: decade resistance box with connections for three-wire input (or equivalent).  
Calibration Check  
1. Set the instrument to the required input type.  
2. Power up the instrument and connect the correct input leads.  
Leave powered up for at least five minutes for RTD and DC linear inputs, and at least 30  
minutes for thermocouple inputs.  
3. After the appropriate delay for stabilisation, check the calibration by connecting the  
appropriate input source and checking a number of cardinal points.  
The observed readings should be within the tolerances stated in the Specification (see  
Appendix 2)  
4. Repeat the test for all required input types.  
Page 130  
Calibration  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                               
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Recalibration Procedure  
Recalibration is carried out in five phases as shown in the table below; each phase  
corresponds to a basic input type.  
CAUTION:  
The 50mV phase MUST be calibrated before the thermocouple range.  
Table 27. Input Calibration phases  
DC milli-volt Calibration  
DC voltage Calibration  
DC milliamps Calibration  
RTD Calibration  
50 mV  
10 V  
20 mA  
200 ohm  
K type source at 0ºC  
Thermocouple Calibration  
1. For optimum accuracy, power-up the instrument for 30 minutes, then toggle the power  
off/on to restart the instrument.  
2. During the power-up “splash screen”, press and together until the Calibration  
Status screen is displayed.  
3. Press to select the first calibration phase (50mV Calibration)  
4. Ensure that an accurate 50mV signal has been applied to terminals 2 (+ve) and 3 (-ve),  
then press + to initiate the calibration.  
5. During calibration the message “50mV DC Input Calibrating” will display for a few  
seconds. This should be followed by the “Calibration Successful” confirmation.  
6. If the input is misconnected or an incorrect signal is applied, the calibration will be aborted  
and the display will show “Failed: Signal Too Small!” or “Failed: Signal Too Large!”.  
The previous calibration value will be retained.  
7. Press to select the next calibration phase.  
8. Repeat this process for each input type until all the phases are calibrated. For each phase,  
ensure that the correct input is applied, using the correct connections.  
9. Once all calibration phases are completed, recorder versions will display the Calibration  
Reminder Date. If required, this can be changed to the date of your next calibration check.  
Ensure that Calibration Reminders are enabled in Input Configuration to receive a  
reminder.  
10.Press + to exit to the main menu.  
Note:  
Calibration Mode automatically exits if there is no button activity for two minutes.  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Calibration  
Page 131  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
15 Appendix 1 – Glossary of Terms Used  
Active Setpoint  
The term Active Setpoint is used to describe the currently selected setpoint when the  
instrument is in Controller Mode. Controllers can use Local Setpoint 1 and/or the Alternative  
Setpoint. Only one of the setpoints can be active at any time. During Profiler Control, the  
setpoint value is controlled by the profiler function.  
Also refer to: Actual Setpoint, Alternative Setpoint, Controller Mode, Local Setpoints, Profiler  
Mode, Remote Setpoint, Setpoint, and Setpoint Selection.  
Actual Setpoint  
Actual Setpoint is the effective current value of the active setpoint. This will be different to the  
Active Setpoint’s target value if the setpoint is ramping. The actual setpoint will rise or fall at  
the ramp-rate set, until it reaches its target setpoint value. During Profiler Control, the Actual  
Setpoint value is controlled by the profiler function.  
Also refer to: Active Setpoint, Controller Mode, Profiler Mode, Setpoint, Setpoint Ramp Rate  
and Setpoint Selection.  
Alarm Configuration  
A sub-menu of Configuration Mode used to adjust the alarm parameters. (Alarm types,  
values, hysteresis and inhibiting).  
Also refer to: Alarm Hysteresis, Alarm Inhibit, Alarm Operation, Alarm Types and  
Configuration Mode.  
Alarm Hysteresis  
An adjustable band through which the process variable must pass before the alarm will  
change state. This Hysteresis is only applicable to alarms based on the Process Value or  
Control Deviation, as illustrated below. The band is always on the “safe” side of an alarm  
point, e.g. a high alarm’s hysteresis band is below the high alarm value, and a low alarm’s  
hysteresis is above the low alarm value. Rate Of Change Alarms have a different type of  
hysteresis based on the length of time the rate is above the threshold.  
Settings = 1 LSD to full span from the setpoint.  
Default value = 1 LSD.  
Refer to the Alarm Hysteresis Operation diagram on the next page.  
Also refer to: Alarm Types, Loop Alarm, Alarm Operation, LSD, Minimum Duration Of  
Change, Process Variable, and Rate Of Change Alarm.  
Page 132  
Glossary  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                                                                                 
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Inactive  
Inactive  
Active  
PROCESS HIGH  
ALARM  
Alarm Value  
Alarm Hysteresis Value  
Process Variable  
Process Variable  
Alarm Hysteresis Value  
Alarm Value  
PROCESS LOW  
ALARM  
Inactive  
Inactive  
Active  
Alarm Value  
(from Setpoint)  
Alarm Hysteresis Value  
Process Variable  
BAND ALARM  
Setpoint  
Alarm Hysteresis Value  
Alarm Value  
(from Setpoint)  
Inactive  
Inactive  
Inactive  
Inactive  
Active  
Active  
Active  
Inactive  
DEVIATION HIGH  
ALARM  
Alarm Value  
(from Setpoint)  
Alarm Hysteresis Value  
Setpoint  
Process Variable  
Setpoint  
Process Variable  
Alarm Hysteresis Value  
DEVIATION LOW  
ALARM  
Alarm Value  
(from Setpoint)  
Alarm Inactive  
Alarm Inactive  
Alarm Active  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Glossary  
Page 133  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Alarm Operation  
The Process and Deviation Alarm types are illustrated, together with the action of any  
associated outputs.  
Also refer to: Alarm Hysteresis, Alarm Inhibit, Alarm Types, Band Alarm Value, Deviation  
Alarm, Latching Relay, Logical Alarm Combinations, Loop Alarm, Process High Alarm and  
Process Low Alarm.  
Output Off Output On  
Process High Alarm  
Alarm Off  
Alarm On  
Direct Acting  
Alarm Value  
Process Variable  
Process Variable  
Output Off  
Alarm On  
Output Om  
Alarm Off  
Process High Alarm  
Reverse Acting  
Alarm Value  
Output On  
Alarm On  
Output Off  
Alarm Off  
Process Low Alarm  
Direct Acting  
Alarm Value  
Process Variable  
Process Variable  
Output Off Output On  
Alarm On  
Alarm Value  
Process Low Alarm  
Reverse Acting  
Alarm Off  
Output On  
Alarm On  
Output On  
Output Off  
Alarm Off  
Band Alarm  
Alarm On  
Direct Acting  
Alarm Value  
Alarm Value  
Alarm Value  
Alarm Value  
Process Variable  
Output Off  
Alarm On  
Output On  
Output Off  
Band Alarm  
Alarm On  
Alarm Off  
Reverse Acting  
Process Variable  
Deviation High  
Alarm (+ve values)  
Direct Acting  
Output On  
Alarm On  
Output Off  
Alarm Off  
Alarm Value Process Variable  
Deviation High  
Output On  
Alarm Off  
Output Off  
Alarm (+ve values)  
Reverse Acting  
Alarm On  
Process Variable  
Alarm Value  
Deviation Low  
Alarm (+ve values)  
Direct Acting  
Output Off  
Alarm Off  
Output On  
Alarm On  
Alarm Value  
Process Variable  
Process Variable  
Deviation Low  
Output Off Output On  
Alarm (+ve values)  
Reverse Acting  
Alarm Off  
Alarm On  
Alarm Value  
Setpoint  
Setpoint  
Figure 50. Alarm Operation  
Page 134  
Glossary  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                         
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Alarm Inhibit  
Alarm Inhibit prevents unwanted process or deviation alarm activation at power-up or when  
the controller setpoint is changed. The alarm activation is inhibited until a ‘Safe’ condition is  
present. The alarm operates normally from that point onwards. E.g. if inhibited, a low alarm  
will not activate at power-up, until the process has first risen above the alarm point and then  
falls back below.  
Settings = Inhibit or not inhibited for each alarm.  
Default value = None Inhibited.  
Also refer to: Alarm Types and Alarm Operation.  
Alarm Types  
There are four basic alarm types, Process Alarms, Control Deviation Alarms, Rate of Signal  
Change Alarms and Event Based Alarms.  
Process Alarms are based on the absolute value of the Process Variable. If the PV rises  
above a high alarm value, or falls below a low alarm value, the alarm will become active.  
Deviation Alarms are based on the value of the Control Deviation error. If the PV is more  
than the high deviation alarm value above setpoint, or more than the low deviation alarm  
value below setpoint, the alarm will become active.  
Rate Of Signal Change Alarms are based on the rate of change of the PV. If the rate of  
change is greater than the alarm value for longer that the Minimum Duration time, the alarm  
will activate.  
Event based alarms activate when the condition for that alarm type is true. These can be  
Signal Break, Low Memory Or Loop Alarms.  
Also refer to: Alarm Operation, Band Alarm Value, Control Deviation, Deviation Alarm, Loop  
Alarm, Process High Alarm, Process Low Alarm, Process Variable, Rate Of Change Alarm,  
and Setpoint.  
Alternative Setpoint  
The instrument can have up to two setpoints. Local Setpoint 1 and/or an Alternative Setpoint.  
The Alternative Setpoint can be chosen from Local Setpoint 2 or a remote setpoint input from  
Auxiliary Input A or B if either of these are fitted. One setpoint can be chosen as the active at  
using the Setpoint Selection.  
Also refer to: Auxiliary Input, Local Setpoints, Remote Setpoints; Setpoint and Setpoint  
Select.  
Auto Pre-Tune  
When the Auto Pre-Tune is enabled, a Pre-Tune activation is attempted at every power-up  
(standard Pre-Tune activation rules apply). Auto Pre-Tune is useful when the process to be  
controlled may vary significantly each time it is run. Auto Pre-Tune ensures that the process  
is tuned correctly each time the process is started. Self-Tune may also be engaged to fine-  
tune the controller.  
Settings = Enabled or Disabled.  
Default value = Disabled.  
Also refer to: Pre-Tune, Self-Tune, PID and Tuning.  
Automatic Reset  
- Refer to Integral Action  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Glossary  
Page 135  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                                                                                                                         
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Auxiliary Input  
Up to two secondary linear input modules can be installed in Option Slot A and B. These can  
be used as Remote Setpoint inputs. Signals can be mA, mV, VDC or Potentiometer. Auxiliary  
Input B also has a Digital Input onboard.  
Also refer to: Alternative Setpoint, Digital Input, Linear Input, mADC, mVDC, Remote  
Setpoint and VDC  
Auxiliary Input Lower Limit  
When the auxiliary input is used to provide a Remote Setpoint (RSP), this setting defines the  
value of the RSP when the auxiliary input signal is at its minimum value (e.g. for 4 to 20mA,  
the value when 4mA is applied). It may be adjusted within the range -1999 to 9999. However,  
the RSP value is always constrained by the setpoint upper limit and Lower Limits.  
Settings = -1999 to 9999  
Default Value = Scale Range Lower Limit.  
Also refer to: Auxiliary Input, Auxiliary Input Upper Limit, Auxiliary Input Offset, Remote  
Setpoint, Setpoint and Setpoint Upper Limit and Setpoint Lower Limit.  
Auxiliary Input Offset  
Used to adjust the value of the Auxiliary Input. Positive values are added to the auxiliary  
input reading, negative values are subtracted. It is adjustable in the range –1999 to 9999.  
When the auxiliary input is used to provide a Remote Setpoint, this setting is added to (or  
subtracted from) the remote setpoint value, but the setpoint is still constrained by the etpoint  
upper and lower limits.  
Settings = ±input span  
Default Value = Off.  
Also refer to: Auxiliary Input, Remote Setpoint, Scale Range Upper Limit, Scale Range Lower  
Limit Setpoint Lower Limit and Setpoint Upper Limit.  
Auxiliary Input Type  
Defines the type and range of the linear input signal for the Auxiliary Input. It can be mADC,  
mVDC, VDC or potentiometer (mVDC and potentiometer are only available with the Full  
Auxiliary input in option slot B). This can be used as a Remote Setpoint input.  
Also refer to: Remote Setpoint and Setpoint.  
Auxiliary Input Upper Limit  
When the auxiliary input is used to provide a Remote Setpoint (RSP), this setting defines the  
value of the RSP when the auxiliary input signal is at its maximum value (e.g. for 4 to 20mA,  
the value when 20mA is applied). It may be adjusted within the range -1999 to 9999.  
However, the RSP value is always constrained by the setpoint upper limit and Lower Limits.  
Settings = -1999 to 9999  
Default Value = Scale Range Lower Limit.  
Also refer to: Auxiliary Input, Auxiliary Input Lower Limit, Auxiliary Input Offset, Remote  
Setpoint, Setpoint and Setpoint Upper Limit and Setpoint Lower Limit.  
Band Alarm Value  
The amount of control deviation that is acceptable before a Band Alarm is activated. If the  
process variable is more than the value of this band from the actual setpoint, the alarm will  
be active.  
Settings = 1 LSD to full input span from the setpoint.  
Default value = 5 LSD’s.  
Also refer to: Actual Setpoint, Alarm Operation, Alarm Types, Control Deviation, Input Span,  
LSD and Process Variable.  
Page 136  
Glossary  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                                                                                                                                 
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Bar Graphs  
The instrument displays a bar-graph in the base operation mode screen. These can show  
PID Power Output (single control = uni-directional, dual control = bi-directional), Control  
Deviation (bi-directional) or for Data Recorder version %Memory Used (uni-directional). Bar-  
graphs are uni-directional or bi-directional depending on the information to be displayed.  
Also refer to: Control Deviation, Data Recorder, Display Configuration, Operation Mode, Main  
Menu and PID  
Bias (Manual Reset)  
Used to manually bias proportional output(s) to compensate for control deviation errors due  
to process load variations. Bias is expressed as a percentage of output power. This  
parameter is not applicable if the Primary output is set to ON-OFF control. If the process  
variable settles below setpoint use a higher Bias value to remove the error, if the process  
variable settles above the setpoint use a lower Bias value. Integral action performs a similar  
function automatically when using PI or PID control.  
Lower Bias values will also help to reduce overshoot at process start up.  
Settings = 0 to 100% (-100% to +100% for dual control).  
Default value = 25%.  
Also refer to: Control Deviation, Integral Action, ON/OFF Control, PI Control, PID,  
Proportional Control, Process Variable, and Setpoint.  
Bumpless Transfer  
A method used to prevent sudden changes to the correcting variable, when switching  
between automatic PI or PID and Manual control modes. During a transition from PI or PID to  
Manual control, the initial Manual Power value is set to the previous automatic mode value.  
The operator then adjusts the value as required. During a transition from Manual control to PI  
or PID, the initial automatic value is set to the previous Manual mode value. The correcting  
variable level will gradually adjusted by the control algorithm at a rate dependant on the  
integral action resulting from the Integral Time Constant value. Since integral action is  
essential to Bumpless Transfer, this feature is not available if Integral is turned off.  
Also refer to: Correcting Variable, Integral Action, Manual Mode, PI and PID.  
Cascade Control  
Applications with two or more capacities (such as heated jackets) are inherently difficult for a  
single instrument to control, due to large overshoots and unacceptable lags. The solution is  
to cascade two or more controllers, each with its own input, in series to form a single  
regulating device. The product setpoint temperature is set on the master controller. This is  
compared to the product temperature, and the master’s PID output (mA or VDC) is fed into  
the auxiliary input of the slave controller as a remote setpoint input. The RSP is scaled to suit  
any expected temperature. The slave loop’s natural response time should ideally be at least  
5 times faster than the master.  
In the example, the maximum input  
represents 400ºC, thus restricting the  
jacket temperature. At start-up the master  
compares the product temperature  
(ambient) to its setpoint (300ºC) and gives  
maximum output. This sets the maximum  
(400ºC) setpoint on the slave, which is  
compared to the jacket temperature  
(ambient) giving maximum heater output.  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Glossary  
Page 137  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                                                           
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
As the jacket temperature rises, the slave’s heater output falls. The product temperature also  
rises at a rate dependant on the transfer lag between the jacket and product. This causes the  
master’s PID output to decrease, reducing the ‘jacket’ setpoint on the slave, effectively  
reducing the output to the heater. This continues until the system becomes balanced.  
When tuning a cascade system, first set the master to manual mode. Tune the slave  
controller using proportional control only (I & D are not normally required) then return the  
master to automatic PID mode before tuning the master. The result is quicker, smoother  
control with minimum overshoot and the ability to cope with load changes, whilst keeping the  
jacket temperature within acceptable tolerances.  
Also refer to: Auxiliary Input, Auxiliary Input Lower Limit, Auxiliary Input Upper Limit,  
Derivative Action, Integral Action, mADC, Manual Mode, Master & Slave, Proportional  
Control, PID, Remote Setpoint, Remote Setpoint Lower Limit, Remote Setpoint Upper Limit,  
Setpoint, Setpoint Select, Tuning and VDC.  
Clock Configuration  
A sub-menu of Configuration Mode used to adjust the parameters that relate to the settings  
for the Real Time Clock fitted with the data recorder option (Date, time, day of week and date  
format).  
Also refer to: Data Recorder and Configuration Mode  
Communications Write Enable  
Enables/disables the changing of parameter values via the Serial Communications link, if a  
communication option such as Modbus RTU (RS485) or Modbus TCP (Ethernet) is installed.  
When disabled, all communications are read-only.  
Settings = Read Only or Read/Write.  
Default setting = Enabled (read/write).  
Also refer to: Ethernet, Modbus RTU, Modbus TCP, RS485 and Serial Communications  
Configuration Menu  
A selection of sub-menus from which the user can adjust the major instrument settings.  
There are sub-menus for the Inputs, Control, Outputs, Alarms, Communications, Recorder,  
Clock, Display and Lock Codes. Configuration Mode is entered from the Main Menu. An  
unlock code is required to access this mode.  
Refer to the Configuration Menu information in the Configuration & Use section.  
Also refer to: Alarm Configuration, Lock Codes, Clock Configuration, Control Configuration,  
Display Configuration, Input Configuration, Main Menu, Output Configuration, Recorder  
Configuration, Serial Communications Configuration  
Contactor  
- Refer to Relay  
Control Configuration  
A sub-menu of Configuration Mode used to adjust the parameters that relate to the control of  
the process. (Enabling control, auto/manual mode, control type and action, PID tuning terms,  
power limits, sensor break action, local setpoint values, setpoint ramp rates and setpoint  
selection).  
Also refer to: Configuration Mode, Control Action, Control Enable, Local Setpoints, Manual  
Mode, PID, Power Limits, Sensor Break Pre-Set Power, Setpoint Ramping, Setpoint  
Selection and Tuning  
Page 138  
Glossary  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                                                                                                 
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Control Deviation  
Control Deviation is the difference between the Process Variable value and the Actual  
Setpoint. The Control deviation error is equal to PV – SP. This value can be monitored using  
the bar-graph, and an excessive deviation warning can be given by using a deviation alarm.  
Also refer to: Actual Setpoint, Alarm Types, Bar Graph, Deviation Alarm, Process Variable  
and Setpoint  
Control Action  
The primary power output direction. Reverse action is typically used with heating applications  
as it increases the correcting variable as the process variable falls. A secondary output’s  
action is always the opposite of the primary output.  
Settings = Reverse or Direct  
Default value = Reverse.  
Also refer to: Control Type, Correcting Variable, Direct Acting Control and Reverse Acting  
Control.  
Control Enable/Disable  
The PID controller outputs can be temporarily turned off by disabling the control. All other  
functions continue as normal. The control enable/disable function can be controlled from the  
Control Configuration sub-menu or optionally from Operation Mode or via a digital input if one  
is fitted.  
Also refer to: Configuration Menu, Digital Input, Operation Mode and PID  
Control Type  
This defines if a controller has Single (unidirectional) or Dual (bidirectional) control outputs.  
Single outputs have a Primary output only. This can drive the PV in one direction (e.g. heat  
only, cool only, increase humidity etc). Dual outputs have both Primary and Secondary  
outputs which can force the PV to increase or decrease (e.g. heat & cool, humidify and  
dehumidify etc).  
Settings = Single or Dual  
Default value = Single.  
Also refer to: Control Action, PID, Primary Proportional Band, Process Variable, and  
Secondary Proportional Band.  
Controller  
An instrument that controls a process variable to a target setpoint, by applying a correcting  
variable. The controller uses proportional (P, PI, PD o PID) or On-Off control methods.  
Also refer to: Correcting Variable, Indicator, Limit Controller, On-Off Control, PD Control, PI  
Control, PID, Process Variable, Proportional Control, Profiler and Setpoint.  
Controller Mode  
The normal operating mode when profiling is not fitted or it is not being used.  
Also refer to: Controller. Profiler and Profiler Mode  
Correcting Variable  
The amount of output from a controller used to adjust the process variable value up or down,  
to remove any control deviation. The correcting variable is commonly referred to as the  
controller output power.  
Also refer to: Control Deviation, PID, Primary Power Output Limit and Process Variable  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Glossary  
Page 139  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                                                                                                                                                                                                     
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
CPU  
This stands for Central Processing Unit and refers to the onboard microprocessor that  
controls the measurement, control, alarm and display functions of the instrument.  
Current Proportioning Control  
Current proportioning control is used to produce the correcting variable on units with linear  
output(s). It provides 4 to 20mA, 0-20mA, 0 to 5V, 0 to 10V or 2 - 10V DC for proportional  
control, PI, PD or PID control modes. On-Off control cannot be used with linear outputs.  
Also refer to: Correcting Variable, Linear Output, On-Off Control, PD, PI, PID, Proportional  
Control, and Time Proportional Control.  
Custom Display Mode  
The user can copy up to 50 Configuration Menu parameters into Operation Mode using the  
PC software. It the Custom Display in enabled in the Display Configuration sub-menu, these  
screens follow the normal Operation Mode screens. In this mode these screens are not pass-  
code protected.  
Also refer to: Control Configuration, Display Configuration and Operation Mode  
Cycle Time  
For time proportioning outputs, the cycle time is used to define the time over which the  
controller averages the ON vs. OFF time, in order to provide the required correcting variable.  
Each Time-Proportioning output has its own adjustable cycle time. Shorter cycle times give  
better control, but at the expense of reduce life when used with electromechanical control  
devices (e.g. relays or solenoid valves). There are separate cycle times for the Primary and  
Secondary control outputs  
Settings = 0.5 to 512 seconds  
Default value = 32 secs.  
Also refer to: Correcting Variable, PID, Primary Proportional Band, Proportional Control,  
Relay, Secondary Proportional Band, Solenoid Valve and Time Proportioning.  
Data Recorder  
The Data Recorder option can record the process value, setpoint, alarms and events over  
time. Recordings can be transferred to a USB memory stick or via the serial communications  
options. This option includes a USB Interface and a battery backed-up Real Time Clock.  
Refer to the Data Recorder Option section of this manual for more details.  
Also refer to: Recorder Configuration.  
Deadband  
- Refer to Overlap/Deadband.  
Derivative Action  
The Derivative Time Constant defines how the control action responds to the rate of change  
in the process variable. The power is decreased if the PV is rising, or increased if the PV is  
falling. This parameter is not available if primary control output is set to On-Off, and it is  
normally set to OFF in modulating value applications as it can cause premature wear due to  
constant small adjustments to the valve position.  
Settings = OFF or 0 seconds to 99 minutes 59 seconds  
Default value = 01.15.  
Also refer to: Modulating Valve, On-Off Control, PD Control, PI Control, PID, Process  
Variable, Tuning and Valve Motor Drive Control.  
Page 140  
Glossary  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                                                                                                                                   
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Deviation Alarm Value  
Defines the amount of control deviation considered acceptable before a deviation alarm is  
activated. A positive value (deviation high) sets the alarm point above the current actual  
setpoint, a negative value (deviation low) sets the alarm point below actual setpoint. If the  
process variable deviates from the actual setpoint by a margin greater than this value, the  
deviation alarm becomes active. If an alarm is required if the control deviation is either side  
of the setpoint, consider using a Band alarm or a logical combination of a deviation high and  
deviation low alarm.  
Settings = 1 LSD to full span from the setpoint  
Default value = 5 LSD’s.  
Also refer to: Actual Setpoint, Alarm Operation, Alarm Types, Band Alarm, Control Deviation,  
Logical Combination, Process Variable and Setpoint.  
Digital Input  
An input that can be driven to one of two states (active or inactive) by and external voltage or  
a contact opening/closing. Digital Inputs can be used to set the instrument in to different  
states. Possible uses are to select Auto/Manual Mode, Active Setpoint, Control Output  
Enable/disable, Profile Run/Hold/Abort, Hold Segment Release and Recording Start/Stop.  
Also refer to: Active Setpoint, Control Enable, Data Recording, Manual Mode, Profiling and  
Segment Types.  
Direct Acting Control  
Direct action is required for applications where the primary control output will be used to  
force the process variable down towards the setpoint. A typical application is a Chiller. When  
the control action is selected as direct acting, primary proportional control outputs decrease  
the correcting variable as the process variable reduces within the proportional band, and  
primary On-Off outputs turn off when the process variable is less than the setpoint. The  
control action of a secondary output is always the opposite of the primary output.  
Also refer to: Control Action, Control Type, Correcting Variable, On-Off Control, Process  
Variable, Proportional Control and Reverse Acting Control.  
Display Configuration  
A sub-menu of Configuration Mode used to adjust the display, and the parameters that relate  
to Operation Mode (Custom display enable, read-only operation mode, bar-graph formatting,  
trend setup, display colour & contrast and language selection).  
Also refer to: Bar-Graphs, Configuration Mode, Custom Display Mode, Operation Mode, Main  
Menu and Trend Display.  
Display Languages  
The instrument supports two languages. The main language is English. The alternate  
language is chosen at time of order, but can also be changed by downloading a new file via  
the PC software. Current supported languages are English, French, German, Italian,  
Spanish, Russian and Czech.  
Also refer to: Display Configuration, Operation Mode, and Main Menu.  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Glossary  
Page 141  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                                                                                           
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Display Resolution  
The maximum number of digits that can be displayed and/or the maximum number of  
decimal places. Numeric values (e.g. process variable, setpoints etc) are limited to no more  
than 5 digits.  
The maximum number of decimal places is selectable from 0 to 3 places, but the overall 5-  
digit limit means that larger values may not display the full number of decimal places. For  
example, values >99.999 can have no more than 2 decimal places(e.g. 100.00).  
Also refer to: LSD  
Effective Setpoint  
- Refer to Actual Setpoint.  
Engineering Units  
The Process Variable and Setpoint displays can assigned engineering units to describe the  
type of parameter connected to the process input. The engineering units for linear inputs can  
be: °C; °F; °K; bar; %; %RH; pH; psi or none. For temperature inputs (RTD or  
Thermocouples) they can be °C; °F or °K.  
Also refer to: Linear Input, Process Input, Process Variable RTD and Thermocouple  
Ethernet  
A networking technology for local area networks (LANs). Used to link computers and other  
equipment in order to control or share data and control such devices. If fitted with an  
Ethernet serial communications module in Option Slot A, this instrument can connect to a  
Modbus TCP master device over a wired Ethernet LAN.  
Also refer to: Modbus TCP and Serial Communications  
Indicator  
An instrument that displays process values, but lacks control features. Typically, alarm  
outputs are available that will activate at preset PV values.  
Also refer to: Controller, Limit Controller and Process Variable.  
Input Configuration  
A sub-menu of Configuration Mode, used to adjust the parameters that relate to the process  
and auxiliary inputs (type, engineering units, decimal position, scaling, offset, filter auxiliary  
input settings etc.).  
Also refer to: Auxiliary Input, Configuration Mode and Process Input.  
Input Filter Time Constant  
This parameter is used to filter out extraneous impulses affecting the process variable value.  
The filtered PV is used for all PV dependent functions (display, control, alarm etc). Use this  
parameter with care as it will also slow the response to genuine process changes.  
Settings = OFF or 0.1 to 100.0 seconds.  
Default value = 2.0 seconds.  
Also refer to: Process Variable.  
Page 142  
Glossary  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                                                                                                     
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Input Range  
This is the overall process variable input range and type as selected by the Process Input  
Type parameter. This range can be scaled by the Scale Range Upper & Lower Limits.  
Also refer to: Input Span, Process Input, Scale Range Lower Limit and Scale Range Upper  
Limit.  
Input Span  
The measuring and display limits, as defined by the Scale Range Lower and Scale Range  
Upper Limits. The trimmed span value is also used as the basis for calculations that relate to  
the span of the instrument (e.g. proportional bands).  
Settings = 100 LSD’s to the full Input Range.  
Default value = Input Range  
Also refer to: Input Range, LSD, Primary Proportional Band, Scale Range Lower Limit, Scale  
Range Upper Limit and Secondary Proportional Band.  
Integral Time Constant  
Integral action biases proportional control output(s) to compensate for process load  
variations, until the control deviation value is zero. Integral Time Constant is also known as  
“Automatic Reset”. Decreasing the time constant increases the Integral action. This  
parameter is not available if the primary output is set to On-Off.  
Settings = 1 sec to 99 min 59 sec and OFF.  
Default value = 05:00  
Also refer to: Control Deviation, On-Off Control, PI Control, PID, Primary Proportional Band,  
Secondary Proportional Band, Derivative Action, and Tuning.  
Latching Relay  
A type of relay that, once it becomes active, requires a reset signal before it will deactivate. If  
latching relays are required, they can be fitted externally as slaves to the internal (non-  
latching) relays of this instrument.  
Also refer to: Relay  
LED  
Light Emitting Diode. LED’s are used as indicator lights (e.g. for the alarm indication,  
automatic tuning stats and manual mode).  
Also refer to: Alarm Operation, Alarm Types, Automatic Tuning and Manual Mode.  
Linear Input  
A mVDC, mADC or voltage signal used to represent the value of the process variable. This  
can be any variable that can be converted into a suitable DC linear signal. Common  
examples are Humitity, pressure, pH or temperature.  
Auxiliary linear inputs can also be installed, these can be used to provide a remote setpoint.  
Also refer to: Auxiliary Input, Input Range, Linear Output, mVDC, mADC, Process Variable,  
Remote Setpoint and VDC.  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Glossary  
Page 143  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                                                                                                                                                                                       
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Linear Output  
A mVDC, mADC or voltage signal used to provide a proportional control or retransmit output.  
Also refer to: Linear Input mVDC, mADC, Proportional Control, Retransmit Output and VDC  
Limit Controller  
A safety protection device that will shut down a process at a preset “exceed condition”. Limit  
controllers work independently of the normal process controller in order to prevent possible  
damage to equipment or products. A fail-safe latching relay is fitted, which cannot be reset by  
the operator until the process has returned to a safe condition. Limit controllers are highly  
recommended for any process that could potentially become hazardous under fault  
conditions.  
Also refer to: Controller and Latching Relay.  
Local Setpoints  
Local setpoints are target values that are stored inside the controller. These are normally  
entered by from the front keypad, but can also be set via a serial communications link.  
The instrument can have up to two setpoints. Local Setpoint 1 and/or an Alternative Setpoint.  
The Alternative Setpoint can be chosen from Local Setpoint 2 or a remote setpoint from an  
auxiliary input. One setpoint can be chosen as the active at using the Setpoint Selection.  
The value of the setpoints can be adjusted between the Setpoint Upper Limit and Setpoint  
Lower Limits.  
Also refer to: Alternative Setpoint, Auxiliary Input, Remote Setpoint, Serial Communications,  
Setpoint, Setpoint Lower Limit, Setpoint Upper Limit, and Setpoint Select.  
Lock Codes  
The four-digit codes required when entering the Setup Wizard, Configuration Mode, Tuning  
Menu, Supervisor Mode, USB Menu, Recorder Menu and Profiler Setup Menu. These menus  
can be selected from the Main Menu. The correct code must be entered to gain access. If  
unlimited access is required for any of the menus, its lock can be turned off by setting the  
value to OFF. Refer to the Lock Code View information in the Configuration & Use section.  
Settings = 1 to 9999 or OFF.  
Default value = 10  
Also refer to: Configuration Mode, Main Menu, Profiler Setup Menu, Recorder Menu, Setup  
Wizard, Supervisor Mode, Tuning Menu and USB Menu.  
Logical Combination of Alarms  
Outputs for alarms may be combined to create a Logical OR situation. Possible OR  
combinations are: Alarms 1 to 2; 1 to 3; 1 to 4 or 1 to 5.  
Outputs for alarms & events may be combined to create a Logical AND situation. Possible  
AND combinations are: Alarm 1 & Event 1; Alarm 2 & Event 2; Alarm 3 & Event 3; Alarm 4 &  
Event 4; and Alarm 5 & Event 5.  
Any suitable output may be assigned as a logical output and can be configured for reverse  
action or direct action. The following table explains the concept of logical OR & AND outputs.  
Also refer to: Alarm Operation, Alarm Types, Output Configuration and Profile Events.  
Page 144  
Glossary  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                                                                                                                     
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Table 28. Examples Of Logical Alarm Outputs  
Logical OR: Alarm 1 OR Alarm 2  
Direct Acting Reverse-Acting  
OFF  
ON  
OFF  
OFF  
ON  
OFF  
ON  
ON  
ON  
OFF  
ON  
OFF  
OFF  
ON  
ON  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
ON  
OFF  
ON  
ON  
ON  
Logical AND: Alarm 1 AND Alarm 2  
Direct Acting  
Reverse-Acting  
OFF  
ON  
OFF  
OFF  
ON  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
ON  
OFF  
ON  
OFF  
OFF  
ON  
ON  
ON  
OFF  
ON  
OFF  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
OFF  
Loop Alarm  
A loop alarm detects faults in the control feedback loop, by continuously monitoring process  
variable response to the control output(s). If one of the 5 alarms is defined to be a loop  
alarm, it repeatedly checks if the PID control output is at saturation. If saturation is reached  
(0% or 100% power for single control type, -100% or +100% for dual control type), an internal  
timer is started. Thereafter, if the output has not caused the process variable to be corrected  
by a predetermined amount 'V' after time 'T' has elapsed, the alarm becomes active.  
Subsequently, the alarm repeatedly checks the process variable and the PID output. When  
the process variable starts to change value in the correct sense or when the PID output is no  
longer at the limit, the alarm is deactivated.  
For PID control, the loop alarm time 'T' can be automatic (twice the Integral Time value) or  
set to a user defined value. Correct operation with the automatic loop alarm time depends  
upon reasonably accurate PID tuning. The user defined value is always used for On-Off  
control, and the timer starts as soon as an output turns on.  
The value of 'V' is dependent upon the input type. For Temperature inputs, V = 2°C or 3°F.  
For Linear inputs, V = 10 x LSD  
The loop alarm is automatically disabled during manual control mode and during execution of  
a Pre-Tune. Upon exit from manual mode or after completion of the Pre-Tune routine, the  
loop alarm is automatically re-enabled.  
Also refer to: Alarm Types, Control Type, Manual Loop Alarm Time, Linear Input, LSD,  
Manual Mode, On-Off Control, PID, Pre-Tune, Process Variable and Tuning.  
LSD  
The Least Significant Digit (LSD) is the smallest incremental value that can be shown at the  
defined display resolution.  
Also refer to: Display Resolution.  
mADC  
This stands for milliamp DC. It is used in reference to the linear DC milliamp input ranges and  
the linear DC milliamp outputs. Typically, these will be 0 to 20mA or 4 to 20mA.  
Also refer to: Input Range, Linear Input, Linear Output,, mVDC, Process Variable and VDC  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Glossary  
Page 145  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                                                                                           
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Main Menu  
The top-level menu that allows access to operation mode as well as all other menus. These  
are: configuration mode, profiler setup and recorder menus, the setup wizard, supervisor  
mode and the tuning and USB menus. Most menus require an unlock code to gain access.  
Refer to the Main Menu information in the Configuration & Use section.  
Also refer to: Configuration Mode, Lock Codes, Operation Mode, Profiler Setup Menu,  
Recorder Menu, Setup Wizard, Supervisor Mode, Tuning Menu and USB Menu.  
Manual Loop Alarm Time  
The loop alarm time used when a loop alarm is defined to have a manually set time or  
whenever On-Off control is selected. This parameter determines the duration of the output  
saturation condition after which the loop alarm will be activated.  
Settings = 1 sec to 99 mins 59 sec.  
Default value = 99:59.  
Also refer to: Loop Alarm, and On-Off Control.  
Manual Mode  
If Manual Mode is enabled/disabled (from the control configuration sub-menu, or the  
Auto/manual screen in operation mode if it is available) it allows the controller to switch  
between automatic and manual control modes. Auto/Manual Mode can also be switched  
using a digital input if one has been configured for this function. Switching between automatic  
and manual modes is achieved using “bumpless transfer”.  
Manual Mode operates as follows:  
The setpoint legend is replaced by the word MAN and setpoint value is replaced by a %  
output power value. This value may be adjusted using the or keys. The power value  
can be varied from 0% to 100% for controllers using single control type, and -100% to +100%  
for controllers using dual control type. It is possible to use a controller as a permanent  
“Manual Station” by selecting Manual Control in the control configuration sub-menu.  
Caution: Manual Mode should be used with care because the power output level is set by  
the operator, therefore the PID algorithm is no longer in control of the process. The operator  
MUST maintain the process at the desired level manually. Manual power is not limited by the  
Power Output Limits.  
Also refer to: Bumpless Transfer, Control Configuration, Control Type, Operation Mode, PID,  
and Power Output Limits.  
Master & Slave Controllers  
The terms master and slave are used to describe the controllers in multi-zone applications  
where one instrument controls the setpoint of another. These can be simple Setpoint  
Master/Slave applications where the master controller transmits its setpoint to the slaves via  
serial communications, or retransmits it as an analogue DC linear output signal. If serial  
comms are used, the master controller must be able to act as a communications master  
device and the slave must have a compatible communications option fitted. If DC linear  
retransmission is use, the slave controller must have a matching a remote setpoint input. It is  
possible to apply an offset to each zone if the slave has a Setpoint offset parameter or by  
offsetting it’s remote setpoint input (or adjusting the scaling of this input).  
Page 146  
Glossary  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                                                                                                                     
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Cascade Control is another type of Master & Slave application where the slaves setpoint is  
set using the master controllers PID power output.  
The terms Master and Slave are also used in a different context in relation to serial  
communications.  
Also refer to: Cascade Control, Linear Output, Retransmit Output, Remote Setpoint, Auxiliary  
Input Offset, Serial Communications and Setpoint.  
Minimum Duration Of Change  
A form of alarm hysteresis unique to the Rate Of Change Alarm. It is the minimum time that  
the rate of change in the process variable must be above the alarm threshold, before the  
alarm will change state (from on to off, or off to on).  
Settings = 1 to 9999 secs.  
Default value = 1sec.  
Caution: If the duration is less than this time, the alarm will not activate no matter how fast  
the rate of rise.  
Also refer to: Alarm Hysteresis, Alarm Types and Rate Of Change Alarm.  
Modbus RTU  
Modbus RTU is the serial communications protocol used on instruments fitted with the  
RS485 Communications module into Option Slot A. Alternatively, the Modbus TCP protocol  
is available if the Ethernet Communications Module is fitted.  
Modbus RTU is a Master/Slave protocol. Only the Master may initiate communications. Each  
slave is given a unique address, and the message contains the Modbus address of the  
intended slave. Only this slave will act on the command, even though other devices might  
receive it (an exception is specific broadcast commands sent to address 0 which are acted  
upon by all slaves but not acknowledged).  
The commands can instruct the slave to change a value in one of its registers, or ask it to  
send back one or more values contained in its registers. The Modbus RTU format follows the  
messages with a cyclic redundancy check (CRC) checksum to ensure that the message  
arrives undamaged.  
This instrument can act as a Slave or as a Setpoint Master over RS485. In this mode the unit  
continuously sends it’s setpoint value using Modbus broadcast messages.  
Refer to the Serial Communications and Modbus Parameter sections of this manual for more  
information.  
Also refer to: Modbus TCP, RS485 and Serial Communications.  
Modbus TCP  
Modbus TCP is a version of the Modbus protocol for networks that support the Internet  
Protocol, such as Ethernet. It is available if the Ethernet Communications Module is fitted into  
Option Slot A.  
This instrument can only act as a Slave when using Modbus TCP. A master device initiates  
the communications, and the instrument only acts on the command if it has been sent to its  
IP address. The data model and function calls used by Modbus TCP and RTU are identical;  
only the encapsulation is different. Modbus/TCP does not require a checksum to ensure that  
the message arrives intact.  
Refer to the Serial Communications and Modbus Parameter sections of this manual for more  
information.  
Also refer to: Ethernet, Modbus RTU and Serial Communications.  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Glossary  
Page 147  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                                                         
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Modulating Valve  
A valve that can be positioned anywhere between fully closed and fully open by means of an  
incorporated motor. A typical application would be controlling temperature in a furnace  
heated by gas burners. This instrument can control modulating valves that have a positioning  
circuit. These require proportional (mA or VDC) control signal from a linear output, relative to  
the desired valve position. PI control is used for valve control.  
To directly control the valves ‘open’ and ‘close’ motor windings, a special Valve Motor Drive  
(VMD) controller algorithm is required. This instrument does not currently support this type of  
algorithm.  
Also refer to: Linear Output, PI Control, Proportional Control and Valve Motor Drive Control.  
Multi-Point Scaling  
If the process input is connected to a linear input signal, multi-point scaling can be enabled in  
the Input Configuration sub-menu. This allows the linearization of a non-linear signal.  
The Scale Range Upper & Lower Limits define the values shown when the input is at  
minimum and maximum values, and up to 15 breakpoints can scale input vs. displayed value  
between these limits. It is advisable to concentrate these break points in the area of the  
range that has the greatest amount of non-linearity, or the area of particular interest in the  
application.  
Also refer to: Input Configuration, Linear Input, Process Input, Scale Range Lower Limit and  
Scale Range Upper Limit.  
mVDC  
This stands for millivolt DC. It is used in reference to the linear DC millivolt input ranges.  
Typically, these will be 0 to 50mV or 10 to 50mV  
Also refer to: Auxiliary Input, Input Range, Linear Input, mADC, Process Variable and VDC  
On-Off Control  
When operating in On-Off mode, the control output(s) will turn on or off as the process  
variable crosses the setpoint in a manner similar to a central heating thermostat. Some  
oscillation of the process variable is inevitable when using On-Off control.  
On-Off control can be implemented only with Relay, Triac or SSR driver outputs. On-Off  
operation can be assigned to the Primary output alone (secondary output not present),  
Primary and Secondary outputs or Secondary output only (with the primary Output set for  
time proportional or current proportional control). On-Off Control is selected by setting the  
corresponding proportional band(s) to On-Off.  
Also refer to: On-Off Differential, PID, Process Variable, Primary Proportional Band,  
Secondary Proportional Band, Relay, Setpoint, SSR Driver, Time Proportioning Control and  
Triac.  
On-Off Differential (On-Off Hysteresis)  
A switching differential, centred about the setpoint, when using On-Off control. Relay ‘chatter’  
can be eliminated by proper adjustment of this parameter, but too large a value may increase  
process variable oscillation to unacceptable levels. On-Off differential is also know as  
hysteresis or deadband.  
Settings = 0.1% to 10.0% of input span.  
Default value = 0.5%.  
Also refer to: Input Span, On-Off Control, Process Variable, Relay and Setpoint  
Page 148  
Glossary  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Operation Mode  
The mode used during normal operation of the instrument. It can be accessed from the Main  
Menu, and is the usual mode entered at power-up. The screens shown include a main  
screen with bar-graph, a trend view, information about the process, alarms plus optionally,  
selection of auto/manual control, control output disabling. Recorder and profiler information  
can be displayed if these features are fitted. Up to 50 configuration menu screens can be  
defined with the PC software, and will be shown if the Custom Display mode is enabled in  
the Display Configuration sub-menu.  
Refer to the Operation Mode information in the Configuration & Use section.  
Also refer to: Bar-Graphs, Configuration Mode, Custom Display Mode, Display Configuration,  
Main Menu, Profiler Setup Menu, Recorder Menu. and Trend Display.  
Output Configuration  
A sub-menu of Configuration Mode used to adjust the parameters that relate to the Outputs  
(Linear output type & scaling, output usage and scaling etc).  
Also refer to: Configuration Mode and Linear Output.  
Overlap/Deadband  
The Overlap/Deadband parameter defines the portion of the primary and secondary  
proportional bands over which both outputs are active (called Overlap), or neither is active  
(called Deadband). This is adjustable in the range -20% to +20% of the sum of the two  
proportional bands. Positive values = Overlap, negative values = Deadband.  
Overlap/deadband is applicable if the primary output is set for On-Off control or there is no  
Secondary Output. If the Secondary Output is set for On-Off, this parameter has the effect of  
moving the On-Off Differential band of the Secondary Output to create the overlap or  
deadband. When Overlap/Deadband = OFF, the edge of the Secondary Output Differential  
band coincides with the point at which the Primary Output = 0%.  
The effect of the Overlap/Deadband parameter is shown in the following table  
Settings = -20% to +20%.  
Default value = 0.  
Also refer to: On-Off Differential, On-Off Control, Primary Proportional Band and Secondary  
Proportional Band.  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Glossary  
Page 149  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                                                     
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
OVERLAP  
WITH PID  
Proportional Band 1  
Proportional Band 2  
Output 2  
Output 1  
Output 2  
Output 1  
Process Variable  
Overlap  
(positive value)  
DEADBAND  
WITH PID  
Proportional  
Band 2  
Proportional  
Band 1  
Output 1  
Output 2  
Output 2  
Output 1  
Process Variable  
Deadband  
(negative value)  
Proportional  
Band 1  
OVERLAP &  
DEADBAND  
WITH ON/OFF  
Proportional Band 2 = 0  
Output 1  
Output 2  
Output 2  
Output 1  
Process Variable  
ON/OFF Differential  
Positive values Negative values  
Overlap/Dead  
.
Figure 51. Overlap/Deadband  
Page 150  
Glossary  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
PD Control  
Proportional and Derivative (PD) control combines proportional control with derivative action.  
It is similar to PID control, but without Integral action.  
Also refer to: Derivative, Integral, PID Control, Proportional Control and Tuning.  
PI Control  
Proportional and Integral Control (PI) is most often used for modulating valve or motor  
control. It combines proportional control with integral action. It is similar to PID Control, but  
without derivative action that can cause excessive valve movement.  
Also refer to: Derivative, Integral, Modulating Valve, PID Control, Proportional Control and  
Tuning.  
PID Control  
Proportional Integral and Derivative control maintains accurate and stable levels in a process  
(e.g. when controlling a temperature). Proportional Control avoids the oscillation  
characteristic of On-Off control by continuously adjusting the correcting variable output(s) to  
keep the process variable stable. Integral action eliminates control deviation errors, and  
Derivative action counters rapid process movements.  
Also refer to: Control Action, Control Deviation, Control Enable, Control Type, Controller,  
Correcting Variable, Derivative Action, Integral Action, Manual Mode, On-Off Control, PD  
Control, PI Control, Primary Proportional Band, Process Variable, Secondary Proportional  
Band, Setpoint and Tuning.  
PLC  
This stands for Programmable Logic Controller. A microprocessor based device used in  
machine control. It is particularly suited to sequential control applications, and uses “Ladder  
Logic” programming techniques. Some PLC’s are capable of basic PID control, but tend to  
be expensive and often give inferior levels of control.  
Also refer to: PID.  
Pre-Tune  
The Pre-Tune facility artificially disturbs the start-up pattern so that a first approximation of  
the PID values can be made prior to the setpoint being reached. During Pre-Tune, the  
controller outputs full Primary Power until the process value has moved approximately  
halfway to the setpoint. At that point, power is removed (or full Secondary Power is applied  
for Dual Control), thereby introducing an oscillation. Once the oscillation peak has passed,  
the Pre-Tune algorithm calculates an approximation of the optimum PID tuning terms  
proportional band(s), integral and derivative. The Pre-Tune process is shown in the diagram  
on the next page.  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Glossary  
Page 151  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                   
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Setpoint  
Process Variable  
SP – Initial PV  
2
Initial PV  
+100% Power (HEAT output)  
Pre-Tune  
engaged  
here  
Control Power  
-100% Power (Cool output)  
Figure 52. Pre-Tune Operation  
When Pre-Tune is completed, the PID control output power is applied using the calculated  
values. Pre-Tune limits the possibility of setpoint overshoot when the controller is new or the  
application has been changed.  
Pre-Tune can be selected from the Automatic Tuning Menu. It will not engage if either  
primary or secondary outputs on a controller are set for On-Off control, during setpoint/profile  
ramping or if the process variable is less than 5% of the input span from the setpoint. As a  
single-shot operation, Pre-Tune will automatically disengage once complete, but can be  
configured to run at every power up using the Auto Pre-Tune function.  
Also refer to: Auto Pre-Tune, Control Type, Derivative Action, On-Off Control, Input Span, ,  
Integral, PID, Primary Proportional Band, Process Variable, Secondary Proportional Band,  
Self-Tune, Setpoint, Setpoint Ramping, and Tuning.  
Power Output Limits  
Used to limit the power levels of the primary and secondary control outputs. Normally the  
instrument can set these outputs to any value between 0% and 100%. If this is undesirable in  
a particular application, individual settings can limit the primary power upper and lower levels  
and the secondary power upper and lower levels. The upper limit values must be higher than  
the lower limits. These parameters are not applicable if that output is set for On-Off control.  
Use with caution: The instrument will not be able to control the process if the limits do not  
allow the outputs to be set to the correct values to maintain setpoint.  
Lower Limit settings = 0% and 100%  
Default Value = 0%.  
Upper Limit settings = 0% and 100%  
Default Value = 100%.  
Also refer to: Control Type, On-Off Control and Setpoint.  
Page 152  
Glossary  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Primary Proportional Band  
The portion of the input span over which the Primary Output power level is proportional to the  
process variable value. Applicable if Control Type is single or dual. For dual control a  
Secondary Proportional band is used for the second output. The Control Action can be Direct  
or Reverse acting.  
Settings = On-Off Control or 0.5% to 999.9%  
Default Value = 10%.  
Also refer to: Control Action, Control Type, On-Off Control, Input Span, Overlap/Deadband,  
PID, Secondary Proportional Band, and Tuning.  
Process High Alarm n Value  
An independent high alarm value parameter is available for each alarm that is set as Process  
High type. It defines the process variable value above which Alarm n will be active.  
Settings = Scale Range Upper to Lower Limit  
Default Value = Scale Range Upper Limit.  
Also refer to: Alarm Operation, Alarm Types, Process Variable, Scale Range Lower Limit and  
Scale Range Upper Limit.  
Process Input  
The main input used to monitor the value process to be controlled. This is known as the  
Process Variable or PV. The input circuit is a “Universal” type, supporting all common  
thermocouples and PT100 RTDs as well as DC linear mV, voltage or mA signals suitable for  
almost any parameter that can be converted into a electronic signal. Linear signals can be  
scaled into engineering units using the Scale Range Lower Limit and Scale Range Upper  
Limit parameters.  
Also refer to: Auxiliary Inputs, Engineering Units, Input Span, PV Offset, Process Variable ,  
Scale Range Lower Limit and Scale Range Upper Limit.  
Process Low Alarm n Value  
An independent low alarm value parameter is available for each alarm that is set as Process  
Low type. It defines the process variable value below which Alarm n will be active.  
Settings = Scale Range Upper to Lower Limit  
Default Value = Scale Range Lower Limit.  
Also refer to: Alarm Operation, Alarm Types, Process Variable, Scale Range Lower Limit and  
Scale Range Upper Limit.  
Process Variable (PV)  
Process Variable is the parameter that is to be controlled. It is monitored by the main process  
input of the instrument, and can be any type that can be measured by that circuit. Common  
types are Thermocouple or RTD temperature probes, or pressure, level, flow etc from  
transducers that convert these parameters into DC linear input signals (e.g. 4 to 20mA).  
Linear signals can be scaled into engineering units using the Scale Range Lower Limit and  
Scale Range Upper Limit parameters.  
Also refer to: Actual Setpoint, Engineering Units, Input Span, Linear Input, Process Input,  
RTD, Scale Range Lower Limit, Scale Range Upper Limit and Thermocouple.  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Glossary  
Page 153  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Process Variable Offset  
The Process variable offset is used to modify the measured process variable value. Use this  
parameter to compensate for errors in the displayed process variable. Positive values are  
added to the process variable reading, negative values are subtracted. Caution: This  
parameter is in effect, a calibration adjustment; it must be used with care. Injudicious use  
could lead to the displayed value bearing no meaningful relationship to the actual process  
variable. There is no front panel indication of when this parameter is in use.  
Settings = ±input span  
Default Value = Off.  
Also refer to: Input Span and Process Variable.  
Profile Control Menu  
If the Profiler option is fitted, a Profile Control menu is available from the Main Menu. It allows  
the user to select or run a profile, and then control that profile (run, hold, abort, skip to next  
segment etc.).  
Refer to the Profiler Control Menu information in the Configuration & Use section.  
Also refer to: Main Menu, Profile Setup Menu, Profiler and Profiler Mode.  
Profile Events  
Events are outputs that can be made active during profile segments. There are 5 possible  
events, each of which can be defined to be active or inactive for the duration of each  
segment, from the Profile Setup Menu. For end segments, events selected to be active stay  
on until the unit is powered down or a new profile runs. It is possible to link event outputs to  
certain alarm outputs in a logical AND situation.  
Also refer to: Alarm Types, Logical Combinations, Profile Segments, Profile Setup Menu,  
Profiler and Profiler Mode  
Profile Header  
The profile header contains information about how the profile starts and stops, the power  
loss recovery action and if the profile should repeat multiple times when run.  
Refer to the Profile Components information in the Profiler Option section of this manual.  
Also refer to: Profile Segments, Profile Setup Menu, Profiler and Profiler Mode.  
Profile Segments  
Segments can be ramps, dwells, steps or special segments such as holds, ends or joins. A  
maximum of 255 segments are possible, shared amongst up to 64 profiles.  
Refer to the Profile Components information in the Profiler Option section of this manual.  
Also refer to: Profile Events, Profile Setup Menu, Profiler and Profiler Mode.  
Profile Setup Menu  
If the Profiler option is fitted, a Profile Setup menu is available from the Main Menu. It allows  
the user to set the General Profile Configuration parameters that apply to all profiles (e.g.  
Run/hold and abort methods etc), and to create or edit the Profile Header and Profile  
Segment Details. Profiles can also be deleted from this menu. This menu is protected by a  
lock code.  
Refer to the Profiler Setup Menu information in the Configuration & Use section.  
Also refer to: Lock Codes, Profile Control Menu, Profile Header, Profile Segments, Profiler  
and Profiler Mode.  
Page 154  
Glossary  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                                                                                                                 
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Profiler  
A profiler controls the value of the actual setpoint over time; increasing, decreasing or  
holding its value as required. This is used in applications where the rate of rise or fall of the  
process variable must be closely controlled, or where a value must be maintained for a  
period before moving to the next value.  
If the Profiler option is fitted, up to 64 profiles can be created with a maximum of 255 profile  
segments shared amongst them. Each segment can activate/deactivate the five events  
according to the requirements of the process.  
Refer to the Profiler Option section.  
Also refer to: Actual Setpoint, Controller Mode, Profile Events, Profile Control Menu, Profile  
Header, Profile Segments, Profile Setup Menu and Profiler Mode.  
Profiler Mode  
This mode is entered when a profile is run. In profiler mode, additional screens are added to  
Operation Mode which show the status of the profile. These screens are not seen in  
Controller Mode. The instrument will remain in Profiler Mode when the profile finishes or is  
aborted unless the Segment End Type/Profile Abort Action is set to “Use Controller Setpoint”.  
Also refer to: Controller Mode, Profile Control Menu, Profile Segments, Profile Setup Menu,  
Profiler and Setpoint.  
Proportional Control  
Proportional control allows the correcting variable applied to the process to be set between 0  
and 100% of the amount available. If the control type is dual, two outputs (primary &  
secondary) are available, each of which can give proportional control. When the Proportional  
Band(s) are correctly tuned, the process variable is maintained at a steady value, avoiding  
the oscillation characteristic of On-Off control. Proportional control is most commonly used in  
conjunction with Integral and Derivative action to give PI. PD or PID control.  
Also refer to: Control Type, Correcting Variable, Derivative Action, Integral Action, On-Off  
Control, PD, PI, PID, Primary Proportional Band, Process Variable, Secondary Proportional  
Band, Setpoint and Tuning.  
Rate  
-
Refer to Derivative Action.  
Rate Of Change Alarm  
An alarm based on the rate of change in the measured process variable. If the PV changes  
at a rate greater than the alarm level, the alarm will activate. The rate of change must be  
above the alarm threshold for longer than the Minimum Duration Of Change time, before the  
alarm will change state (from on to off, or off to on). Caution: If the duration is less than this  
time, the alarm will not activate no matter how fast the rate of rise.  
Also refer to: Alarm Hysteresis, Alarm Operation, Alarm Types, Minimum Duration Of  
Change and Process Variable.  
Recorder Configuration  
If the Data Recorder is fitted, a Recorder Configuration sub-menu is added to Configuration  
Mode. This is used to adjust the recorder parameters (Recording mode, sample interval,  
trigger and values to record) and to show the recorder status.  
Also refer to: Configuration Mode, and Data Recorder  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Glossary  
Page 155  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                                                                                                                                                                           
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Recorder Option  
- Refer to Data Recorder.  
Recorder Menu  
If the Data Recorder is fitted, a Recorder Menu is added to the Main Menu. This is used to  
control the recording (start, stop, delete recordings etc) and to show the recorder status. This  
menu is protected by a lock code.  
Refer to the Recorder Menu information in the Configuration & Use section.  
Also refer to: Lock Codes, Main Menu and Data Recorder  
Relay  
An electromechanical switch operated by a solenoid coil. Relays are commonly fitted as  
internal, time proportioning controller outputs. The limited current capacity and switching  
cycles of internal relays means that they are usually connected to larger external slave  
relays/contactors which are capable of switching much larger currents and are easily  
replaced once worn out. A suitably rated RC snubber should be connected to relays to  
protect nearby equipment from the effects of noise generated as they switch (refer to the  
Noise Suppression details in the Electrical Installation section).  
Also refer to: Current Proportioning Control, Latching Relay, SSR Driver, Time Proportioning  
Control and Triac  
Remote Setpoint (RSP)  
If the alternative setpoint type is selected to be a remote setpoint, and the selected setpoint  
is the alternative setpoint, an Auxiliary Input value is used to adjust the controller setpoint.  
The auxiliary linear input, is given a VDC or mADC signal, or in some cases potentiometer or  
mV inputs. The Remote Setpoint value is constrained by the Setpoint Upper Limit and  
Setpoint Lower Limit settings. Typical applications are Setpoint and Cascade Control Slaves.  
Also refer to: Alternative Setpoint, Auxiliary Input, Auxiliary Input Lower Limit, Auxiliary Input  
Type, Auxiliary Input Upper Limit, Cascade Control, Linear Input, Local Setpoints, Master &  
Slave, mADC, mVDC, Setpoint and Setpoint Select, and VDC.  
Retransmit Output  
A linear VDC or mADC output signal, proportional to the Process Variable or Setpoint, for  
use by slave controllers or external devices, such as a Chart Recorder or PLC. The output  
can be scaled to transmit any portion of the input or setpoint span.  
Also refer to: Input Span, Linear Output, mADC, Master & Slave, PLC, Process Variable,  
Retransmit Output Scale Maximum, Retransmit Scale Minimum, Setpoint and VDC.  
Retransmit Output n Scale Maximum  
Scales a linear output module in slot n if it has been selected to retransmit the PV or SP.  
Retransmit Scale Maximum defines the value of the process variable, or setpoint, at which  
the output will be at its maximum value. E.g. for a 0 to 5V output, it is the PV or SP value  
corresponding to 5V. If this parameter is set to a value less than that for Retransmit Output n  
Scale Minimum, the relationship between the process variable/setpoint value and the  
retransmission output is reversed so that higher PV/SP values give a lower output level.  
Settings = -1999 to 9999  
Default value = Scale Range Upper Limit.  
Also refer to: Process Variable, Retransmit Output, Retransmit Output n Scale Minimum,  
Scale Range Upper Limit and Setpoint.  
Page 156  
Glossary  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                                                                                                                                                     
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Retransmit Output n Scale Minimum  
Scales a linear output module in slot n if it has been selected to retransmit the PV or SP.  
Retransmit Scale Minimum defines the value of the process variable, or setpoint, at which  
the output will be at its minimum value. E.g. for a 0 to 5V output, it is the PV or SP value  
corresponding to 0V. If this parameter is set to a value greater than that for Retransmit n  
Output Scale Maximum, the relationship between the process variable/setpoint value and the  
retransmission output is reversed so that higher PV/SP values give a lower output level.  
Settings = -1999 to 9999  
Default value = Scale Range Lower Limit.  
Also refer to: Process Variable, Retransmit Output, Retransmit Output n Scale Maximum,  
Scale Range Lower Limit and Setpoint.  
Reset To Defaults  
This Configuration sub-menu selection returns all of the instruments settings back to their  
factory defaults. It should be used with great care, as the action cannot be undone. A reset is  
followed automatically by the Setup Wizard. Users must use this wizard and/or configuration  
menus to set all of the parameters to the correct values for the intended application.  
Also refer to: Configuration Menu, and Setup Wizard  
Reverse Acting Control  
Reverse control action is required for applications where the primary control output will be  
used to force the process variable up towards the setpoint. A typical application is a furnace.  
When the control action is selected as reverse acting, primary proportional control outputs  
decrease the correcting variable as the process variable increases within the proportional  
band, and primary On-Off outputs turn off when the process variable exceeds the setpoint.  
The control action of a secondary output is always the opposite of the primary output.  
Also refer to: Control Action, Control Type, Correcting Variable, Direct Acting Control, On-Off  
Control and Proportional Control.  
RS485  
RS485 (also known as EIA-485) is two-wire, half-duplex, multi-drop serial communications  
connection. RS485 only defines the physical layer electrical specification, not the protocol  
that is transmitted across it. It uses differential signals (the voltage difference between the  
wires) to convey data. One polarity indicates a logic 1, the reverse polarity indicates logic 0.  
The applied voltages can be between +12 V and -7 volts, but the difference of potential must  
be > 0.2 volts for valid operation. RS485 can span distances up to 1200 metres using  
inexpensive twisted pair wires. Data speeds can be as high as 35 Mbit/s over 10 m and 100  
kbit/s at 1200 m.  
It is recommended that the wires be connected as series of point-to-point (multi-dropped)  
nodes (not in a star or ring format), with 120ohm termination resistors connected across the  
wires at the two ends of the network. Without termination resistors, reflections of the signals  
can cause data corruption, and electrical noise sensitivity is increased. The master device  
should normally provide powered resistors, to bias the wires to known voltages when they  
are not being driven by any device. Without biasing resistors, the data lines float and noise  
can be interpreted as data when actually all devices are silent.  
Converters between RS485 and other formats are available to allow computers to  
communicate with remote devices. Repeaters can also be used to extend the distance  
and/or number of nodes on a network.  
Also refer to: Modbus RTU, and Serial Communications  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Glossary  
Page 157  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                                                                     
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
RTD  
Resistance Temperature Detector. A temperature sensor that changes resistance with a  
change in the measured temperature. This instruments process input supports PT100  
(platinum, 100Ω at 0°C) and NI120 (nickel, 120Ω at 0°C) sensors. These have positive  
temperature coefficients (PTC) which means their resistance increases with higher  
temperatures. The temperature measured by the sensor can be displayed as °C; °F or °K.  
Also refer to: Input Range, Process Input and Thermocouple.  
Scale Range Upper Limit  
For linear inputs, this parameter is used to scale the displayed process variable. It defines  
the displayed value when the process variable input is at its maximum value (e.g. if 4 to  
20mA represents 0 to 14pH, this parameter should be set to 14). The value can be set  
anywhere from -1999 to 9999 and can be set to a value less than (but not within 100 LSDs  
of) the Scale Range Lower Limit, in which case the sense of the input is reversed.  
Settings = -1999 to 9999  
Default value = 1000.  
For thermocouple and RTD inputs, this parameter is used to reduce the effective span of the  
input. All span related functions work from the trimmed input span. The parameter can be  
adjusted within the limits of the range, but not less than 100 LSD’s above the Scale Range  
Lower Limit.  
Settings = Range Max to Min.  
Default value = Max value of selected temperature range).  
Also refer to: Engineering Units, Input Range, Input Span, LSD, Process Variable and Scale  
Range Lower Limit.  
Scale Range Lower Limit  
For linear inputs, this parameter is used to scale the displayed process variable. It defines  
the displayed value when the process variable input is at its minimum value (e.g. if 4 to 20mA  
represents 0 to 14pH, this parameter should be set to 0). The value can be set from -1999 to  
9999 and can be set to a value higher than (but not within 100 LSDs of) the Scale Range  
Upper Limit, in which case the sense of the input is reversed.  
Settings = -1999 to 9999  
Default value = 0.  
For thermocouple and RTD inputs, this parameter is used to reduce the effective range of the  
input. All span related functions work from the trimmed input span. The parameter can be  
adjusted within the limits of the range, but not less than 100 LSD’s below the Scale Range  
Upper Limit.  
Settings = Range Max to Min.  
Default value = Min value of selected temperature range).  
Also refer to: Engineering Units, Input Range, Input Span, LSD, Process Variable and Scale  
Range Upper Limit.  
Secondary Proportional Band  
The portion of the input span over which the Secondary Output power level is proportional to  
the process variable value. The Control action for the Secondary Output is always the  
opposite of the Primary output. The Secondary Proportional Band is only applicable when  
Dual Control Type is used.  
Settings = On-Off Control or 0.5% to 999.9%  
Default Value = 10%.  
Also refer to: Control Action, Control Type, On-Off Control, Input Span, Overlap/Deadband,  
PID, Primary Proportional Band and Tuning.  
Page 158  
Glossary  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                                                                                                                                                                                                               
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Self-Tune  
Self-Tune continuously optimises tuning while a controller is operating. It uses a pattern  
recognition algorithm, which monitors the control deviation. The diagram shows a typical  
application involving a process start up, setpoint change and load disturbance.  
Setpoint 2  
Load Disturbance  
Setpoint 1  
Setpoint Change  
Time  
Figure 53. Self-Tune Operation  
The deviation signal is shown shaded, and overshoots have been exaggerated for clarity.  
The Self-Tune algorithm observes one complete deviation oscillation before calculating a  
new set of PID values. Successive deviation oscillations cause the values to be recalculated  
so that the controller converges on optimal control. When the controller is switched off, these  
PID terms are stored, and are used as starting values at the next switch on. The stored  
values may not always be ideal, if for instance the controller is brand new or the application  
has changed. In these cases, the user can utilise Pre-Tune to establish new initial values.  
Self-Tune will then fine-tune these values as it monitors any control deviation.  
Use of continuous self-tuning is not always appropriate. For example applications which are  
frequently subjected to artificial load disturbances, for example where an oven door is likely  
to be frequently left open for extended periods, can lead to errors in the calculations. In  
addition, because Self-Tune tunes for full PID control, it is not recommended for valve control  
applications, which normally require PI control.  
Self-Tune cannot be engaged if the instrument is set for On-Off Control.  
Also refer to: Control Deviation, Modulating Valves. On-Off Control, Pre-Tune, PI, PID,  
Setpoint and Tuning.  
Sensor Break Pre-Set Power  
If a thermocouple or RTD breaks, or it is disconnected, the instrument detects this condition  
within 2 seconds, and sets the control output(s) to the value defined by the Sensor Break  
Pre-Set Power Output parameter in the Control Configuration sub-menu. Process alarms  
behave as though the PV has gone high.  
Non-zero based linear inputs (e.g. 2 to10V or 4 to 20mA, but not 0 to 20mA) can also detect  
a sensor break condition, setting the power to the Pre-Set Power value. Process alarms  
behave as though the PV has gone low.  
Also refer to: Input Range, Linear Input, RTD and Thermocouple.  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Glossary  
Page 159  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                                                                 
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Serial Communications Configuration  
A sub-menu of Configuration Mode used to adjust the serial communications parameters.  
(Addressing, data rate, parity, master/slave settings and write enabling).  
Also refer to: Configuration Mode, Serial Communications  
Serial Communications Option  
A feature that allows other devices such as PC’s, PLC’s or a master controller to read, or  
change the instruments parameters via an RS485 or Ethernet network.  
Full details can be found in the Serial Communications sections of this manual.  
Also refer to: Ethernet, Master & Slave, Modbus RTU, Modbus TCP, PLC, RS485 and Serial  
Communications Configuration.  
Setpoint  
The target value at which the instrument attempts to maintain the process variable, by  
adjusting its control output power (the correcting variable). There can be either one or two  
setpoints. Local Setpoint 1 and/or an Alternative Setpoint. The Alternative Setpoint can be  
chosen from Local Setpoint 2 or a remote setpoint input from Auxiliary Input A or B if either of  
these is fitted. One setpoint can be chosen as active using the defined Setpoint Selection  
method. Setpoint values are limited by the Setpoint Upper Limit and Setpoint Lower Limits.  
Also refer to: Alternative Setpoint, Auxiliary Input, Correcting Variable, Local Setpoints,  
Process Variable, Remote Setpoint, Scale Range Lower Limit, Setpoint Lower Limit, Setpoint  
Upper Limit and Setpoint Select  
Setpoint Upper Limit  
The maximum value allowed for setpoints. It should be set to keep the setpoint below a value  
that might cause damage to the process. The adjustment range is between Scale Range  
Upper Limit and the Setpoint Lower Limit. If the value is moved below the current value of a  
setpoint, that setpoint will automatically adjust to keep within bounds.  
Settings = Within Input Span  
Default Value = Scale Range Upper Limit  
Also refer to: Input Span, Scale Range Upper Limit, Setpoint and Setpoint Lower Limit.  
Setpoint Lower Limit  
The minimum value allowed for setpoints. It should be set to keep the setpoint above a value  
that might cause damage to the process. The adjustment range is between the Setpoint  
Upper Limit and the Scale Range Lower Limit. If the value is moved above the current value  
a setpoint, that setpoint will automatically adjust to keep within bounds.  
Settings = Within Input Span  
Default Value = Scale Range Lower Limit  
Also refer to: Input Span, Scale Range Lower Limit, Setpoint and Setpoint Upper Limit.  
Setpoint Ramp Editing  
Enables or disables the viewing and adjustment of the setpoint ramp rate in Operation Mode.  
This parameter does not disable the ramping SP feature; it merely removes it from Operation  
Mode. It can still be viewed and adjusted in the Control Configuration sub-menu. To turn off  
ramping, the ramp rate must be set to OFF.  
Settings = Enabled or Disabled  
Default Value = Disabled  
Also refer to: Control Configuration, Operation Mode, Process Variable, Setpoint and  
Setpoint Ramp Rate.  
Page 160  
Glossary  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                             
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Setpoint Ramp Rate  
The rate at which the actual setpoint value will move towards its target value, when the  
setpoint value is adjusted or the active setpoint is changed. With ramping in use, the initial  
value of the actual setpoint at power up, or when switching back to automatic mode from  
manual control, will be equal to the current process variable value. The actual setpoint will  
rise/fall at the ramp rate set, until it reaches the target setpoint value. Setpoint ramping is  
used to protect the process from sudden changes in the setpoint, which would result in a  
rapid rise in the process variable.  
Settings = 1 to 9999 LSDs per hour.  
Default Value = OFF  
Also refer to: Active Setpoint, Actual Setpoint, LSD, Manual Mode, Process Variable,  
Setpoint, Setpoint Ramp Editing and Setpoint Selection.  
Setpoint Selection  
There can be either one or two setpoints. These can be Local Setpoint 1 or an Alternative  
Setpoint chosen from either Local Setpoint 2 or a remote setpoint input from Auxiliary Input A  
or B if these are fitted. The Setpoint Select parameter in the control sub-menu defines  
whether the Active Setpoint will be the Local Setpoint 1 only, the Alternative Setpoint only or  
if the choice of active setpoint will be made from a digital input or an Operation Mode  
selection screen.  
Also refer to: Active Setpoint, Alternative Setpoint, Auxiliary Input, Digital Input, Local  
Setpoints, Remote Setpoint, Setpoint.  
Setup Wizard  
A sub-set of the Configuration Menu parameters chosen to allow inexperienced users to  
easily set the instrument up for most simple applications. The parameters shown depend on  
the options installed.  
The Setup Wizard runs automatically at first ever power-up or whenever a Reset To Defaults  
is carried out. A partial Wizard also runs whenever option modules have been changed. The  
partial wizard only shows parameters affected by the changes made. The full Setup Wizard  
can also be run manually from the Main Menu (this requires entry of an un-lock code).  
Once completed, the Setup Wizard exits to Operation Mode.  
Experts or users with more complex applications should select the parameters they wish to  
set-up from the Configuration Menus instead of using the Wizard.  
Refer to the Setup Wizard information in the Configuration & Use section.  
Also refer to: Lock Codes, Configuration Menu, Main Menu, Operation Mode and Reset To  
Defaults.  
Solid State Relay (SSR)  
An external device manufactured using two Silicone Controlled Rectifiers in reverse parallel.  
They can be used to replace mechanical relays in most AC power applications. Some special  
SSRs can switch DC, but most cannot. As a solid-state device, an SSR does not suffer from  
contact degradation when switching electrical current. Much faster switching cycle times are  
also possible, leading to superior control. The instrument’s SSR Driver output provides a  
time-proportioned 10VDC pulse for to the SSRs signal input terminals. This causes  
conduction of current from the line supply through the SSR to the load, when the pulse is on.  
Also refer to: Cycle Time, Time Proportioning Control, Relay, and Triac.  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Glossary  
Page 161  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                                                                                                                           
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Solenoid Valve  
An electromechanical device, use to control the flow of gases or liquids. It has just two  
states, open or closed. Usually, a spring holds the valve closed until a current is passed  
through the solenoid coil forces it open. Standard process controllers with time-proportioned  
or On-Off outputs can be used to control these types of valves.  
Solenoid valves are often used with high/low flame gas burners. A bypass supplies some gas  
at all times, but not enough to heat the process more than a nominal amount (low flame). A  
controller output opens the solenoid valve when the process requires additional heat (high  
flame).  
Also refer to: Modulating Valves, On-Off Control and Time Proportioning Control.  
Supervisor Mode  
Supervisor Mode allows access to a lock code protected sub-set of the main configuration  
parameters. The unlock code is different from the higher level Configuration Menu unlock  
code. Up to 50 Configuration Menu parameters can be chosen for inclusion in Supervisor  
Mode using the PC configuration software. If none have been chosen, this mode is disabled.  
Refer to the Supervisor Mode information in the Configuration & Use section.  
Also refer to: Configuration Menu and Lock Codes  
Thermocouple  
A temperature sensor made from two different metals. They convert temperature difference  
between their cold junction (the measuring instrument) and the hot junction, into a small  
signal or a few microvolts per °C. Thermocouples are cheap and interchangeable, but the  
wires and connectors used must match the metals used in their construction. They can  
measure a wide range of temperatures; some thermocouples can withstand very high  
temperatures such as furnaces. The main limitation of thermocouples is accuracy.  
The temperature measured by the thermocouple can be displayed as °C; °F or °K.  
The colour codes for the common types are shown in the Thermocouple Wire Identification  
Chart in the Electrical Installation Section of this manual.  
Also refer to: Engineering Units, Input Range, Process Input and RTD.  
Three Point Stepping Control  
Modulating valves normally require a special “Three Point Stepping” control algorithm. This  
which provides an output to move the valve further open, or further closed whenever there is  
a control deviation error. When this error is zero, no further output is required to maintain  
control unless load conditions change. This type of controller is often called a Valve Motor  
Drive controller. This instrument does not currently have a three point stepping algorithm.  
However, modulating valves that have a valve positioning circuitry to adjust the valve position  
from a DC linear mA or voltage output signal can be controlled.  
Also refer to: Control Deviation, Linear Output, Modulating Valve, and Valve Motor Control  
Page 162  
Glossary  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                                                       
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Time Proportioning Control  
Time proportioning control is accomplished by cycling the output on and off during the  
prescribed cycle time, whenever the process variable is within the proportional band(s). The  
PID control algorithm determines the ratio of time (on vs. off) to achieve the level of the  
correcting variable required to remove the control deviation error. E.g. for a 32 second cycle  
time, 25% power would result in the output turning on for 8 seconds, then off to 24 seconds.  
This type of output might be used with electrical contactors, solid state relays or solenoid  
valves. Time proportioning control can be implemented with Relay, Triac or SSR Driver  
outputs for either primary or secondary outputs.  
Also refer to: Control Deviation, Correcting Variable, Current Proportioning Control, Cycle  
Time, PID, Primary Proportional Band, Relay, Secondary Proportional Band, Solenoid Valve,  
SSR and Triac.  
Trend Display  
Trend View is a graphical representation of recent process conditions. This feature is  
available on all variants. It does not rely on the Data Recorder option, and does not retain the  
stored data if the power is turned off. The trend shows the most recent 120 out of 240 stored  
data points. Its scale adjusts automatically for the best resolution for the visible data. This  
data can be the process variable; process variable & setpoint (shown as a doted line), or the  
minimum and maximum value of the process variable measured since the last sample. Any  
active alarm(s) are indicated above the graph. The user can scroll the right hand cursor line  
back to examine all 240 data points. The sample interval and data to display is set in Display  
Configuration.  
Also refer to: Alarm Types, Display Configuration, Operation Mode, and Process Variable,  
Setpoint.  
Tuning  
PID Controllers must be tuned to the process in order for them to attain the optimum level of  
control. Adjustment is made to the tuning terms either manually, or by utilising the controller’s  
automatic tuning facilities. Tuning is not required if the controller is configured for On-Off  
Control.  
Also refer to: Auto Pre-Tune, Controller, Derivative Action, Integral Action, On-Off control,  
PID, Pre-Tune, Primary Proportional Band, Self-Tune, Secondary Proportional Band and  
Tuning Menu.  
Tuning Menu  
The Tuning Menu can be accessed from the Main Menu. This menu is lock code protected.  
It gives access to the Pre-tune, Auto Pre-Tune and Self-tune facilities. These assist with PID  
tuning, by setting up Proportional band(s), Integral and Derivative parameter values. Tuning  
is not required for On-Off control.  
Pre-tune can be used to set PID parameters approximately. Self-tune may then be used to  
optimise the tuning if required. Pre-tune can be set to run automatically after every power-up  
by enabling Auto Pre-Tune.  
Refer to the Automatic Tuning information in the Configuration & Use section.  
Also refer to: Auto Pre-Tune, Derivative Action, Integral Action, Lock Codes, Main Menu, On-  
Off control, PID, Pre-Tune, Primary Proportional Band, Self-Tune, Secondary Proportional  
Band and Tuning Menu.  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Glossary  
Page 163  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                                                                                                                 
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Triac  
A small internal solid state relay, which can be used in place of a mechanical relay in  
applications switching low power AC, up to 1 amp. Like a relay, the output is time  
proportioned, but much faster switching cycle times are also possible, leading to superior  
control. As a solid-state device, a Triac does not suffer from contact degradation when  
switching electrical currents. A snubber should be fitted across inductive loads to ensure  
reliable switch off the Triac. A triac cannot be used to switch DC power.  
Also refer to: Cycle Time, Relay, SSR and Time Proportioning Control.  
USB Menu  
If the USB option is fitted, the USB Menu can be accessed from the Main Menu. This menu  
is lock code protected.  
The USB Menu allows the user to read or write files to a USB memory stick. The current  
configuration of the instrument can be downloaded to the stick or the instrument can be  
completely reconfigured using a pre-stored file that has been downloaded earlier, created  
using the PC software, or even taken from another instrument.  
If the Data Recorder option is present, the recordings can be downloaded to the stick for  
transport to the users PC for analysis. If the Profiler option is present, profiles can be  
downloaded to the stick or upload to the instrument using a pre-stored file that was  
downloaded earlier, created using the PC software, or even taken from another instrument.  
Refer to the USB Menu information in the Configuration & Use section.  
Also refer to: Data Recorder, Lock Codes, Main Menu and Profiler  
Valve Motor Drive Control (VMD)  
This instrument can only control modulating valves that have a valve positioning circuitry that  
adjusts the valve position according to the level a DC linear mA or voltage output signal.  
Such valves normally require PI control instead of full PID.  
Motorised modulating valves that do not have this type of circuit require special Valve Motor  
Drive controllers which have a “Three Point Stepping” control algorithm.  
Solenoid valves can also be controlled using the standard PID algorithm as they behave in a  
similar way to relays, having just two states, open or closed.  
Also refer to: Control Deviation, Linear Output, Modulating Valve, PI Control, PID, Relay,  
Solenoid Valve, and Three Point Stepping Control.  
VDC  
This stands for Volts DC. It is used in reference to the linear DC Voltage input ranges.  
Typically, these will be 0 to 5V, 1 to 5V, 0 to 10V or 2 to 10VDC. Linear outputs can also  
provide DC voltages.  
Also refer to: Auxiliary Input, Input Range, Linear Input, Linear Output, mADC and mVDC..  
VMD  
- Refer to Valve Motor Control.  
Page 164  
Glossary  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                                                                                       
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
16 PC SOFTWARE  
The primary function of the software is to create, download and store instrument  
configurations and profiles. Additionally, changes can be made to the operation of the  
instrument; adding extra screens into Operation Mode, enabling and configuring Supervisor  
Mode, changing the contact details or the function of the front LED’s. The software can also  
be used to download a new language file or to change the start-up “splash screen”. An on-  
screen simulation of the instrument can be setup and tested on a configurable load simulator.  
A additional software tool is available to set the IP address required for the Modbus TCP  
communications option - refer to the IP Address Configuration section.  
Using The Software  
The menus and button bar are used to select the main parameter screen or one of the other  
modes or functions. Hover the mouse over the parameter description or value to view a fuller  
description. Consult the comprehensive help (available from the Help Menu) for information  
about the general software functions.  
Menus  
Button Bar  
Parameter Address (hex) Parameter Values  
Functional Groups Mode Drop Down  
Description  
Value Range  
Figure 54. Main Parameter Screen  
The main parameter screen is used to change all of the configuration and other settings. This  
screen also allows access to the Supervisor and Enhanced Operation Mode configuration  
screens from the Mode drop-down list. The Button bar or Device and View menus are used  
to access the other software functions.  
View & Device Menus  
Instrument Simulation  
Parameter Configuration  
Profile Editor Trend  
Figure 55. Button Bar & View Menu  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
PC Software  
Page 165  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                             
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Instrument Configuration  
When creating a new configuration with the  
software, the basic instrument type and the  
options to be fitted to it must be defined in the  
Device Selection screen. You can select these  
from the drop down lists or by typing the full  
model number in the Order number field.  
Note:  
It is important that the options selected match  
those fitted to your unit.  
Alternatively the complete instrument type and existing configuration can be uploaded to the  
PC from your instrument, via the configuration socket or serial communications module. A  
previously saved configuration file can also be opened from the file open menu or button.  
Once the required changes have been made, the configuration can then be download to the  
instrument or saved to disk with a .bct file extension. The configuration file contains the  
device information and configuration parameter settings, including any supervisor and  
enhanced operation mode screens and changes to the LED functions. Profiles, splash  
screens and language files are not saved in the .bct file. They are uploaded/saved  
separately.  
A hard copy of the instrument configuration and terminal wiring can be printed from the File |  
Print menu.  
Parameter configuration  
The main parameter screen contains all of the instrument settings broken down into  
functional groups. The parameters can be changed in the yellow Value column. Type in a  
new value or select from the list offered, as appropriate. The possible value range is show to  
the left. If an invalid value is entered, it will be highlighted in red. Parameters are “greyed out”  
if the are currently inaccessible due the hardware not being fitted or if they are disabled by  
other settings.  
Configuring Supervisor Mode  
Users can access to a lock code protected sub-set of the configuration parameters that have  
been defined from the software. Up to 50 of the parameters can be copied into this mode. To  
define these screens, first select Supervisor Mode from the mode drop-down list.  
Select the functional group containing the parameter to be added. Highlight the parameter  
Name and click the Add Entry button. The Move Entry Up and Down buttons are used to  
change the order which the parameters will appear in Supervisor Mode. Unwanted entries  
can be highlighted and deleted with the Remove Entry button.  
Configuring Enhanced Operator Mode  
Users can access sub-set of the configuration parameters at the end of the normal Operation  
Mode screen sequence, that have been defined from the software. Up to 50 parameters can  
be copied in a similar manner to the Supervisor Mode selection by selecting Enhanced  
Operation Mode from the mode drop-down list. Note: Any parameters copied into the  
Enhanced Operation mode are not password protected.  
Page 166  
PC Software  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Functional Groups Mode Drop Down  
Parameter List  
Selected Parameters  
Add Entry Remove Entry  
Move Up  
Move Down  
Figure 56. Supervisor/Enhanced Operation Mode Configuration  
Profile Creation And Editing  
Select the Profile Editor from the button bar or view menu. An existing profile file can be  
opened from the file open menu or button, or uploaded from an instrument connected to the  
PC via the configuration socket or serial communications module. The new profile can be  
download to the instrument or saved to disk with a .pfl file extension.  
New / Open / Save / Print Upload Profile Download Profile Mode Drop-Down  
Header Parameters  
Header Values  
Profile Directory List  
Figure 57. Profile Editor – Header  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
PC Software  
Page 167  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
If the option to uploaded a profile is chosen, a list of profiles in  
the connected instrument is shown. The user can select the  
required profile from the list.  
A directory of existing profiles in the instrument can also be  
requested. This allows one or all of the profiles to be deleted.  
When downloading a profile to the instrument via the  
configuration socket or over serial communications, a list of  
existing profiles and empty profile slots is displayed. The user  
can select where to place the profile (a warning is shown if the  
profile will overwrite an existing profile).  
The number of free segments still available is also shown.  
A drop-down menu in the Profile Editor switches between the Profile Header and Segment  
Data. Refer to the Profiler Setup Menu and Profiler Option sections for full details of the  
header and segment data.  
Header data includes a 16-character profile name, options for starting the profile after a delay  
or at a specific day and time, the starting setpoint, the action to take after a power failure or  
profile abort and the number of times the profile will run.  
The segments are shown in Segment Data mode. The last segment is always an End, Join  
or Repeat Sequence type, and cannot be deleted. The user can select and change any  
segment’s type and values, and they can insert additional segments before the selected one.  
A dynamically scaled graphic shows the segments of the profile, with the select segment is  
highlighted in red. The five profile events are shown below the graph.  
Insert Segment Un-Zoom Profile Directory  
Selected Segment (Red)  
Segment List  
Segment Values  
Scaling  
Active Event  
A hard copy of the profile, including the graph and events can be printed from the File | Print  
menu.  
Page 168  
PC Software  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Changing the Start-up Splash Screen  
The graphic shown during the instrument start-up sequence can be changed from the main  
parameter screen. Select Download Splash Screen option from the Device menu. Choose  
your new graphic file (most common file types are supported). The chosen image will  
converted to monochrome and be rescaled to 160 pixels wide by 80 pixels high. For best  
results, the image should be simple and have an aspect ration of 2:1. Complex graphics with  
multiple colours or greyscales will not reproduce well. A preview of the results is shown.  
Click the Download button to store it to the instrument.  
Changing the Alternate Display Language  
The alternate language can be changed from the main parameter screen. Select the  
Download Language File option from the Device menu. Choose the correct file (language  
files have a .bin extension) and click the Open button to store it to the instrument.  
Instrument Simulation  
A fully functional and interactive instrument simulation is included with the software. This is  
linked to a simulated process, allowing changes to a configuration to be tested before use.  
The simulated instrument can also  
be accessed and configured by  
pressing its “buttons” with your  
mouse, or by using the 4 arrow  
keys on your keyboard.  
Active outputs are indicated in the  
panel to the right  
Figure 58. Honeywell DCP200 Simulation  
Configuring The Connection  
The software can communicate with the instrument via the RJ11 configuration socket located  
on the underside of the case, or via the Modbus TCP or RS485 communications options if  
either is fitted. Refer to the wiring section for connection details.  
The configuration socket is intended for initial configuration of the instrument before installing  
in the application. An RS232 to TTL lead (available from your supplier) is required connect  
from the PCs RS232 serial port to this socket.  
A front mounted USB port is available on some models; this can also be used to configure  
the instrument or transfer profile files, via a USB memory stick.  
CAUTION:  
The configuration lead/socket is not isolated from the process input or SSR Driver  
outputs. It is not intended for use in live applications.  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
PC Software  
Page 169  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                                 
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
A communications settings screen is shown whenever the user attempts to connect to the  
instrument from the software. The settings must be correct in order for communications to  
work successfully. First correctly select Configuration Socket or Bus as the Device connector,  
and select the PC Serial Com port that you have connected to  
For Modbus TCP, select Ethernet (bus coupler).  
If connecting via the configuration port, the Start  
and Stop bits must be 1 and Data bits 8. Parity  
must be None and address 1. The data bit-rate  
should be 4800 if Slot A is fitted with an Auxiliary  
input, 9600 if the Ethernet option is installed or  
19,200 for a Digital Input or if Slot A is empty.  
If the instrument has an RS485 module fitted, the  
Address, Parity and Bit rate values must match  
those of the instrument (even if you are connecting  
via the configuration port). The Start and Stop bits  
must be 1 and Data bits 8.  
If connecting via the Modbus TCP  
module, enter the instrument’s IP  
address and set the Port address to 502  
USB Memory Stick Folders & Files  
If a USB memory stick is to be used to transfer files between the instruments and/or the  
software, the files must be stored in specific DEVICE, CONFIG and PROFILE folders on the  
USB stick. When saving files from the software to the memory stick, ensure that you save  
them to the correct folder. Local storage on you PC can be in any folder of your choosing.  
The USB option also limits the file name to 8 characters plus the 3 digit . bct or .pfl extension.  
Longer file names will be truncated.  
DEVICE – This folder must be located in the  
Root of the USB memory stick  
CONFIG – Configuration files (*.bct)  
PROFILE – Profile program files (*.pfl)  
RECORDER – Recorder log folders/files.  
These can be created or saved from the PC  
software.  
CAUTION:  
When saving a file, the data will be overwritten If the file name already exists.  
Page 170  
PC Software  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Network Configuration For Modbus TCP Options  
If the instrument has the Modbus TCP communications option fitted, an IP address must be  
assigned to it in order for it to communicate with the Modbus TCP master device over your  
Ethernet network. The instrument can automatically receive an IP address if your network is  
set up to assign addresses to Ethernet devices connected to it. Alternatively, a fixed IP  
address can be assigned to it manually.  
The Graphical Controller Ethernet Configuration tool is provided in order to discover or  
assign the IP Address of the instrument and configure the settings.  
Setting the IP Address  
Install and run the Graphical Controller Ethernet Configuration software on your PC. Connect  
the instrument to your network by plugging an Ethernet cable into the RJ45 socket on the top  
of the case. If your PC is not connected to a network, the instrument can be connected to its  
Ethernet port directly.  
If your network assigns IP addresses  
automatically, pressing the “Search  
Network” button will list any of the  
Graphical Controllers connected to it.  
Their Network IP Address and MAC  
Addresses are also shown. For most  
fixed networks, only instruments that  
have the same numbers in the first 3 Octets of their IP address can be seen by the PC. In  
this case, use the method detailed in the “Fixing An IP Address” section below.  
Highlight the instrument that you wish to  
configure in the list and press the “Configure  
Selected Device Button”.  
The Current IP address on the network is shown  
in the Edit IP Address tab, as is the current  
configured IP address. A configured address of  
0.0.0.0 means the instrument does not have a  
fixed address, allowing it to receive one from the  
network (via a DHCP, BootP or AutoIP server).  
Set the value to 0.0.0.0 for automatic addressing,  
or set a new fixed IP address and press Apply.  
Note:  
If this number does not match your PC’s  
network addresses, further communication  
with the instrument will cease.  
Instrument Details  
The Details tab can be used to confirm communications with the instrument. When opened  
or refreshed, this tab collects the instruments Serial Number, Date of Manufacture and the  
Contact Details information, confirming that the Modbus TCP communications is functioning  
correctly.  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
PC Software  
Page 171  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Edit Modbus Settings  
The Edit Modbus Settings tab configures the  
connection between the Ethernet module and the  
instrument’s microprocessor. These settings  
MUST match with the settings in the instruments  
Communications Configuration menu. A faster  
baud rate can be used if large amounts of data  
are to be sent between the instrument and the  
master, but in most cases, it is recommended that  
the default settings are used.  
Defaults:  
Baud Rate  
Data Bits  
Stop Bits  
Parity  
9600  
Eight  
One  
None  
Fixing An IP Address  
If your instrument cannot be found using the “Search Network” button, the IP address can be  
set from the Set IP Address option on the software’s System menu.  
Enter it’s MAC Address* and the new IP  
Address (use 0.0.0.0 for automatic addressing)  
then press okay.  
*If your instruments 12 digit MAC Address isn’t  
know, it can be found on a label attached to the  
RJ45 connector of it’s Ethernet module.  
Page 172  
PC Software  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
17 Appendix 2 - Specifications  
Universal Process Input  
General Input Specifications  
Input Sample Rate:  
Digital Input Filter  
time constant  
Input Resolution:  
Supply Voltage  
Influence:  
Ten samples per second.  
0.0 (OFF), 0.5 to 100.0 seconds in 0.5 second increments.  
Always four times better than display resolution. 16 bit ADC.  
Negligible effect on readings within the specified supply voltage  
tolerances.  
Relative Humidity  
Influence:  
Negligible effect on readings within the specified humidity tolerance.  
Temperature  
Stability:  
0.01% of span/C change in ambient temperature.  
Input Impedance:  
V DC:  
47KΩ  
mA DC:  
5Ω  
Other ranges:  
Greater than 10Mresistive  
Isolation:  
PV Offset:  
Isolated from all outputs (except SSR Drivers) at 240V AC  
Adjustable input span. +ve values are added to Process Variable, -ve  
values are subtracted from Process Variable  
PV Display:  
Displays process variable up to 5% over and 5% under span.  
Thermocouple Input  
Thermocouple Types & Ranges  
Sensor  
Type  
Sensor  
Type  
Range in C  
Range in F  
Range in C Range in F  
B
C
D
L
100 to 1824°C  
0 to 2315°C  
0 to 2320°C  
211 to 3315°F  
32 to 4199°F  
32 to 4208°F  
0 to 762°C  
0 to 1399°C  
0 to 1850°C  
32 to °F  
N
32 to 2551°F  
32 to 3362°F  
PtRh20%:  
PtRh40%  
E
R
S
T
-240 to 1000°C -400 to 1832°F  
-200 to 1200°C -328 to 2192°F  
-240 to 1373°C -400 to 2503°F  
0 to 1759°C  
0 to 1762°C  
-240 to 400°C  
32 to 3198°F  
32 to 3204°F  
-400 to 752°F  
J (default)  
K
Note:  
Defaults to °F for USA units. Defaults to °C for non-USA units.  
The Scale Range Upper Limit and Scale Range Lower Limit parameters, can be used to  
restrict range. An optional decimal place can be displayed up to 999.9°C/F  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Specifications  
Page 173  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                                         
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Thermocouple Performance  
Calibration:  
Measurement  
Accuracy:  
Complies with BS4937, NBS125 and IEC584.  
0.1% of full range span 1LSD.  
NOTE: Reduced performance for B Thermocouple from 100 to 600°C.  
NOTE: PtRh 20% vs PtRh 40% Thermocouple accuracy is 0.25% and  
has reduced performance below 800°C.  
Linearization  
Accuracy:  
Linearization better than better 0.2°C (0.05 typical) for J, K, L, N and  
T thermocouples; than better than 0.5°C for other types.  
Cold Junction  
Compensation:  
Sensor Resistance  
Influence:  
If enabled, CJC error is better than 1C under operating conditions.  
Thermocouple 100Ω: <0.1% of span error.  
Thermocouple 1000Ω: <0.5% of span error.  
Sensor Break  
Protection:  
Break detected within two seconds. Process Control outputs go to the  
pre-set power value. High and Senor Break Alarms operate.  
Resistance Temperature Detector (RTD) Input  
RTD Types & Ranges  
Sensor  
Type  
3-Wire  
PT100  
Sensor  
Type  
NI120  
Range in C  
Range in F  
Range in C Range in F  
-80 to 240°C -112 to 464°F  
-199 to 800°C  
-328 to 1472°F  
Note:  
The Scale Range Upper Limit and Scale Range Lower Limit parameters, can be used to  
restrict range. An optional decimal place can be displayed up to 999.9°C/F  
RTD Performance  
Measurement  
Accuracy:  
0.1% of span 1LSD.  
Linearization  
Accuracy:  
Better than 0.2°C any point (0.05°C typical).  
PT100 Input complies with BS1904 and DIN43760 (0.00385Ω/Ω/°C).  
Sensor Resistance  
Influence:  
Pt100 50Ω/lead balanced.  
Automatic Lead Compensation: <0.5% of span error.  
RTD Sensor Current:  
150A (approximately).  
Sensor Break  
Protection:  
Break detected within two seconds. Process Control outputs go to the  
pre-set power value. High and Senor Break Alarms operate.  
Page 174  
Specifications  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
DC Linear Input  
DC Linear Types & Ranges  
Input  
Type  
Ranges  
Input  
Type  
Ranges  
mA DC  
mV DC  
V DC  
0 to 20mA  
0 to 50mV  
4 to 20mA  
0 to 5V  
1 to 5V  
0 to 10V  
10 to 50mV  
2 to 10V  
DC Linear Performance  
Display Scaling:  
Scalable up to –9999 to 10000 for any DC Linear input type.  
100 display units.  
Minimum Span:  
Decimal Point  
Display:  
Decimal point selectable from 0 to 3 places, but limits to 5 display digits  
(e.g. values > 99.9 have no more than 2 decimal places).  
DC Input Multi-Point  
Linearization:  
Up to 15 scaling values can be defined anywhere between 0.1 and 100%  
of input.  
Measurement  
Accuracy:  
0.1% of span 1LSD.  
1A on mA input terminals, 30V on voltage input terminals.  
Maximum Overload:  
Sensor Break  
Protection:  
Applicable for 4 to 20mA, 1 to 5V and 2 to 10V ranges only.  
Break detected within two seconds. Process Control outputs go to the  
pre-set power value. Low and Senor Break Alarms operate.  
Auxiliary Inputs  
Auxiliary Input Types & Ranges  
Input  
Type  
Ranges – Auxiliary Input A  
Input  
Type  
Ranges – Auxiliary Input B  
mA DC  
V DC  
mA DC  
V DC  
0 to 20mA  
0 to 5V  
4 to 20mA  
1 to 5V  
0 to 20mA  
0 to 5V  
4 to 20mA  
1 to 5V  
2 to 10V  
0 to 10V  
2 to 10V  
0 to 10V  
mV DC  
Pot  
0 to 100mV  
2KΩ or higher  
10 to 50mV  
Auxiliary Input Performance  
Input Sampling rate:  
Input Resolution:  
4 per second.  
16 bit ADC.  
Auxiliary Input  
Scaling:  
Scalable as a Remote Setpoint (RSP) input between –9999 and 10000,  
constrained by the Setpoint Limits.  
Measurement  
Accuracy:  
0.25% of input span 1 LSD.  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Specifications  
Page 175  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                         
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Input resistance:  
Input protection:  
mV ranges :  
>10MΩ.  
Voltage ranges: 47KΩ.  
Curent ranges: 5Ω.  
Voltage input: will withstand up to 5x input voltage overload without  
damage or degradation of performance in either polarity.  
Current input: will withstand 5x input current overload in reverse  
direction and up to 1A in the normal direction.  
Isolation:  
Reinforced safety isolation from outputs and inputs (except to Digital  
Input B).  
Sensor Break  
Detection:  
Applicable for 4 to 20mA, 1 to 5V and 2 to 10V ranges only.  
Control goes to the pre-set power value if Auxiliary Input is providing the  
active setpoint source.  
Digital Inputs  
Digital Input Functions  
Function  
Logic High  
Logic Low  
Profile Run/Hold  
Hold Running Profile  
Run or release selected profile  
Hold Segment Release  
Profile Abort  
No Action  
Release from Hold Segment  
Abort Running Profile  
Start Recording  
No Action  
Data Recorder  
Stop Recording  
Internal Setpoint Select  
Auto/Manual Control  
Control Outputs  
Select Local Setpoint 1  
Automatic Control Mode  
Enable PID Control Outputs  
Select Alternate Setpoint  
Manual Control Mode  
Disable PID Control Outputs  
The above actions apply if a digital input has been defined to control the specified function(s)  
Digital Input Performance  
Type:  
Voltage-free or TTL-compatible.  
Voltage-Free Operation:  
Connection to contacts of external switch or relay:  
Open = Logic High. Minimum contact resistance = 5KΩ,  
Closed = Logic Low. Maximum contact resistance = 50Ω.  
2.0 to 24VDC = Logic High.  
TTL levels:  
–0.6 to 0.8VDC = Logic Low.  
Digital Input Sensitivity:  
Edge Sensitive. Requires High-Low or Low-High transition to  
change function.  
Response Time:  
Isolation:  
Response within <0.25 second of signal state change.  
Reinforced safety isolation from inputs and other outputs.  
Page 176  
Specifications  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Output Specifications  
Output Module Types  
Single Relay, Single SSR Driver, Triac or DC linear.  
Option Slot 1 Options:  
Option Slot 2 Options:  
Single Relay, Dual Relay, Single SSR Driver, Dual SSR Driver, Triac,  
DC Linear or 24VDC Transmitter Power Supply.  
Single Relay, Dual Relay, Single SSR Driver, Dual SSR Driver, Triac,  
DC Linear or 24VDC Transmitter Power Supply.  
Option Slot 3 Options:  
Option Slot 4 Options:  
Quad Relay.  
Single Relay Output Performance  
Contact Type:  
Contact Rating:  
Lifetime:  
Single pole double throw (SPDT).  
2A resistive at 240V AC  
>500,000 operations at rated voltage/current.  
Reinforced safety isolation from inputs and other outputs.  
Isolation:  
Dual Relay Output Performance  
Contact Type:  
Contact Rating:  
Lifetime:  
2 x Single pole single throw (SPST) with shared common.  
2A resistive at 240V AC.  
>200,000 operations at rated voltage/current.  
Reinforced safety isolation from inputs and other outputs.  
Isolation:  
Quad Relay Output Performance  
Contact Type:  
Contact Rating:  
Lifetime:  
4 x Single pole single throw (SPST).  
2A resistive at 240V AC.  
>500,000 operations at rated voltage/current.  
Reinforced safety isolation from inputs and other outputs.  
Isolation:  
Single Dual SSR Driver Output Performance  
Drive Capability:  
Isolation:  
10VDC minimum at up to 20mA load.  
Not isolated from the universal input, Ethernet communications or  
other SSR driver outputs.  
Dual SSR Driver Output Performance  
Drive Capability:  
Isolation:  
10VDC minimum at up to 20mA load.  
Not isolated from the universal input, Ethernet communications or  
other SSR driver outputs.  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Specifications  
Page 177  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Triac Output Performance  
Operating Voltage:  
Current Rating:  
20 to 280Vrms @47 to 63Hz.  
0.01 to 1A (full cycle rms on-state @ 25C); derates linearly above  
40C to 0.5A @ 80C.  
Non-repetitive Surge  
Current:  
25A peak maximum, for <16.6ms.  
OFF-State dv/dt:  
500V/s Minimum at Rated Voltage.  
1mA rms Maximum at Rated Voltage.  
1.5V peak Maximum at Rated Current.  
600V minimum.  
OFF-State leakage:  
ON-State Voltage Drop:  
Repetitive Peak OFF-  
state Voltage, Vdrm:  
Isolation:  
Reinforced safety isolation from inputs and other outputs.  
DC Linear Output Types & Ranges  
Input  
Type  
mA DC  
Ranges  
4 to 20mA  
Input  
Type  
V DC  
Ranges  
0 to 10V  
0 to 20mA  
0 to 5V  
2 to 10V  
DC Linear Output Performance  
Eight bits in 250mS  
Resolution:  
(10 bits in 1 second typical, >10 bits in >1 second typical).  
Every control algorithm execution (10 times per second).  
Update Rate:  
0 to 20mA & 4 to 20mA:  
500Ω maximum.  
Load Impedance:  
0 to 5V, 0 to 10V & 2 to 10V:  
500Ω minimum.  
Short circuit protected.  
0.25% (mA @ 250Ω, V @ 2kΩ).  
Accuracy:  
Degrades linearly to 0.5% for increasing burden (to specification  
limits).  
For 4 to 20mA and 2 to 10V a 2% over/underdrive is applied (3.68 to  
20.32mA and 1.84 to 10.16V). When used as control output  
Reinforced safety isolation from inputs and other outputs.  
Over/Under Drive:  
Isolation:  
0 to 10VDC Transmitter  
Power Supply*  
Can be used to provide an adjustable 0.0 to 10.0V (regulated), up to  
20mA output to excite external circuits & transmitters.  
24V Transmitter Power Supply Performance  
Power Rating  
19 to 28VDC (24V nominal) up to 20mA output, to for external circuits  
& transmitters.  
Isolation:  
Reinforced safety isolation from inputs and other outputs.  
*see Linear output (above) for adjustable 0 to 10V Transmitter Power Supply  
Page 178  
Specifications  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Communications  
Supported Communication Methods  
Function  
Type  
Direct configuration using the PC Configuration Software  
PC Configuration Socket  
RS485  
Configuration and general communications using Modbus RTU.  
Configuration and general serial communications using the Modbus  
TCP protocol.  
Ethernet  
Upload/download of configuration/profile files from the PC Software  
or other instruments and download for Data Recordings.  
USB  
PC Configuration Socket  
RS232 Serial Communications  
Type:  
PC Configurator Cable to RJ11 socket under case.  
Connection  
Isolation:  
Not isolated from input or SSR Driver outputs. For bench  
configuration only. CAUTION: Not for use in live applications.  
RS485  
RS485 Asynchronous Serial Communications Module.  
Type:  
Locates in Option Slot A.  
Connection  
Connection via rear terminals (refer to wiring diagram).  
Modbus RTU Slave or Modbus RTU Setpoint Broadcast Master.  
1 to 255.  
Protocol:  
Slave Address Range:  
Bit rate:  
4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600 or 115200 bps.  
10 or 11 (depending on parity setting) plus 1 Stop Bit  
None, even or odd (selectable).  
Bits per character:  
Parity:  
240V reinforced safety isolation from all inputs and outputs.  
Isolation:  
Ethernet  
Ethernet Communications Module.  
Type:  
Locates in Option Slot A.  
Connection  
Connection via RJ45 connector on top of case.  
Modbus TCP Slave only.  
Protocol:  
10BaseT or 100BaseT.  
Supported Speed:  
IP Address Allocation:  
Isolation:  
Via DHCP or manual configuration via PC Tool.  
240V reinforced safety isolation from the supply, inputs and outputs  
(except SSR Drivers).  
USB Socket  
USB Memory Stick.  
Targeted Peripheral:  
Connection  
Protocol:  
Locates in Option Slot C. Connection via front mounted connector.  
USB 1.1 or 2.0 compatible. Mass Storage Class.  
Reinforced safety isolation from all inputs and outputs  
Isolation:  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Specifications  
Page 179  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Display  
Display Type:  
160 x 80 pixel, monochrome graphic LCD with a dual colour  
(red/green) backlight.  
Display Area:  
66.54mm (W) x 37.42mm (H).  
Display Characters:  
Trend View:  
0 to 9, a to z, A to Z, plus ( ) - and _  
120 of 240 data points shown in a scrollable window. Data is not  
retained when power turned off or if time base is changed.  
Trend View Data:  
Displays any active alarm plus PV input (solid) & Setpoint (dotted) at  
sample time or Maximum & Minimum PV input value measured  
between samples (candle-stick graph).  
Trend View Y-axis Scaling  
Trend View Sample Rate:  
The instrument automatically scales this between 2 to 100% of Input  
Span for maximum resolution of displayed data.  
1; 2; 5; 10; 15; 30 seconds or 1; 2; 5; 10; 15; 30 minutes.  
Control Loop  
Pre-Tune, Auto Pre-Tune, Self-Tune and Manual Tuning  
Tuning Types:  
Primary & Secondary (e.g. Heat & Cool) 0.5% to 999.9% of input  
span in 0.1% increments, or On/Off control.  
Proportional Bands:  
Integral Time Constant, 1s to 99min 59s and OFF  
Derivative Time Constant, 1s to 99 min 59s and OFF  
Automatic Reset  
Rate  
Bias added each control algorithm execution.  
Manual Reset  
Adjustable in the range 0 to 100% of output power (single output) or -  
100% to +100% of output power (dual output).  
–20% to +20% of Primary + Secondary Proportional Band.  
ON/OFF switching differential 0.1% to 10.0% of input span.  
Deadband/Overlap:  
ON/OFF Differential:  
Auto/Manual Control:  
Selectable with “bumpless” transfer when switching between  
Automatic and Manual control.  
Selectable from 0.5 to 512 seconds in 0.1s steps.  
Control Cycle Times:  
Setpoint Range:  
Limited by Setpoint Upper Limit and Setpoint Lower Limit.  
Limited by Scale Range Upper Limit and Setpoint Minimum.  
Limited by Scale Range Lower Limit and Setpoint Maximum.  
Ramp rate selectable 1 to 9999 LSD’s per hour and infinite.  
Setpoint Maximum:  
Setpoint Minimum:  
Setpoint Ramp:  
Data Recorder Option  
Recording Memory:  
Recording Interval:  
Recording Capacity:  
1Mb non-volatile flash memory (data retained when power is off).  
1; 2; 5; 10; 15; 30 seconds or 1; 2; 5; 10; 15; 30 minutes.  
Dependant on sample rate and number of values recorded.  
Example: 2 values can be recorded for 7 days at 10s intervals.  
More values or faster sample rates reduce the maximum duration.  
RTC Battery Type:  
RTC accuracy:  
VARTA CR 1616 3V Lithium. Clock runs for >1 year without power.  
Real Time Clock error <1second per day.  
Page 180  
Specifications  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                       
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Profiler Option  
Profile Limits:  
Number of profiles = 64 maximum.  
Total number of segments (all programs) = 255 maximum.  
1 to 9999 loops back to specified segment.  
Loop Back Segments:  
Profile Cycling:  
1 to 9999 or Infinite repeats per profile.  
Sequence Repeats:  
Segment Types:  
1 to 9999 or Infinite repeats of joined profile sequences.  
Ramp Up/Down over time, Ramp Rate Up/Down, Step, Dwell, Hold,  
Join A Profile, End or Repeat Sequence Then End.  
Time-base:  
All times are specified in hh:mm:ss (Hours, Minutes & Seconds).  
Segment Time:  
Maximum segment time 99:59:59 hh:mm:ss. Use loop-back for  
longer segments (e.g. 24:00:00 x 100 loops = 100 days).  
Ramp Rate:  
0.001 to 9999.9 display units per hour.  
Hold Segment Release:  
Start From Value:  
Delayed Start:  
Release With Key-press, At Time Of Day or via a Digital Input.  
1st segment starts from current setpoint or current PV input value.  
After 0 to 99:59 (hh:mm) time delay, or at specified day(s) & time.  
Profile End Action:  
Selectable from: Keep Last Profile Setpoint, Use Controller Setpoint  
or Control Outputs Off.  
Profile Abort Action:  
Selectable from: Keep Last Profile Setpoint, Use Controller Setpoint  
or Control Outputs Off.  
Power/signal Loss  
Recovery Action:  
Selectable from: Continue Profile, Restart Profile, Keep Last Profile  
Setpoint, Use Controller Setpoint or Control Outputs Off.  
Auto-Hold:  
Off or Hold if input >Band above and/or below SP for each segment.  
Run, Manual Hold/Release, Abort or jump to next segment.  
Profile Control:  
Profile Timing Accuracy:  
0.02% Basic Profile Timing Accuracy.  
<0.5 second per Loop, End or Join segment.  
Segment Events:  
Events turn on for the duration of the segment. For End Segments,  
the event state persists until another profile starts or the unit is  
powered down.  
Alarms  
Five “soft” alarms, each selectable for any of the supported alarm  
types. Physical outputs can be assigned for each alarm.  
Maximum Number of  
Alarms:  
Process High, Process Low, Band, Deviation, Rate of Signal Change  
(per minute), Sensor/input Break, Loop Alarm. Band and Deviation  
(high or low) alarm values are relative to the current setpoint value.  
Alarm Types:  
Adjustable deadband from 1 LSD to full span (in display units) for  
Process, Band or Deviation Alarms.  
Alarm Hysteresis:  
Rate Of Change Alarm hysteresis is the shortest time (1 to 9999  
secs) the rate of change must be above the threshold for the alarm  
activate, or fall below the threshold to deactivate.  
Logical OR of alarms 1 & 2, 1 to 3, 1 to 4 or 1 to 5 or Logical AND of  
alarms 1 to 5 with Profiler Events 1 to 5, to any suitable output.  
Combinatorial Alarms:  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Specifications  
Page 181  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                           
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Conditions For Use  
Reference Test Conditions  
Ambient Temperature:  
Relative Humidity:  
Supply Voltage:  
20C ±2C.  
60 to 70%.  
100 to 240V AC 50Hz ±1%.  
<10Ω for thermocouple input.  
<0.1Ω/lead balanced (Pt100).  
Source Resistance:  
RTD Lead Resistance:  
Operating Conditions  
Ambient Temperatures  
Relative Humidity:  
Altitude:  
0C to 55C (operating) and -20C to 80C (storage).  
20% to 95% non-condensing.  
Up to 2000m above sea level.  
Either 100 to 240V ±10% AC 50/60Hz  
Supply Voltage:  
or 20 to 48V AC 50/60Hz & 22 to 55V DC for low voltage versions.  
Mains versions:  
24VA.  
Power Consumption:  
Low voltage versions: 15VA / 12W.  
1000Ω maximum (thermocouple).  
Source Resistance:  
50Ω per lead maximum, balanced  
RTD Input Lead  
Resistance:  
Standards  
CE, UL, ULC.  
Conformance Norms:  
EMC standards:  
Complies with CE EN61326.  
Complies with CE EN61010-1 and UL3121.  
Pollution Degree 2, Installation Category II.  
Safety Standards:  
To IP66 (IP65 front USB connector). IP20 behind the panel.  
(IP ratings are not tested for or approved by UL)  
Front Panel Sealing:  
Dimensions  
1/4 DIN (96 x 96mm).  
Front Bezel Size:  
Mounting:  
Plug-in with panel mounting fixing strap.  
92mm x 92mm. Max panel thickness 6.0mm  
117mm  
Panel Cut-out Size:  
Depth Behind Panel:  
Ventilation  
20mm gap required above, below and behind.  
0.65kg maximum.  
Weight:  
Terminals:  
Screw type (combination head).  
Page 182  
Specifications  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                       
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
18 Appendix 3 - Product Coding  
-
x
-
x
-
x
-
x
-
x
-
x
-
x
-
x
-
x
-
x
DCP20  
Model Code  
USB/Recorder  
Graphical Profiler  
1
2
3
Graphical Profiler with USB Port  
Graphical Profiler /Recorder with USB Port  
Supply Voltage  
100-240VAC  
0
2
24-48V AC/DC  
Option Slot 1  
Not fitted  
0
1
2
L
8
Relay Output  
SSR Driver Output  
Linear DC Output  
Triac Output  
Option Slot 2  
Not fitted  
0
1
2
L
8
9
S
T
Relay Output  
SSR Driver Output  
Linear DC Output  
Triac Output  
Dual Relay Output  
Dual SSR Driver Output  
24VDC Transmitter Power Supply  
Option Slot 3  
Not fitted  
0
1
2
L
8
9
S
T
Relay Output  
SSR Driver Output  
Linear DC Output  
Triac Output  
Dual Relay Output  
Dual SSR Driver Output  
24VDC Transmitter Power Supply  
Option Slot 4  
Not fitted  
0
1
4 Relay Output  
Option Slot A  
Not fitted  
0
1
3
4
5
RS-485 Serial Communications  
Digital Input 1  
Aux Input A  
Ethernet Port  
Option Slot B  
Not fitted  
0
Aux Input B (including digital input 2)  
Option Slot C  
Not fitted  
R
0
Reserved  
1
HMI & Manual Language  
English  
1
2
3
4
5
R
French  
German  
Italian  
Spanish  
Russian  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
DCP200 Profile Controller & Recorder - Product Manual  
Honeywell contacts  
ARGENTINA  
CANADA  
ICELAND  
REPUBLIC OF IRELAND SPAIN  
HONEYWELL S.A.I.C.  
BELGRANO 1156  
BUENOS AIRES  
ARGENTINA  
HONEYWELL LIMITED  
THE HONEYWELL  
CENTRE  
300 Yorkland Blvd.  
NORTH YORK,  
ONTARIO  
HONEYWELL  
Hataekni .hf  
Armuli 26  
PO Box 8336  
128 reykjavik  
Iceland  
HONEYWELL  
Unit 1  
Robinhood Business  
Park  
Robinhood Road  
DUBLIN 22  
HONEYWELL S.A  
Factory  
Josefa Valcarcel, 24  
28027 MADRID  
SPAIN  
Tel. : 54 1 383 9290  
Tel. : 34 91 31 3 61 00  
ASIA PACIFIC  
HONEYWELL ASIA  
PACIFIC Inc.  
Room 3213-3225  
Sun Kung Kai Centre  
N° 30 Harbour Road  
WANCHAI  
M2J 1S1  
CANADA  
Tel.: 800 461 0013  
Fax:: 416 502 5001  
Tel : 354 588 5000  
Republic of Ireland  
Tel. : 353 1 4565944  
SWEDEN  
ITALY  
HONEYWELL A.B.  
S-127 86 Skarholmen  
STOCKHOLM  
SWEDEN  
Tel. : 46 8 775 55 00  
HONEYWELL S.p.A.  
Via P. Gobetti, 2/b  
20063 Cernusco Sul  
Naviglio  
REPUBLIC OF  
SINGAPORE  
HONEYWELL PTE LTD  
BLOCK 750E CHAI  
CHEE ROAD  
CZECH  
REPUBLIC  
HONEYWELL, Spol.s.r.o. ITALY  
HONG KONG  
Tel. : 852 829 82 98  
Budejovicka 1  
Tel. : 39 02 92146 1  
06-01 CHAI CHEE IND.  
PARK  
1646 SINGAPORE  
REP. OF SINGAPORE  
Tel. : 65 2490 100  
SWITZERLAND  
HONEYWELL A.G.  
Hertistrasse 2  
8304 WALLISELLEN  
SWITZERLAND  
140 21 Prague 4  
Czech Republic  
Tel. : 42 2 6112 3434  
AUSTRALIA  
MEXICO  
HONEYWELL S.A. DE  
CV  
AV. CONSTITUYENTES  
900  
COL. LOMAS ALTAS  
11950 MEXICO CITY  
MEXICO  
HONEYWELL LIMITED  
5 Thomas Holt Drive  
North Ryde Sydney  
NSW AUSTRALIA 2113  
Tel. : 61 2 353 7000  
AUSTRIA  
DENMARK  
Tel. : 41 1 831 02 71  
HONEYWELL A/S  
Automatikvej 1  
DK 2860 Soeborg  
DENMARK  
REPUBLIC OF SOUTH  
AFRICA  
HONEYWELL  
Southern Africa  
PO BOX 138  
Milnerton 7435  
REPUBLIC OF SOUTH  
AFRICA  
TURKEY  
HONEYWELL  
Otomasyon ve Kontrol  
Sistemlen San ve Tic  
A.S.  
(Honeywell Turkey A.S.)  
Emirhan Cad No 144  
Barbaros Plaza C. Blok  
Kat 18  
Dikilitas 80700 Istanbul  
TURKEY  
Tel : 90-212 258 18 30  
HONEYWELL AUSTRIA Tel. : 45 39 55 56 58  
G.m.b.H.  
Handelskai 388  
A1020 VIENNA  
AUSTRIA  
Tel : 52 5 259 1966  
FINLAND  
HONEYWELL OY  
Ruukintie 8  
FIN-02320 ESPOO 32  
FINLAND  
THE NETHERLANDS  
HONEYWELL BV  
Laaderhoogtweg 18  
1101 EA AMSTERDAM  
ZO  
Tel. : 27 11 805 12 01  
Tel. : 43 1 727 800  
ROMANIA  
HONEYWELL Office  
Bucharest  
147 Aurel Vlaicu Str.,  
Sc.Z.,  
Apt 61/62  
BELGIUM  
Tel. : 358 0 3480101  
THE NETHERLANDS  
Tel : 31 20 56 56 911  
HONEYWELL S.A.  
3 Avenue de Bourget  
B-1140 BRUSSELS  
BELGIUM  
FRANCE  
HONEYWELL S.A.  
Bâtiment « le Mercury »  
NORWAY  
HONEYWELL A/S  
UNITED KINGDOM  
HONEYWELL  
Tel. : 32 2 728 27 11  
Parc Technologique de St Askerveien 61  
R-72921 Bucharest  
ROMANIA  
Unit 1,2 &4 Zodiac House  
Calleva Park  
Aubin  
PO Box 263  
BRAZIL  
Route de l’Orme  
N-1371 ASKER  
Tel : 40-1 211 00 76/  
Aldermaston  
HONEYWELL DO  
BRAZIL  
AND CIA  
(CD 128)  
91190 SAINT-AUBIN  
FRANCE  
NORWAY  
Tel. : 47 66 76 20 00  
211 79  
Berkshire RG7 8HW  
UNITED KINGDOM  
Tel : 44 118 906 2600  
RUSSIA  
Rua Jose Alves Da  
Chunha  
Lima 172  
BUTANTA  
05360.050 SAO PAULO  
SP  
Tel. from France:  
01 60 19 80 00  
From other countries:  
33 1 60 19 80 00  
POLAND  
HONEYWELL INC  
4 th Floor Administrative  
Builiding of AO "Luzhniki" HONEYWELL INC.  
Management  
24 Luzhniki  
HONEYWELL Sp.z.o.o  
UI Domainewksa 41  
02-672 WARSAW  
POLAND  
U.S.A.  
INDUSTRIAL PROCESS  
CONTROLS  
512 VIRGINIA DRIVE  
GERMANY  
Tel. : 48 22 606 09 00  
119048 Moscow  
BRAZIL  
Tel. : 55 11 819 3755  
HONEYWELL AG  
Kaiserleistrasse 39  
D-63067 OFFENBACH  
GERMANY  
RUSSIA  
Tel : 7 095 796 98 00/01  
PA 19034-3260  
FT. WASHINGTON  
U.S.A.  
PORTUGAL  
HONEYWELL  
PORTUGAL LDA  
Edificio Suecia II  
BULGARIA  
SLOVAKIA  
HONEYWELL Ltd  
Av. do Forte nr 3 - Piso 3 Mlynske nivy 73  
Tel. : 1-800-343-0228  
HONEYWELL EOOD  
14, Iskarsko Chausse  
POB 79  
BG- 1592 Sofia  
BULGARIA  
Tel. : 49 69 80 64444  
VENEZUELA  
HUNGARY  
HONEYWELL Kft  
Gogol u 13  
H-1133 BUDAPEST  
HUNGARY  
2795 CARNAXIDE  
PORTUGAL  
Tel. : 351 1 424 50 00  
PO Box 75  
820 07 BRATISLAVA 27  
SLOVAKIA  
Tel. : 421 7 52 47 400/  
425  
HONEYWELL CA  
APARTADO 61314  
1060 CARACAS  
VENEZUELA  
Tel : 359-791512/  
794027/ 792198  
Tel. : 58 2 239 0211  
Tel. : 36 1 451 43 00  
51-52-25-150, Issue 1 – April 2009  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Harbor Freight Tools Router 95668 User Manual
Hasbro Robotics 81273 User Manual
Honeywell Air Cleaner 18155 User Manual
Honeywell Home Security System VIA 30PSE User Manual
HP Hewlett Packard Computer Drive Ultrium Drive User Manual
Hunter Fan Outdoor Ceiling Fan 41764 01 User Manual
ICP DAS USA Modem I 2532 User Manual
iHome Clock Radio iH22 User Manual
Ikelite Digital Camera IXUS 980 IS User Manual
iLive Portable Speaker IHT3817DT User Manual